COLLECTION ~ OF WILLIAM SCHAUS PRESENTED TO.THE NATIONAL MUSEUM MCMV Las Mela 5 ies Srey un j an 5 Et as i Way f i ey alt f ae Las Thesis) Many i) NRE ! f PROCEEDINGS OF THE GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS OF THE AQOLOGICAL SOCIETY Oot 0) Nel)? Ne 1920, pp. 1-194, witH 5 Puates and 68 TExr-FIGURES. <7" At >" . PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, SOLD AT ITS HOUSE IN REGENT’S PARK. LONDON: “MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CoO, PATERNOSTER ROW, * bates et OF THE GOUNCIL AND OFFICERS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 1920, Patron. His Magesty Tue Kina. COUNCIL. His Grace Tue Duke or Beprorp, K.G., THE Hon. Cecit Barina, M.A. AuFrreD H. Cocks, Esq., M.A. Lr.-Cot. 8. Moncxron Copk- MAN, M.D., F.B.S. CHARLES DrumMmonp, KEsqQ., Treasurer. Hue 8. Guapsrone, KEsq., M.A., F.R.S.E: Sir Srpneéy F. Harmer, K.B.E., MvA. Sei FR.S. Vice.) President. | Pror. James Po Hin DSc, F.R.S., Vice-President. WILLIAM Huntsman, Esq. Pror. ERNEST D.Sc. G.C.M.G., K.C.LE. W. McBripr, , F.R.S., Vice-President. Cou. Str Henry McManovy, F.R.S., President. E. G. B. Mrapr-Watpo, Ksq., Vice-President. P, CHALMERS MircHe.L, Ksq., C.B.H., M.A.) DiSe.9 LG, FLRAS., Secretary. THE Karu or Onstow, O.B.E. Masor ALBERr Pam, O.B.E. ADRIAN D, W. Po.tock, Ksq. His GraczE THe Duke oF RurLanD, K.G. THE Marquis oF Siico, F.S.A., Vice-President. Masor RicHarpD 8. TAYtor. A. 'TREvor-Barry®k, Esq., M.A. AntHONY H. WINGFIELD, Ksq., Vice- President. ance Paaneeoe P. Coatmers MircHey, C.B Secretary. » M.A., D.Sce., LID, Faness R, I. Pocock, F.RS., F.LS., Curator of Mammals and Resident Superintendent of the Gardens. D, Seru-Smrvru, Curator of Birds and Inspector of Works. Kpwarb G. BouLencer, Curator of Reptiles. Miss L. KE. Curusman, F.E.S., Curator of Insects. Prof, R. T. Lererr, Dse., M.D., Director of Prosectoriwm. Dr. C. F. Sonnvac, Ch.B., Anatomist. Dr. N.S. Lucas, M.B., Ch.B., Pathologist. DrrG. Mi: Vuvirs, M. RUS. ib R.C.P., Hon. Parasitologist. KF, Martin Duncan, F. F. W. Bonn, ee eae W.H Coun, Chief Clerk, 2M. S., Librarian. LIST OF CONTENTS. 1920, pp. 1--194. EXHIBITIONS AND NOTICES. r, R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the months of November POUND ECETMNDET OLD ateedss canis scons sea eee Oey ear A. J. Etwes, F.R.S. Letter relative to the condition ~ ot herds of Moose in Yellowstone Park... ..2...c05.00003 D. Sera-Smuirn, F.Z.S. Remarks on an interesting case of response of Sparrows to colour ............5..00. . EK. G. Boutencmr, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a remarkable new Land-'Tortoise (7Zestudo 1s DONE OCG OO) aa ee Oe ee . F. Martin Duncan, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photomicrographs of Acari from the lungs of Macacus rhesus . R. H. Burne, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, some skeletons of foetal Mammals prepared by Tadpoles eevee ceer eee re cee eee eee ree oes oeee see ere see oeeeeer Zhe eeaeee r, R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of January, AD eRe EEE ei cic cs gh ova mom seabionsiaann Sa tietleteaia tt >», F. Martin Duncan, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photomicrographs of a female Mole-flea ( //ystri- CHODS HUMEAUP Ce Nae titek Sacellnais tac Me Rete des chdae deg es 9.s.6 cre aie nue Bt . R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the month of February, 1920 @eee se eceee see eee ere oer ea moeeoeoese eet eoenseeseoe ree eesesceeeoee 190 190 190 191 Pot SM 1v Page Mr. EK. G. Boutencer, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a Hrog with a duplicate foot’ <....- 133s eee 192 Prof. J. P. Hitz, F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an Embryo obtained from a Kangaroo recently living in the Society’s' Menagerie.......2.3%0....02./. Seana 192 Sir Frank Coryer, K.B.E., F.R.C.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of skulls of Macacus rhesus ... 192 Prof. H. Maxwetu Lerrroy, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photographs of Egret Farms in Sind... 192 Mr, R. H. Burne, M.A. F.Z:S. Exhibition ~ ot, and remarks upon, a series of Pig’s mandibles from the New, Hebrides: ; :5ee) eta a ee ee 193 Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, two Fournier’s Hutia (Capromys pilorides)...... 193 The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of March, 1920 ......... 193 Mr. Arruur Loveripcr. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a collection of Snakes which he had obtained in East Africa, during the years 1915-1919) 77 7s s223 3 eee 193 Miss L. EK. Cu&éusman, F.E.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of lantern-slides illustrating the life- history and habits of the Ichneumon-fly, Rhyssa DOT SUMSOTIUG, oi ocagia ere aed tx fant ie toe oe eee ok ee 194 Dr. P. Cuatmers Mircueui, C.B.E., M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photo- graphs of Abbot's Duiker (Cephalophus spadia) ...... 194 Mr. D. Seru-Suira, F.Z.S8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, lantern-slides showing the display of a male Monaul Pheasant (Lophophorus impeyanus) ............ 194 Mr. L, Hocpen, M.A., B.Sc. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Amblystoma@ .......65.6.40001e- cease 194 cs PAPERS. Page . A Revision of the Ichneumonid Genera Labium and Pecilocryptus. By Rowiann EK. TurNER and JAMES WaArerston,—(Text-figures. 1-1.) (.igdicsct veces des. ] a 2. Description of the Larynx and QCisophagus of a | Common Macaque (Jacacus fascicularis) exhibiting several abnormal Characters. By C. F. Sonwraa, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S., Anatomist to the Society. Rect MUS ol OE) ler. obs ods « Qpanct es Pate m tating cle bo ms 3. Some Australian Opiliones. By H. R. Hoae, M.A., peer ciliates: = TIT.) oc.icus eee eel a. et neh 31 4. Revision of the English Species of Red Spider (Genera Tetranychus and Oligonychus). By STANutEy Hirst. ORT rai SOS gl Oe lie. baie ane ak es Sede t 34 oy gunrde 49 5. On the Aortic Ligament in Indian Fishes. By D. R. Buarracuarya, M.Sc., Department, Zoological The Muir Central College, Allahabad, India, U.P. (Plates I. & II. and Text-figures 1-5.) .................. 61 On some Lizards of the Genus Chaleides. By E.G. Boutencer, F.Z.S. (Text-figures 1-4.) ............... 17 iar) 7. Report on the Deaths in the Gardens in 1919. With Notes on Avian Enteritis. By Naryantex 8. Lucas, M.B., F.Z.S., Pathologist to the Society. (With aL (CHISTES) seal a gee reg ang ee 85 8. An Apodous Amia calva. By ArrHur WILEY, F.RS., K4.5., McGill University, Montreal 2........0:0..... 89 9. On the External Characters of the South-American . Monkeys. By R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. (Text-figures Hemel) MP oe MAR enc tik Con Ree Batts MMPS oi fos 9] 10. The Comparative Anatomy of the Tongues of the Mammaha.—I. General Description of the Tongue. By C. F. Sonnrac, M.D., Ch.B, F.Z.8., Anatomist Lomume Society. (Lext-fisures 6-1 %.)) -.:.h..c..e.. 2.2 115 v1 11. Notes on East African Lizards collected in 1915-1919, with Descriptions of a new Genus and Species of Skink and new Subspecies of Gecko. By ARrTHuR Lovirnipegr. \(Text-figure i!) 2 8.7220... 0). eee 12. On Abnormal Features in the Peritoneum of a Raccoon. By C. F. Sonnrac, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.8., Anatomist to the Society. (Text-figures 18-19.) ...............00. 18. On Abnormalities of the Abdominal Arteries of a young Panda. By C.F. Sonnrac, M.D. ChB, ¥.Z.8., Anatomist to the Society. (Text-figure 20.).. 14, On the External Characters of the Ratel (Jellivora) and the Wolverene (Gulo). By R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., FAS. (Text-figures 14-62). sig. Alphabetical List.of Contributors. 49:60) 9 eee eee eee Index of. Lllustrations ..¢3.250 29 eee 131 169 175 ie Vil x] AIP RABE POA wdils 1 ie rcs COUN TORT BU Osis. With References to the several Articles contributed by each. (1920, pp. 1-194.) Page Buatracuarya, D, R., M.Sc. On the Aortic Ligament in Indian Fishes. (Plates I. Pine Mee be xu-nOUTeS: LAD, hye Wii su ces Cevasee es ee tee vented 61 Boutencer, EK. G., F.Z.8., Curator of Reptiles. On some Lizards of the Genus Chalcides. (Text- 1 GWG JL it os Ae at ea eA enn AT a Or a Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a remarkable new Land-Tortoise (Testudo loveridgit) ...........ccceecenceeeeees 190 Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a Frog with a PA LOO etree ce is han Reaw ona edd ce Beebe. ong 8s oie 122 Burne, R. H., M.A., F.Z8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, some skeletons of foetal Mammals prepared by Tadpoles .....................04. LOT Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of Pig’s mandibles from the New Hebrides ...................c0e0000 193 CuHEeesMAN, Miss L. E., F.E.S. ~ Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of lantern- shdes illustrating the lfe-history and habits of the Ichneumon-fly, Rhyssa persuasorid ...... 0.600 ceeee ee eee eens 194 V1ll Couyer, Sir Franx, K.B.E, F.R.CS. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of skulls of Macacus rhesus 660.00. deat eee Duncan, F. Martin, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photomicrographs of Acari from the lungs of Macacus rhesus ............ 00.0000 Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photomicrographs of a female Mole-flea (Hystrichopsylla talpe) ..... “thin ieee Ewes, A. J., F.R.S. Letter relative to the condition of herds of Moose in Yellowstone Park 2-325. 2 ee ee eee Hin, Prof. i oP,, 1.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an Embryo obtained from a Kangaroo recently living in the Society’s Menagerie 1... ae Meinl niin gner es code eer Hirst, STANLEY. Revision of the Engish Species of Red Spider (Genera Tetranychus and Oligonychus). (Text-figures 1-5.) ...... Hoaern, L., M.A., B.Sc. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of AimbLYStOTIG (OR tet ee ees oho, heey ae Hoaa, H. R., M.A., F.Z8. Some Australian Opiliones. (Plates I.-III.)............ Lerroy, Prof. H. Maxwe tt, F.Z.5. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photographs of Heret Parisi Sime st, yet 0 erence ee eee Page 190 191 190 192 49 194 St 1m, LovEeRIDGE, ARTHUR. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a collection of Snakes which he had obtained in East Africa during the Pema J ect h yiaras Scie ets he memeer celts Wh «th vinta esulha ceseenegh oa Notes on East African Lizards collected in 1915-1919, with Description of a new Genus and Species of Skink and new Subspecies of Gecko. (Text-figure 1.) ............ Lucas, Narwaniet 8., M.B., F.Z.8., Pathologist to the Society. Report on the Deaths in the Gardens, 1919. (With a, CON oe Scyg Re Mes GUA CNR PIR 4A Ct hme ue MircHEeLL, P. Cuaumers, C.B.E., M,A.; D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Society. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during phesmontbnof, March VOQ0 ” o.. j.cckas i vorageysceh eos es Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photographs of Abbot’s Duiker (Cephalophus spadix) ............cceeeceeeees Pocock, ReernAtp I., F.R.S., F.L.8., F.Z.S., Curator of Mammals and Resident Superintendent of the Gardens, On the External Characters of the South American Meemikeys: (Text-figures 1-13.) oo ci... ccsetevedeessactentens On the External Characters of the Ratel (J/ellivora) and the Wolverene (Gulo). (Text-figures 14-18.) ......... Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of November and December, 1919 ... Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie durimethe month of January, 1920, 0.0 cccce cies es-s ores Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of) February, 1920 ....0....0.......05.02. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, two Fournier’s Hutia eon Set) OIUCS nec ert Mec dnes hacer creree rs teense) tee Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920. b 193 131 193 149 91 EG 189 Pot x Seru-Smiru, Davip, F Z.S., Curator of Birds. Remarks on an interesting case of response of Sparrows to colour ear OO CCF e eee seeeeeoeeeeeoeFeeeeesEes ees Peeeeeens Exhibition of, and remarks upon, lantern-slides show- ing the display of a male Monaul Pheasant (Lophophorus UINPCYANUS) ait vod von ico wee com ager Oona aac sles coer ieee eee Sonntac, Cuarues F., M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S., Anatomist to the Society. | Description of the Larynx and Césophagus of a Common Macaque (Jlacacus fascicularis). .(Text-figures 1-5.) eoceeece ee Fee eeeeeeeeeeoeeee eee es CHL ECT ere PP FoEE EEO OH EOE EHH ORO OE The Comparative. Anatomy of the Tongues of the Mammalia.— I. General. Description of the Tongue. (Text-figures 6-17.) eee eer tee eee eoereoeres eee eeserseoes ese PDs eee -eeeees On Abnormal’ Features in the Peritoneum of a Raccoon. (Text-figures 18 & 19.) eoecer eer ee eee eee eto ee esses e On Abnormalities of the Abdominal Arteries of a young Panda. (Text-figure 20.) cee ee res osce oe ee ee oo ee ose eee eee TuRNER, Rowianp E., and WATERSTON, JAMES. A Revision of the Ichneumonid Genera Labiwm and Pecilocryptus. (Text-figures 1-11.) WATERSTON, JAMES. See TURNER, ROWLAND E. Wiuey, Artuur, F.R.S., F.Z.8. An Apodous Amia calva ee Page 190 194 27 169 175 INDEX OF ILLUSTRATIONS. a eee Algidia cuspidata, Pl. IIT., p. 31. Alouatta, pp. 93, 95, 105, 108. villosa, pp. 102, 105. Aotus, pp. 99, 99. Ateles, pp. 92, 99, 111. ater, p. 102. paniscus, p. 103. Cacajao rubicundus, pp. 92, 99, 105. Callicebus moloch, pp. 92, 98. ----- personatus, p. 110. Callimico goeldit, pp. 92, 95, 98, 110. Cebus, pp. 93, 95, 101, 105, 108, III. Chalcides delislii, p. 79. guentheri, p.79. lineatus, p. 79. —— mauritanicus, p. 79. — ocellatus, pp. 79, 81. , var. botteg?, p. 83. , var. polylepis, p. 83. —— sepoides, p. 79. —— thierryi, p. 79. tridactylus, p. 79. Clarias magur, P\. L., p. 61. Eutropiichthys vacha, Pl. L, p. 61, p 64. Gulo, pp. 180, 183, 186. Hapale gacchus, pp. 105, 106, 111. Labium bivitiatum, p. 9, Labium ferrugineum, pp. 14, 19. -—— hohartense, p. 13. montivagum, pp. 2, 9, 17, 18, 25. —— occidentate, p. 13. petitorius, pp. 8, 14. —— pilosum, p. 10. —— sculpturatum, p. 14. —— subequale, p. 18. —— vasseanum, p. 13. walkert, p. 9. Lagothrix, pp. 93, 95, 108. infumatus, p. 101. Leontocebus rosalia, pp. 92, 105, 106, be Macacus fascicularis, pp. 27, 29. Macropsalis chiltoni, Pl. I., p. 31. Mammalia, Tongues of, pp. 116-125, 127,128, Mellivora, pp. 180, 182, 185, 186. Monoxyommea henlei, P\. IIL, p. 31. tracy, Pl. Lt. p. Sl. | —— tuberculata, Pl. III., p. 81. Nuncia smithi, Pl. IL, p. 31. Oligonychus quercinus, pp. 51, 59. ——-~ simplex, pp. 51, 59. —— ult, pp. 51, 59. ununguis, pp. 51, 59. Panda, p. 176. Pantopsalis grayt, dela se X11 INDEX OF ILLUSTRATIONS. Pantopsalis halli, P1.1., p. 81. pocacki, P1.1., p. 31. . wattet, Pl. 1., p. al. Pecilocryptus nigromaculatus, pp. 17, 25. Pseudeutropius garua, pp. 63, 65. Raccoon, pp. 170, 172. Rita buchanani, Pi. J., p. 61. Saimiris sciurea, pp. 93, 95, 98, 105, 106, 111. . Scolecoseps boulengert, p. 159. Tetranychus carpini, pp. 51, 52. crategi, pp. 51, 53, 54. _—— lintearius, pp. 52, 53, 54. populi, pp. 51, 58, 54. —— schizopus, pp. 51, 52, 53. talisee, pp. O1, 53, 54. telarius, pp. 51, 52, 53, 54. —— tiliarium, pp. 51, 52, 53, 54. Trienobunus acuminatus, Pl. I1., p. 31. Trienonyx cockayni, Pl, II., p. 31. variegata, Pl. II., p. 3). Wallago atiu, Pl. I1., p. 61. PROCEEDINGS OF THK GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. PAPERS. 1. A. Revision of the Ichneumonid Genera Labiwm and Peeilocryptus. By RowLanp I. Turner and JAMES WATERSTON. | Received November 14, 1919: Read February 10, 1920. ] (Text-figures 1-11.) Genus Lasrum Brullé Labium Brulle, Hist. Nat. Insect. Hymén. iv. p. 316 (1846). The genus Labtwm, though the typical species was described from New Guinea, is really characteristic of the southern half of Australia. No specimens are in the British Museum from the northern half of Australia, and we may certainly assume that the genus does not occur in the north-eastern coast regions, unless at Rien elevations where little collecting has been tone. In the Br inome south of Australia and in ‘Tasmania various species of the genus are exceedingly common, swarming on the blossom of Leptospermum, It is most remarkable that so little work should have been done on a genus so conspicuous and so plentiful as this, and that nothing should be known of its life-history. Before Brulie detined ae genus Krichson had already described a Tasmanian species as ee nion petitorius, but the genus was not again recognised till Cameron described ib Jerruginewm in 1901 Morley later (1915) adding another species, LZ. clavicorne. The genus 1s extremely isolated among the Ichneumonide, the most striking characters being the long exserted labrum, the more or less clavate antenne, the large ungues and empodium of the hind Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1920, No. I. 1 2 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE tarsi, and the strongly bent recurrent nervure. In one or two aberrant species one or more of these characters may be only feebly developed. but the long labrum is always present. The best account of the genus is given by Cameron, but his description of the generic characters is founded on a single species, and one or two characters given are merely specific. Thus the petiolar area and areola are usually separated, not confluent, and the nervulus is often more or less postfurcal, as noticed by Morley. Cameron is inclined to place the genus in the /ehnewmonine, as a separate tribe; the great objection to this placing is in the position of the spiracles on the petiole only a little behind the middle, and much nearer to each other than to the apex of the segment. - It seems, however, on the whole, a more natural position than either among the Zryphonine, with which it was placed by Bruilé, or near Banchus, where Morley is inclined to Text-figure 1. Labium moutivagum Turn. & Wtrst. Thorax, propodeon, and petiole in protile. place it. We give a full account of the sculpture of the median segment (text-figs. 1, 3, and 10), as far as it is common to all the species: carina between the short basal area and areola usually indicated by short lateral stumps; areola and petiolar area some- times confluent; pleural and juxta-coxal avez confluent anteriorly, but separated up to 4 or beyond posteriorly. The surface of the basal area and areola 1s smooth, more or less rugulose round the sides; of the external area smooth or finely punctured: the an- terior part of the spivacular area is also punctured, generally rather strongly so. ‘The other are vary in sculpture. the juxta-coxal always showing some strong ridges, mdicated at least anteriorly. Sculpture of the male usually coarser than in the female. The sculpture of the arez is liable to considerable individual variation in intensity. Species of Thynnide of the genera Hirone and Tachynomyia ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PdCSCILOCRYPTUS. 3 bear a strong superficial resemblance to species of this genus. 1’. abdominalis Guér. and Hirone celsissima Turn., both of which look like Zabiwm, occur on Mt. Wellington at a considerable ele- vation, where Labiwm montivagum is very plentiful. /. celsisstma even has the apical antennal joints yellow, a most abnormal coloration for one of the Thynnide. Key to the Species of Labium. 1. Antennee not more than 30-jointed Antenne more than 30-jointed 2. Second recurrent nervure only feebly bent in the middle; nervellus straight, discoidella want- ing; head, thorax, and median segment black with yellow markings Pees . Lewatkhert, spins, o, p, 4. Second recurrent nervure sharply. angulate in the middle, nervellus angulate, discoidella not wholly wanting ; head, thorax, and median segment fulvo- Sonus with yellow mark- INES 52... 3. 3. Discoidella reduced toa short stump, originating halfway between the submediella and the middle of the nervellus; median segment yellow apically ........ . i. centrate,sp.i:, pe 6: Discoidella complete, originating much nearer to the middle of the nervellus than to the sub- mediella ; median ae aac ee tulvo-fer- et ruginous ...... ~ Lebrevicorne, sp. .s p. GC: 4. Face and clypeus fused, in the same “plane, the dividing-line obsolete ; more or less pilose...... 5. Face and clypeus not entirely fused or in the saine plane; scarcely pilose ........... 6. 5. Strongly pilose; hind femora and median seg- ment black .. ; . LL. pilosum, sp. n., p. 10. Feebly pilose ; 5 hind femora and median 1 segment fulvo-ferruginous ..... . LL subpilosulum, sp. n., p. 11. 6. Hind empodia sinall, not more than one-third of the length of the tarsal ungues; mesonotum witha broad black fascia on each side ......... LD. bivittatum, sp.n., p. 8. Hind empodia elongate, at least two-thirds of the length of the tarsal ungues ; mesonotuin with- out black lateral fascia ..... ie 7. Mesonotum opaque, closely and coar arsely. pune- tured ; dentiparal area pes into a broad wel]- developed Loothic we. te: 8. Mesonotum shining, smooth or - finely punctured ; dentiparal area unarmed, or at most with an inconspicuous tooth ....... He PRO Re 9. &. Scutellum and postscutellum yellow Be ioiestae, lus penttomauny NCHS: Pai. Scutellum and postscutellam ferruginous ......... L. petitorium, subsp. con- 9. Flagelluin of the antenne wholly black above, color, subsp. n., p. 8 without pale apical joints........ 10; Flagellum, if black above, then always with several of the apical joints nee ay fer- ruginous or ochraceous .. eat, lr. 10. Mandibles very long and ‘straight, “vertical ; dentiparal area with a small, but distinct tooth at the external apical angle ree 7 . LL vasseanum, sp.u., bo, p.13 Mandibles normal, not elongate ; dentiparal a area unarmed ....... . LU. ferrugineum Cam., p. 19. 11. External area of. ‘the median ‘segment more coarsely sculptured than the dentiparal area ; external subopaque, finely and closely punc- tured, dentiparal smooth and shining ......... 12; [* 4 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE Dentiparal area more coarsely sculptured than the external or both smooth and shining ....... 13. 12. Antenne from 50- to 55-jointed ; hind tarsi fer- ruginous, median segment with a transverse yellow fascia ..... itttteteterteses ula mulhiarticulatim, puma Antenne 45- to 46. jointed ; hind tarsi black ‘lp. 23. trom before the apex of the metatarsus, median segment without a yellow fascia . L. fulvicorne, sp.n., p. 22. 18. Hind femora black, very narrowly yellow at the APEX: pe. LL. sculpturatum, sp.n., 3, Hind femora ferr ‘uginous, at most narrowly black [p. 14. at the base and apex ....... ba ERE 14, 14. Antenne more than 40- jointed — Ack ate aN oe 15: Antennz less than 40-jointed ......................5. 18. 16. Mandibles bidentate; basal tergites narrowly margined with yellow .........0...::.ct00-0000.... La hobartensey sp. ns, pa 20: Mandibles simple ....... 16. 16. Dentiparal area unarmed, ‘areola, ‘external area, and dentiparal arez smooth .., ae L. longicorne, sp.n., 6, p. 23. Dentiparal area armed, the carine , str ongly raised forming small teeth at the outer angles, 0c... LG 17. Antenne 47- jointed; face yellow, closely ‘and evenly punctured ................ L. approximatum, sp.un., 3, Antenne 43-jointed ; face ferruginous, ‘margined [p. 21. with yellow laterally, centrally rugulose ...... L. spiniferum, sp. n., p. 12. 18. Third and ‘ourth antennal joints subequal aes, 19. Third antennal joint much longer than the fOULGH nic Saget ate he Sa RSE ERE IE 20. 19. Mandibles strongly ‘bidentate ; hind femora shining, with large and rather sparse punctures. Mandibles very obscurely bidentate ; hind femora subopaque, very closely covered with minute punctures........ LL. subequale, sp.n., p. 15. 20. Distance between the recurrent and second trans- verse cubital nervures not equal to more than one-third of the length of the latter nervure; nervulus very distinctly postfureal . ‘ IL. clavicorne Morl., p. 19. Distance between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure equal to at least half the Jength of the latter nervure ; nervulus interstitial or very susan post- QQ occidentale, sp. n., p. 16. TUNG Ay SAE. achhagres ee 21. 21. Petiole black, except at the apex ; ‘mesopleuree extensively black superiorly ....... LL. montivagum, sp. n., p. 16. Petiole mainly ferruginous ; mesopleurae. ‘with very little black. 00... clus ones, Woassociatum, sp-aiempr eos Labium bicolor Brullé is not included in the Key, as we have not seen a specimen. It is described from a male, and has the hind femora black as in ibe sculpturatum, to which, from the description, it appears to be related. LABIUM WALKERI, sp.n. (Text-fig. 2.) 3. Niger; mandibulis, apice brunneis, labro, clypeo, facie, fronteque lateribus, genis, orbitis externis, scutello, basi anguste nigro, postscutello, tegulis, mesopleuris maculis duabus; epimeris, pedibus anticis intermediisque, tarsis intermediis br unnescentibus, coxis posticis apice, trochanteribus posticis, genubus, tibiisque posticis dimidio basal, basi angustissime brunneo annulatis, flavis; antennis subtus rufescentibus ; femoribus posticis medio late rufescentibus, basi atque apicem versus nigrescentibus ; calearibus pallidis ; alis subhyalinis, venis fuscis; petiolo apice ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PCECILOCRYPTUS. 5 in medio late testaceo, tergitis 2-5 brunneo-ferrugineis, apice anguste flavo-limbatis; tergitis apicalibus fuscis; sternitis quarto sequentibusque flavo-testaceis. Long. 6 mm. 3. Mandibles simple; clypeus distinctly separated from the face, convex; face smooth, subquadrate; vertex and temples smooth and shining. Antenne 28-jointed, third and fourth joints subequal, joints five to eight diminishing gradually, in the funicle the first fifteen joints are cy lindrical. ‘Thorax shining, epimeral furrows crenulate throughout. Median segment with the apical carina of the basal area complete, areola and external aree smooth; petiolar and adjacent ares, the apical two-thirds of the spiracular aree, and the dentiparal aree subrugulose ; pleural aree smooth, anteriorly crenulate, with five or six strong Text-figure 2. Labium walkeri Turn. & Wtrst. Wings. ruge in front of the coxa. Petiole without a subbasa] tooth, but the spiracular area prominent; spiracles well behind the middle ; abdomen shining, smooth. Areolet (text-fig. 2) pentagonal, second abscissa of the radius shorter than either of the transverse cubital nervures, distance between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure equal to nearly half the length of the latter nervure ; second recurrent nervure only feebly bent in the middle, not abruptly angled as in other species of the genus. Discoidella missing; nervellus straight, not angled. Hab. Hobart, Tasmania; summer, 1891 (J. J. Walker). Very distinct in the neuration from the larger species of the genus. Pr obably this will eventually prove to be generically distinct, but in the present state of our knowledge it is hardly necessary to divide the genus. 6 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE LABIUM CENTRALE, sp. Nn. , 2. Fulvo-ferruginea ; mandibulis, apice nigris, labro, clypeo, facie, fronte, scapo, pedicello, propleuris antice, mesonoto lateri- bus anguste, scutello, sulco basali lateribusque nigris, postscu- tello, mesopleuris supra fasciaque infra, segmento mediano fascia lata postica, coxis anticis intermediisque, tibiisque posticis dimidio basali flavis; tarsis posticis articulo apicali, tibiisque posticis dimidio apicali intus fusco-ferrugineis; alis hyalinis, venis brunneis; stigmate brunneo, macula basali flava. Long. 6 mm. @. Mandibles simple; line between the clypeus and face distinct, less so in the middle than at the sides, the face and clypeus sparsely, but not very finely punctured, face broader than long; eyes rather strongly emarginate above the base of the antenne ; vertex and front smooth. Antenne 27-jointed, third joint only a little longer than the fourth, twelfth funicular joint quadrate, thirteenth transverse. Notauli short; middle lobe of mesonotum not prominent, rather coarsely punctured, the lateral lobes very sparsely punctured; the sharp anterior edge of tbe mesopleure is rather short, extending about halfway towards the spiracle and just extending a little beyond the first longitudinal hollow ; epimeral sulcus crenulate throughout. Prepectus antero- ventrally crenulate. Median segment with the apical carina of the basal area only indistinctly indicated laterally ; areola very broad, not clearly separated from the petiolar area, smooth, punctured near the sides; external area subrugulose, dentiparal and spiracular are a little more rugulose, the spiracular area tend- ing to be punctured anteriorly ; pleural area distinctly separated from the juxta-coxal on the posterior two-thirds, the carina obsolete anteriorly. Petiole with the lateral teeth between the spiracles and the base well developed. Hind coxe and femora smooth, with a few scattered punctures. Nervulus postfureal ; areolet pentagonal, distance between the recurrent nervure and second transverse cubital nervure equal to half the length of that nervure, second abscissa of the radius shorter than the second transverse cubital nervure; nervellus angled far below the middle (at about three-fourths), discoidella represented only by a short stump at that point, entirely obsolete beyond the stump, without a vena spuria. ' Hab. Killalpanima, 100 miles E. of Lake Eyre (H. J. Hillier). LABIUM BREVICORNE, Sp. n. 2. Fulvo-ferruginea ; mandibulis, apice excepto, labro, clypeo, facie, scapo, pedicello subtus. fronte lateribus, scutello, post- scutello, mesopleuris maculis sub alis, tegulis, linea verticali supra coxas anticas, pedibusque anticis intermediisque, illius tarsorum articulo apicali excepto, flavis; antennis supra infuscatis usque ad articulum vicesimum, subtus omnino articulisque septem apicalibus ferrugineis; scutello fovea basali et lJateribus, pro- ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PC@CILOCRYPTUS. rf pleuris antice, segmento mediano area juxta-coxali, tibiis posticis dimidio apicali, tarsisque posticis articulo apicali nigris. Long. 7 mm. 2. Mandibles simple; face and clypeus shining, very finely and sparsely punctured, the line between the clypeus and face distinct. Antenne 28- to 29-jointed, the third joint less than half as long again as the fourth, which is slightly longer than the fifth, the basal twelve joints of the funicle cylindrical. Vertex and front smooth and shining. Notauli shallow and_ short, middle lobe of the mesonotum not prominent anteriorly, smooth ; mesopleure shining, epimeral sulcus crenulated throughout. Median segment with the basal area very short, scarcely extending beyond the posterior edge of the sulcus separating the postscutellum and median segment, the apical carina only indicated laterally; areola broad and smooth, sparsely punctured towards the sides, not distinctly separated from the petiolar area, which with the adjacent ares is longitudinally rugulose ; external area smooth ; dentiparal area shining, but with a more uneven surface; spiracular area anteriorly moderately and posteriorly coarsely punctured; pleural area smooth, with a few scattered punctures, juxta-coxal area rugose. Petiole with a well-developed tooth between the spiracles and the base ; spiracles prominent, the petiole rather abruptly widened behind the spiracles; abdomen shining. Hind coxe smooth, with at most a few scattered punctures beneath. Second abscissa of the yadius shorter than the second transverse cubital nervure, distance between the recurrent nervure and the second trans- verse cubital nervure equal to about three-eighths of the length of the latter nervure ; nervulus slightly postfureal. Hab. Swan River (Du LBoulay); Yallingup, 8.W. Australia, November, 1913 (Turner). Lasium Petirorium Erichs. (Text-figs. 3 and 7 c.) Ichneumon petitorius Krichs. Arch. f. Naturges. p. 255 (1842). Hab. Kaglehawk Neck, S.E. Tasmania; February (Turner). Common. This is distinguished from other species of the genus by the opaque, strongly and very closely punctured mesonotum and meso- pleure and the strongly ‘developed teeth (text-fig. 3) of the denti- paral ares. The division between the clypeus and face is well marked, both clypeus and face closely punctured ; antenne of the female 42-jointed ; median segment with the apical carina of the basal area interrupted in the middle, external area smooth, denti- paral area coarsely and irregularly longitudinally striate, spiracular area rugose, Juxta-coxal and pleural areze rugose-striate, postero- intermedial and postero-external aree transversely striate, areola shining with a few large punctures, petiolar area indistinctly and irregularly transversely striated. Second abscissa of the radius and first transverse cubital nervure subequal, second transverse 8 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE cubital nervure slightly longer, the distance (text-fig. 7, c) between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure equal to more than half of the length of the latter nervure. Antenne 42-jointed. Subspecies concolor, subsp. n. 2. Differs from the typical Tasmanian form in having the scutellum and postscutellum ferruginous, only very slightly paler than the rest of the thorax, not yellow as in the typical form. The second abscissa of the radius is somewhat shorter than in the typical form and the two transverse cubital nervures sub- equal. Antenne with three or four joints less than in the typical form. Hab. Yallingup, 8.W. Australia; October-December (Turner). Text-figure 3. Ts DY aaa ia ANNA yy, ae Uf Hh ORES Ai ta) Labium petitorium Krichs. Propodeon. (a) dorsal; (6) profile; (ca) coxa of hind leg; (pé) petiole. To show outlines of the areew. Sculpture of ares not detailed fully. LABIUM BIVITTATUM, sp. n. (Text-fig. 4, 0.) @. Ochracea; labro, clypeo, facie lateribus, macula lineari sub alis, seutello postseutelloque flavis; vertice late, propleuris dimidio inferiore, mesonoto fascia lata longitudinali utrinque, tergito primo apice, coxis posticis macula magna dorsali apicali, femoribus posticis basi et apice, tibiisque posticis dimidio apieali nigris ; alis hyalinis, venis fuscis; antennis fuscis, infra ferru- gineis, articulis 9 apicalibus fulvo-ochraceis. 3. Femine similis; antennis articulis 7 apicalibus fulvo- ochraceis ; tibiis posticis parte basali minus late ochraceis quam in femina. Long., 2 10-11 mm., ¢ 8-10 mm. Q. Labrum and clypeus rather deeply but not very closely punctured, the face much more closely and finely punctured, face broader than long. Antenne 42-jointed, the third joint as ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PCECILOCRYPTUS. Q long as the fourth and fifth combined, the fourth very little longer than the fifth. Front and occiput microscopically punc- tured, the space between the eyes and the ocelli almost smooth. Thorax shining, mesonotum sparsely and finely punctured on the black fasciz, more closely anteriorly on the very prominent median lobe ; notauli distinct, extending backwards beyond the black lateral fascie ; scutellum smooth and shining, with a few small scattered punctures, postscutellum a little more closely punctured. Median segment with the basal area smooth, short, and separated from the areola only by lateral indications of a carina; areola hexagonal, smooth, with a few scattered punctures, narrowed posteriorly, the carina separating it from the dentiparal area broadly obsolete behind the middle ; dentiparal area smooth and shining; external area shining, microscopically punctured ; spiracular area smooth, divided into three ares by two» sharply marked carinz, both of which nearly touch the spiracle. Hind Text-figure 4. Hind tarsal ungues and empodia of Labiwm (a) montivagum Turn. & Wtrst. ; (b) bivittatum Turn. & Wirst. coxe elongate, as long as the first tergite, nearly smooth dorsally, but laterally and ventrally distinctly and rather closely punctured ; hind femora closely and finely punctured. First transverse cubital nervure strongly oblique, second abscissa of the radius very little shorter than the second transverse cubital nervure, second recurrent nervure separated from the second transverse cubital nervure by a distance equal to about half the length of that ner- vure. Ungues (text-fig. 4, 6) of the hind tarsi much less robust than is usual in the genus; hind empodium vexy small, not elon- gate, only about one-third of the length of the unguis. Hab. Yallingup, S.W. Australia; September 14—October 31, 1913 (Turner). Vy TJ 9y <5 38 AS a B 5 S Text-fig. 3—The cesophageal opening. Text-fig. 4.—Sagittal section of abnormal specimen. ‘Text-fig. 5.—Sagittal section of normal specimen. In these D is the anterior cartilaginous plate, and A, B, C are the same as in text-figs. 1 and 2. In the abnormal specimen a ridge runs horizontally round the cesophagus, beginning at the angles of the epiglottis, and it bounds a deep recess on each side of the larynx. The mucous membrane is reflected on to the posterior cartilaginous plate (text-fig. 4), thereby forming a small pocket. From the ridge horizontal folds turn out and run round the cwsophagus. The special points which arise from a consideration of the above abnormality are :— 1. The origin of the cartilaginous ring. 2. The manner in which it affects the normal mechanism of deglutition. The great rarity of this condition, and the absence of specimens showing gradations between the normal and the cartilaginous ring described above, make all opinions as to its nature purely hypothetical. My own opinion is that the development of the cricoid cartilage has gone wrong, and the halves, or one of them, which fuse to close in the posterior part of the larynge: al cavity, have or has sent processes backwards; these have joined behind to form the catilaginous plate (text- fie. 2 2, B), or one has grown round and rejoined the cartilage again. The anterior plate (text-fig. 2, D) is immovably fixed to the back of the cricoid 30 ON THE LARYNX AND G&SOPHAGUS OF A COMMON MACAQUE. cartilage, and the entire ring is internal to the mucous lining of the esophagus. The structure round the cesophagus seems to have broken into it from the cricoid cartilage. If the tongue and larynx are moved by the observer as they do naturally when the animal swallows, the posterior part of the larynx comes up against the posterior plate (text-fig. 2, B) and obstructs the cesophagus. Of course, that probably does not occur in life. Again, the semilunar mouth of the esophagus is firmly closed by the cartilaginous plates, and one gets the appearance of a sphincter. The specimen had been preserved too long to permit of a dissection of muscles which might move the posterior plate, so I must leave the problem of how this animal swallowed unsolved. Both the specimens described in this communication are now preserved in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, London. P. Z. S. 1920; ,H@CGGrwa wut) pvery | Aa) Se wvey LY We ; “nee = . % 7s a Ts tes é VV io Pl. Wt. HOGG, 1920, Ps 22-25: \ \ al $29050099 ners 3007 IPE 6 c008 ty ° Soo 6 }> Bale & Danielsson, Ltd. AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. ON SOME AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES, SH 3. Some Australian Opiliones. By H. R. Hoss, M.A., F.ZS. [ Received December 27, 1919: Read February 10, 1920. | (Plates I.-ITI.*) I am indebted to Dr. Charles Chilton of Canterbury College, Christchurch, New Zealand, for a large collection of Spiders and their allied orders, gathered over a series of years from most parts of New Zealand. Amongst them are a number of Opiliones, and these with a few others I am now recording. Of the three suborders Palpatores, Laniatores, and Cypho- phthalmi, the two former only are represented—Palpatores by the genera Macropsalis Sor. and Pantopsalis Sim. of the family Phalangiide Thorell, and Laniatores by the families Trizno- nychidee Sor. and Trizenobunide Pocock. Only three species of the genus Macropsalis have been recorded— the type I. serritarsis Sor.t from Sydney, N.S. Wales; one collected by myself at Macedon, Victoria, described under my name by Mr. R. I. Pocock; and J/. chiltoni$ from Stewart Island, N.Z., described by myself. | The New Zealand specimens of this genus sent to me at various times have all come from Stewart Island, the southern- most remnant of the now broken land, and none from the Main Islands, whereas Pantopsalis is widely distributed over both the North and South Islands. dJ/acropsalis was generally supposed to be an Australian form, and as Stewart Island lies in the belt of westerly winds which blow all the year round, and the genus has not been recorded from any other part of New Zealand, it may have been originally introduced from Australia after the sepa- ration of the islands. In the Stewart Island examples of this species (JZ. chiltoni) the well-known apophysis at the distal end of the palpal patella varies in size individually, but the banding of the palp in yellow and white is always the same, and I look on the specimens as constituting but one species. Of Pantopsalis probably ten species may be taken as established. The curious difference in the length and shape of the man- dibles among the specimens of this genus is remarkable, and it has been a matter of uncertainty whether this difference is sexual, dimorphic in one sex, or specific. In the whole family the sexes are not easy to distinguish accurately without spoiling the specimens, and many of the species have been described from single examples. Judging from the specimens in this collection, added to the evidence hitherto available, it would appear that ** For explanation of the Plates see p. 48. + “Opiliones,” W. Sérensen, in Koch & Keyserling, Arachn. Austr., Suppl. p. 55. + “Some new Harvest Spiders,” R. I, Pocock, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1902, vol. ii. p. 398. § “Some New Zealand and Tasmanian Arachnide,” H. R. Hogg, Trans. N.Z. Inst. vol. xlii, (1910), p. 277. ou MR, H. R. HOGG ON SOME the males have the long mandibles and the females the short, but discrepancies have to be cleared up before this can be accepted for a certainty. It may be regarded as quite certain that the difference is not specific, both forms being found in members of the same species. White’s short description* of the type species P. listeri, and Simon’s note on the original types in the Paris Museum 7, show that the specimens originally described had the long mandibles, but the sex was not determined. Mr. Pocock, judging from specimens, said to be females, in the British Museum, records P. listert among those species with the shorter mandibles, thereby distinguishing it from his P. albipalpis, which had them long. Therefore, if his determination is correct, there are both long and short mandibles in that species. P. trippi Poe. with long mandibles, is a male. P. tasmanica Hogg napa, 2. - a dried specimen, sex undeterminable. P. nigripalpis Poc, 55M Ses o is a male, P. watfsi, sp. uu. Q (from the shape of the genital oper- P. pococki, sp.n. § a 2 2 cula I take to be males. P. coronata Poe. with short mandibles, sex not recorded. P. halli, sp. n. es Ms operculum broader and straighter in specimens with short mandibles. Mandibles long in specimens cer- tainly males. P. grayi, sp. n. ey Ss a operculum broader, female. On the other hand, Mr. Pocock first described his P. jenningsi as having short mandibles and as a female, but later found it to be a male. Here, however, the basal segment of the mandible is twice as long as the palp, and the second segment six times as long as wide, which is hardly a short mandible when compared with that of the females recorded above. : Mr. Pocock gives a synopsis of the species described (Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. May 1903, p. 438), and this I supplement below :— Peet Suborder PALPATORES. Family PHALANGIIDA, Genus PANTOPSALIS Simon, a. Patella, tibia, and distal joint of palpi white or yellowish white. © a, Mandibles red-brown; carapace black ; eye-tubercle oh SmMOGth) 0k ndieeh beth Saas deebl Pua cede sRcebeechoeyacdeGe eeSneUge aera Mn a. A group of small spicules on front border ............ Palbipalpis Poe. GB. About half a dozen strongish spicules in front ...... trippi Poe. b!. Mandibles pale yellow-brown ; carapace cream-colour, with dark patch in front of eye-tubercle spiculed in front; eye-tubercles smooth....,........00c.sc:0000. Wattsi, sp. n. * Adam White, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. vol. xvii. (1849), p. 6. { E. Simon, C.R. Soc, Ent. de Belg. May 2, 1879, p. 16. AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. 33 b. Patella, tibia, and distal joint of palpi dark brown, yellow- brown or deep yellow. a*. Kye-tubercle denticulated ; carapace dark brown. a3, Palpi black brown . nigripalpis Poe. and subsp. spiculosa Poe. 63, Palpi pale yellow-brown pocockt, sp. a. 6°, Eye-tubercle smooth. a+, Spiniform tubercles on frontal area ; palpi uni- formily, Dlack::.; i.coss00ss «0 AS een etre eee b+, Carapace wholly smooth. a, A short spine on trochanter i.; palpi yellow, banded with brown; carapace tortoise-shell ... grayi, sp. n. . Trochanter 1. smooth. oe Palpi yellow, blotched with grey ; carapace dark yellow-brown .......... ae 66, Palpi reddish brown; red adie grey y stripes on rear segments of abdomen .......... : c®, Palpi orange; carapace yellow-grey, Cah brown patches ; legs bright yellow-brown ... halli, sp. n. jenningsi Poc. tausmanica Hogg. coronata Poc. PANTOPSALIS LISTERI White. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1849, p. 6. ‘T'y pe species. PANTOPSALIS NIGRIPALPIS Poc. Pocock, ‘Some new Harvest Spiders,’ Proc. Zool. Soe. Lond. 1902, vol. 11. p. 399; 2d., “Some new Tropical and Southern Opiliones,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, voi. xi. 1903, p. 438. A specimen with the eye-tubercle and surrounding portion of the carapace more strongly denticulated, Mr. Pocock has named as a subspecies of the above, P. spiculosa. PANTOPSALIS CORONATA Poc. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. supra, p. 436. PANTOPSALIS TRIPPI Poc. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. supra, p. 437. PANTOPSALIS JENNINGST Poe. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. supra, p. 437. PANTOPSALIS TASMANICA Hogg. Hogg, “Some New Zealand and Tasmanian Arachnide,” Trans. N.Z. Inst. vol. xlu. 1910, p. 279. PANTOPSALIS WATTSI, sp. n. (PI. I. fig. 3c.) The cephalic area is dark yellow-brown in front over a median space as far as and including the eye-tubercle. This is bounded by a wide horseshoe belt of bright cream-colour, beyond which Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920, No. Ill. 3 34 MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME again as far as the side margin it is yellow-brown, but intruding at intervals into the lighter colour. The eye-tubercle is smooth, brown and yellow, with the eyes yellow. The abdomen is unfortunately partially broken but apparently brown. The mandibles are long, pale yellow-brown, strongly bespiculed in rather regular bands. The palpi, remarkably long, are brown on the basal half of the femur, yellow on the distal half, and pale yellow on the remaining joints. The legs are banded alternately with brown and yellow, and are also very long. On the under side the coxe, operculum, and mouth-parts are yellow-brown, dark in the two former and lighter in the latter. The space between the eye-tubercle and the front of the carapace is bespiculed. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 3, lat. 23 in front, 4 behind; mand. 20; palpus 84 ; Ist leg 374, 2nd 65, 3rd 373, 4th 453. This specimen, apparently a male, was collected at Hawera, in the North Island, N.Z., by Mr. G. 8. Watts, and I have named it after him. PANTOPSALIS POCOCKI, sp. n. (Pi. I. figs. 3 ab.) The cephalic part of the carapace is dark brown, the abdo- minal portion the same in the middle with pale yellow-grey at the sides, into which the darker colour runs in places. The posterior segments are grey, with transverse marginal streaks of black-brown. The mandibles are dark or brown, long, profusely covered with rather large spicules, and are moderately thin until the thickening at the distal end. The femoral joint of the legs black-brown, the remaining joints red-brown. The palpi are uniformly yellow-brown till quite at their distal end, which is yellowish grey. The carapace, including the eye-tubercle, is almost wholly covered with small spicules. The eyes are large and black. The under side, including the coxal and sternal area, is black- brown. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 27, lat. 37; abd. lg. 27, lat. 32; mand. 233; palpus 42 ; Ist leg 30, ond 56, 3rd 26, 4th 37. This specimen, collected on Mt. Dick, N.Z., by Mr, io aeialt- I have named after Mr. R. I. Pocock, to whom the students of the Opiliones are much indebted for his valuable papers. PANTOPSALIS HALLI, sp. n. (PI. I. figs. 4 a—d.) The sides of the cephalic part are mottled yellow and dark brown, a broad median area being paler yellow and light brown The eye-tubercle is pale yellow- brown, rather darker in the median longitudinal streak ; eyes quite black. AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. By The dorsal abdominal part has a still paler median area, light yellowish grey, narrower in front and broadening posteriorly to a scolloped pattern near the rear end. This is bordered by a dark brown streak on each side, separating the median area from the bright yellow-brown sides. The mandibles and palpi are bright yellow, and the legs pale yellow-brown, except the distal end of femora 3 and 4, which is darker. The carapace and abdomen are both quite smooth and destitute of granulation, as are also the mandibles, which are of the quite short type, less than the length of the body. The coxe and under side of the abdomen are pale yellow- brown, quite smooth, and the segmental divisions almost obliter- ated, being just indicated by darker transverse streaks. The patellar joint of the palpi is slightly longer than the tibial, both joints broadening anteriorly and being profusely covered with short bristles. The genital operculum is thick and broad. ‘The measurements (in millimetr aS) are as follows :— Ceph. Ig. 2, lat. 14 in front, 24 behind; abd. Ig. 23, lat. 3; mand. 3? ; palpus 6; Ist leg 18, and 423, 3rd 194, 4th 29. Four specimens, eet ali oiled and without label, but from New Zealand. Three are males with long mandibles and the male- shaped operculum, and one is a fanaa with seemingly broader and straighter operculum and short mandibles. Also one female, collected on Mt. Algidus, Rakaia Gorge, South Island, by Mr. T. Hall, to whom the species is dedicated. It is to his efforts that this large and valuable collection is mainly due, PANTOPSALIS GRAYI, sp. n. (PI. I. figs. 5 a-c.) The cephalic part of the carapace is bright yellow-brown. The abdominal part is rather darker brown in the median area, pale and dark mingled at the sides. The under side is pale yellow from the front to as far as the base of the genital operculum, brown on the abdominal segments. ‘The coxe are pale yellow, with a dark brown band on each at the end nearest to the trochanter. The legs are yellow, banded with brown. The mandibles pale yellow, blotched with brown. The palpi yellow, banded with brown on the femur and patella, more faintly on the tibial and distal joints. The mandibles are of the short type, not so long as the body, and, though covered with short bristles, are otherwise smooth. The carapace is wholly smooth, but there is a short spine on trochanter 1. The eye-tubercle is nearly in the centre of the cephalic region. The genital operculum is broad in front. The measurements (in millimetres, but legs mostly broken) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 24; abd. lg. 34; mand. 32; palpus 5; Ist leg 31. A single specimen, apparently a female, collected at Hukanui, Waikaremoana, North Island of N.Z., by Mr. W. R. Gray, after 3% 36 MR. Wi. R. HOGG ON SOME whom I have named the species, was found in close proximity to a male specimen, which agrees closely with M.Simon’s description of the Paris Museum types of P. listeri White; but the two are very different in coloration. Suborder LANIATORES. Family TRI ZNOBUNIDZ Poe. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1902, vol. ii. p. 400. Genus TRLENOBUNUS Sor. W. Sorensen in Koch & Keys. Die Arachn. Austr., Suppl. p. 59 (1886). Dr. Sorensen described the type species of this genus 7’. bicari- natus from Sydney, and Mr. R. I. Pocock 7’. pectinatus from Tasmania. To these,I have now to add a New Zealand form from the collection of Mr. T. Hall. In this the curious structure of the eye-tubercle is still more elaborated than in the other two, since it has four pairs of lateral branches. There is, further, an apical spine, and the horns on each side of the base are more powerful. The whole creature is profusely bespimed and granulated. | Dr. Sdrensen (loc. cit.) merely regarded Triewnobunus as a second genus in the family Trienonychide, but Mr. Pocock very rightiy writes it down as a separate family. The quite different type of sternum, together with the smaller and weaker palpi, apart from the very remarkable development of the eye-tubercle, show that it has proceeded along considerably different lines from the above-named family. The form of the eye-tubercle is a specialisation of that seen in Hridanus Thor. and Plistobunus Poc. of M. Simon’s family Phalangodide. Synopsis of Species. a. Kye-tubercle having two pairs of lateral branches in front of the eyes. a}, Two longitudinal rows of spinous tubercles reaching from the base of the pours to the anterior rear segment ..............6. . bicarinatus Sor. . A single Faitan loheenainale row lee spinous ‘ fubboreles reaching from the base of the eye-tubercles to the anterior rear se@Ment ... 12. ..:.2..22000 seas .. pectinatus Poc. b. Eye-tubercle having three pairs ai Wise on ayeheed in nfront ae tHE CV OS. iyicce coe sususilpeeQns nddjeverein auelons’ceitwetiiea «suet ehvps dcr et mani ONC ne Meets ass ai TRIZNOBUNUS ACUMINATUS, sp. n. (PI. II. figs. 6 ad.) Colour. Upper side greyish yellow all over; the small tubercles forming a pattern on the back are rather yellow. The under side is more yellow all over, with two dark brown patches on each side of the anal segment. Both joints of the mandibles are so thickly covered with black network on yellow ground as to appear black, AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. 30 The palpi are palish yellow, banded with black; the legs have the femur, patella, and tibia darker and greyer, the tarsal joint being quite hight yellow. One specimen, which I take to be a female, is much lighter and greyer above than the others, and on the under side pale yellow, without the black bands on the palpi. The genital operculum is more thickly covered with bristles and the sternum is corrugated, whereas in the others it is not. The spinous tubercles on the segments are more in number (about 14), Otherwise there is not much difference. As in Mr. Pocock’s 7. pectinatus from Tasmania, which this seems to resemble more than Dr. Sérensen’s 7’. bicarinatus from Sydney, the dorsal carapace 1s decorated with longitudinal and transverse rows of small round tubercles, forming ringed areas smooth in the inside. There are four longitudinal and about five transverse rows of granules, but no median longitudinal row of larger granules. The very remarkable eye-bearing tubercle, rising and pointing upwards and forwards from the front margin, is broadest at the base, and tapers to a point at the anterior end. The eyes are situated one on each side, about half-way from base to summit. Just behind the eyes a pair of long, pointed tubercles jut out one from each side. These are followed by three more similar pairs, and the whole is topped by one median tubercle ending in a sharp point. The intermediate space between these is filled up with small granular and pointed tubercles. On the front edge of the carapace on each side of the eye-tubercle are five spinous tubercles. Between the last row of small tubercles and the first of the rear segments Is a pair of moderate-sized spinous tubercles rather wide apart. On each of the rear segments is a transverse row of long spinous tubercles, about nine in number in the males, but more numerous (about 12 or 14)'and not quite so large in the female. On the under side the coxe of the palpi and first and second pairs of legs are profusely covered with granular tubercles, but the 3rd and 4th coxe are granular only along their margins. Each segment has a row of round tubercles rather larger than the above. The soft mouth-parts of the inner end of the palpal coxa form a very distinct upper jaw, divided longitudinally into two parts. The same parts of the coxa of the first pair of legs similarly form the lower jaw, each part lying on one side of a soft median hp. Coxa u1., on the other hand, ends in a flat chitinous piece, which, turning forwards, clasps the mouth-parts, and would appear to support and hold them together. Coxa 11. is similarly hard but black, and the pair seems to form ‘areuli genitales” on each side of the genital operculum and sternum. The end of coxa iv. is a narrow ridge of hard black substance, a continuation of the sides of the triangular 38 MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME sternum. The latter is like the lower end of the sternum in Trienonyx, but without the narrow stem; consequently the operculum is brought much closer to the mouth-parts, as in genera so far removed as Stylocellus Westw. The head of the penis is bluntly triangular, and its upper and lower sheaths, as far as can be seen when not extended, are terminated in a transverse line. The mandibles are shorter and weaker thanin 7riwnonyx ; the first joint does not reach as far as the end of the eye-tubercle. The palpi also are short and weak, and are not longer than the dorsal carapace. The legs are fringed the whole distance along the femora, patella, and tibize with long spines ranged on each side of the respective joints. The measurements (in zal rave) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 14, lat. 14; abd. lg. 22, lat.23; mand. 1; palpus 24; Ist leg 5 Ind 8, 3rd 64, 4th 83. This species differs from 7. ae inenn. Poe. in having a larger number of projections along the sides of the eye-tubercle, in having a larger number of spinous tubercles on the rear segments, and in being without the median row of larger tubercles on the dorsal carapace, I have four specimens, of which three are certainly males. They were collected by Mr. T. Hall near the Holliford River, L. Wakatipu district in the province of Otago. Family TRIHZNONYCHIDA, Genus TRIENONYX Sor. W. Sorensen in Koch & Keys. Die Arachn. Austr., Suppl. p. 58. This genus, being now restricted to those species in which the eye-tubercle is marginal, includes, with new ones that I am now recording, only seven in number. These may be distinguished as follows :— a. Carapace coarsely granulated. a. ‘Transverse row of granules on carapace, and a pair of spinous tubercles at posterior end of same ............. 7. rapaw Sor. b'. No spinous tubercles on carapace. a*. Carapace chocolate-brown; rear segments orna- mented with round flat orange spots, with a Short bristleion each) bet leo 14, 2nd 14, 3rd 94, 4th 13. One male and four females were collected by Dr. Cockayne from Kapiti Island, off the 8.W. coast of the North Island of New Zealand. TRLENONYX VARIEGATA, Sp.n. (PI. II. figs. 8 a-c.) Colour. Female: pale greyish yellow, with dark brown rect- angular pattern reaching from the eye-tubercle to the first rear seement, also a smaller and lighter coloured similar rectangle reaching from behind the eye-tubercle to the posterior end of the cephalic part, and transverse rows of yellow spots round on the carapace, oval on the segments; the under side is pale all over. The legs are pale yellow, banded with dark grey; the mandibles, and femoral and tibial joints of palpi are deep black, speckled with small yellow spots. The eye-tubercle yellow-grey in the middle, dark grey at the sides; eyes orange. The dorsal surface is smooth but coriaceous, the spots thereon flat, with short bristles, but the segmental spots slightly raised. The marginal eye-tubercle, rather high and conical, bas a wide circular base, narrowing to a blunt point anteriorly, but there is nothing either spinous or tubercular about it. The eyes are at the side. There are no spines on any part of the carapace. The mandibles are smooth, without tubercles, the first segment about twice as long as wide. The palpi are rather slight, the usual spines on the under side little more than low tuber cles, and none on the upper side. The sternum between the 3r d pair of coxee is wide and corrugated, in the male, with an upper and lower division, and above this a rectangular lip between the prominent oral parts of coxee i. The oral portions of coxee 11. are hardly formed at all and in no wise raised. hi AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. 41 The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— ©. Ceph. lg. 14, lat. 145 abd. lg. 23, lat. 24; mand. 21; palpus 34; 1st leg 5, 2nd 8, 3rd 53, 4th 73. @. Ceph: lg. 14, lat. 13 ;. abd. Ig. 22, lat. 23 ;- mand. 12 ; palpus 32; Ist leg 5, 2nd 8}, 3rd 43, 4th 8}. There are three females from the Holliford River and one young from Mt. Remarkables, L. Wakatipu. One from Mt. Oakden ; also six specimens from Paradise, L. Wakatipu, of which four are apparently males, with more prominent spines on the palpi and without the clear pattern on the back. They were all gathered by Mr. T. Hall. The males are, as mentioned by Mr, Pocock, generally more constricted in the cephalic part of the carapace than the females. The wide sternum and well-formed lip above it are features which might almost be held to be of generie importance, but I have not made them so in consideration of other resemblances the species shows to the genus 7ricenonyx. Genus NuncrA Loman. Nuneia J. C. C. Loman, Zool. Jahrb. Syst. xvr. 1902, p. 214. Nuncia R. I. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. xi. May 1908, p. 445. | Following the limitations adopted by Loman and Pocock, we: may assume that the species to be attributed to this genus have the ocular tubercle rising at a short distance from the front. margin of the carapace, that it 1s smooth and rather low and without any prominence thereon ; the carapace itself smooth, the: sternum in both sexes narrow, and the tarsal claws of the third and fourth pairs of legs with short side claws springing from near the base of the median claw. On this basis we have the following :— NUNCIA SPERATA Loman. Dr. J. C. C. Loman, loc. cit. supra. From Stephen’s Island on the N. coast of the South Island of New Zealand. NUNCIA VALDIVIENSIS Sor. Trienonyx valdiviensis W. Sébrensen in Koch & Keys. Die- Arachn. Austr. Nuncia valdiviensis R. I. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist... supra. From Chili. NUNCIA SUBLEVIS Poc. Tricnonyx sublevis R. I. Pocock, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1902, vol. 11. p. 404. Nunca sublevis R. 1. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. supra. Leeality. Otago, 8. Island, New Zealand. 42 MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME NUNCIA ENDERBAI Hogg. Tricnonyx enderboi H. R. Hogg, in Dr. Chilton, ‘ Sub- antarctic Islands of New Zealand,” Wellington, N.Z., 1909. This species, from the Enderby and Auckland Islands, clearly comes into the genus Vunecia. NuwciA sMirui, sp. n. (PI. II. figs. 9 a-c.) Colour. Male: carapace rather deep red-brown, mingled with black patches and streaks, but hardly suggesting much of a pattern. The edges of the segments are marked in some cases with bright white transverse lines. The mandibles are dark brown and the palpi bright yellow, with black network pattern on the lower portions of the femoral, patellar, and tibial joints. The under side is paler yellow-brown. The female is pale yellow with brown markings, and in both cases the legs are yellow with brown bands. The eye-tubercle is low (but rather higher in the male than in the female), slightly removed from the front margin of the cara- pace. The latter is finely granulated, and the dorsal surface is without warts or spines. The first joint of the mandzbles is about twice as long as broad, with a bunch of short spines near the base; the fingers long and fine. On the basal part of the femur of the palp are one long spine and two short ones, and there is another half-way up. On the inner side is a row of short blunt tubercles with a bristle on each, and on the outer side a row of bristles ; on the tibial joint are two long spines on the inner side and two warty knobs. The true maxillary process of coxa ii.is flat, and clasps on each side the soft white mouth-parts of coxa i., but behind this is a large prominence standing up from the surface and pointing rather backwards. At the outer end of coxa iv., just above the spiracle, are three short tubercles followed by a rather long club- shaped knob. The tarsal claws of legs iii. and iv. have each a pair of moderately large side claws springing from the base. The sternum is narrow, corrugated, with a triangular base and a spear-headed distal end. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 1, lat. 23; abd. lg. 33, lat. 32; mand. 33; palpus 17; Ist leg 7, 2nd 104, 3rd 7, 4th 10. I have one male and one female collected by Mr. W. W. Smith at Hawkes Bay, North Island of N. Zealand, and two males by Dr. Chilton from Picton at the north of the South Island. Genus SORENSENELLA Poc. R. I. Pocock, “Some new Harvest Spiders,” Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1902, vol. ii. p. 409. The two species of this genus described by Mr. Pocock have the eye-tubercle placed shortly behind the front margin of the AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. 43 carapace and bearing on its summit a short dentiform tubercle. The claws of the third and fourth pairs of legs have the side branches longer than the median claw in both sexes. I have a male and female which I am placing in the genus following (Monoxyomma), in which this type of claw appears in the male only, the female having the side claws shorter than the median. SORENSENELLA PREHENSOR Poc. R. I. Pocock, loc. cit. supra Locality. New Zealand (only), SORENSENELLA BICORNIS Poc. R. I. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. xi. May 1903, p. 439. Male and female from Christchurch, N.Z. Genus MonoxyomMA Poc. R. I. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. xi. May 1903, p. 444. Mr. Pocock formed this genus for those members of the family Triznonychide in which the ocular tubercle, rising distinctly behind the anterior margin of the carapace, is protected by a long suberect spine. He also gives as generic characters a pair of long spines on or about the third abdominal segment, and the dorsal valve or sheath of penis trilabiate. The pair of dorsal spines is far from being peculiar to this genus. It is present in a median bifurcated form in one case, and wanting in another, among the species which I am compelled to consider as belonging to this genus since they otherwise conform to the ty pe. The third character suffers under the disability of being a sexual one; and it is a matter of considerable difficulty, in the majority of cases, to ascertain whether it appertains to a par- ticular species or not. The following synopsis may help to distinguish the species below recorded :— a. Dorsal carapace roughly granular all over ......... M. tuberculatum, sp. n. b. Dorsal carapace smooth or small granules only. a’, A pair of spinous tubercles near rear end of CATAPACEL y.c.cArccon: .. M. spinatum Poc. . No pair of spinous ferelea a near rear ends oe carapace. a”, A bifurcated spinous tubercle on median line; no spines on anterior margin ; palpi 13 times as long as body ...................... MW hendei, sp. n. 6°. No spinous tubercles on carapace; a pair of short spines, one on each corner of anterior margin; palpi nearly twice as long as body. MM. trailli, sp. n. 44 MR. Il. R. HOGG ON SOME MoNnoXYOMMA SPINATUM Poc. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. loc. cit. p. 445. The type species, sent by Dr. Brown from Hill Grove, N.S. Wales. MoNOXYOMMA HENDEI, sp.n. (PI. III. figs. 10 a-d.) Colour. The cephalic part is yellow-brown smirched with black- brown, chiefly at the sides. ‘The thoracic part and segments almost wholly black-brown. The mandibles yellow-brown with a slight network of black, and the palpi the same but the network heavier. The under side of the carapace is very similar, yellow- brown and black being mixed up without much semblance of pattern. On the segments, however, the two colours are in transverse bands. On the legs the same mixture oceurs, the pale being more in the joints. On the femur and tibia the two colours appear in longitudinal bands, The median area of the carapace is slightly convex, this part being circumscribed by a ridge in front, and at the sides with a flat streak between 1t and the margin. The surface is coriaceous, without spines or tubercles, except as below, either thereon or projecting from the margin. The eye-tubercle is situated on the inner side of the ridge above mentioned ; it is conical and rather tall, with the horn-shaped projection from its highest point bend- ing slightly forward. This is about the same height as the lower tubercle, from which it springs. Near the posterior end of the carapace there is a large bifid tubercle in the middle line, with two transverse rows of small single ones, each with a bristle in the middle, between it and the first of the segments. On each of the three abdomiual segments is a row of similar warty tubercles, rather larger than the above, each with a short bristle. The mandibles and palpi are fairly long and strong. On the femoral joint of the latter are two longitudinal rows of quite small spines; on the tibial and distal joints the usual longer spines. On the trochanter, femur, patella, and tibia of all legs are rows of small warty tubercles with short spines, and similar but smaller on the coxe. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Total length 23, breadth 2; mand. 2; palpus 4; Ist leg 63, 2nd 932, 3rd 7, 4th 93. One male from Hende’s Ferry, Central Westland, N.Z., which ] have named after Mr. J. W. Hende, the collector. MOoNOXYOMMA TUBERCULATUM, sp.n. (PI. III. figs. 11 a-c.) Colowr. Males: a uniform dark yellow-brown over whole of carapace. The posterior edge of each rear segment is distinctly marked out by a pale transverse line; the mandibles and palpi —-s-CS—~—~S AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. 45 are rather bright yellow. The legs ashy grey. The under side is yellow from the front as far as the rear coxe; dark brown behind this on the sterna, which are bordered with paler edging. Two specimens, which I take to be females, are ashy grey above with pale grey spines and almost wholly yellow underneath, being there grey only at the extreme end; on the upper side there is a distinct rhomboidal pattern in pale grey on a dark ground. The cephalic part of the carapace is thickly covered with coarse granulations ; it is bounded posteriorly by a distinct depression separating it from the abdominal portion. The front border has one long median spine, flanked on each side by five smaller spines. ‘The eye-tubercle takes its rise at a point well behind the front margin; it is roughly hemispherical, with the eyes looking upwards, and a median horn about equal to the height of the basal part on which it stands. Behind the sulcus above mentioned the granulations form themselves more into longi- tudinal and transverse rows, but without achieving any very definite pattern. About midway between the dividing sulcus and the rear end are a pair of rather large spinous tubercles, and behind these four more, of which the middle two are the largest. The rear segments have regular rows of spinous tubercles, about ten on front row to four on the back row. The basal joint of the mandzbles is thick and bulges upwards. On the basal part of the second joint are several spinous tubercles. The palpi ave thick and powerfully bespined on all joints. In length they just equal the body. ‘hose of the supposed female ave slighter and less strongly armed. The legs are covered with spinous granules as far as the tibial joint, and the spaces between the trochanters of 11. and 11., and ui. and iv. are armed with three or four spinous tubercles. On the @élaws of tarsi i. and iv. are two quite small side wings inserted about the middle of the claw. I have little doubt about the sexes, but on removing the oper- culum of one supposed male, there was nothing at the bottom of a deep hollow but a granular mass. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 14, lat. 24; abd. lg. 33, lat.33?; mand. 27; palpus 5; Ist leg 77, 2nd 143, 3rd 11, 4th 13. These are three males and two females from Mt. AJgidus, Rakaia Gorge, South Island, N.Z. MonoxYoMMA TRAILLI, sp. n. (PI. IIT. figs. 12 a-f.) Colour. Male: a black-brown border along the front edge of the carapace, along the sides, and the same colour over the rear segments; in the median area there is a large yellowish patch. On the segments large, round faint yellow spots in transverse rows. The mandibles are yellow, with a black network pattern 46 MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME on both jomts. The palpi are orange, with dark blotches on the femur and inside of tibia. The legs are dingy yellow, ringed with brown. On the under side the whole of the cephalie part is orange, and the segments black-brown. In the female the pale area of the carapace is paler and more cream-colour than in the male, and the femur and patella of the palp are more continuously black-brown, otherwise the coloration is much the same. The carapace in both sexes is of a dull smoothness without granulations, and the only spinous tubercles are one at each front corner at the side of the trochanter of the first leg. The spots on the segments are slightly raised, with a bristle on each. The eye-tubercle is clearly removed from the front margin, and the portion between the eyes is produced forward into a peak about as high as the portion of the tubercle below the eyes. The mandibles are remarkably short, but the first joint bulges upwards above the base. On the other hand, the palpi are nearly twice as long as the whole body, the femoral joint bowed like the first joint of the mandible, and powerfully bespined both above and below. The other joints are similarly spined. The tarsal joint of Jegs i11. and iv. in the male has the modifi- cation of the claws which Mr. Pocock considered one of the points of his genus Sorensenella—viz., the side claws longer than the median; but in the female the claws are normal, the side claws being only half the length of the median, but springing from the base, thus showing that this character is only sexual in some cases. The sternum in the male is of the narrow type, triangular at the base and spear-headed at the distal end, with the oral part of coxe ii. meeting above it and no visible lip; but in the female it is broad, as I have above described it in 7ricnonyx variegata, with a well-defined lip in front. It would appear, therefore, as if this broad sternum, where it occurs, is a sexual character. I have re-examined the specimens I believe rightly taken to be males of 7’. variegata (indeed, in one of them the penis is exposed ) ; and, although the sternal depression is still wide, a slightly- formed narrow sternum is to be seen in the median line, and the lip is above it. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Male. Ceph. lg. 23, lat. 31; abd. 1g. 22, lat. 4; mand. 2; palpus 9; Ist leg 83, 2nd 14}, 3rd 9, 4th 13. Mr. W. Traill, after whom I have named them, sent the specimens, one male and one female, from Stewart Island. ALGIDIA, gen. nov. This genus differs from the others in the family in having the genital operculum, in both sexes, furnished with denticular tubercles, each with a short bristle at its apex, extending along the front margin and toa greater or shorter distance down the AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. AV sides. The eye-tubercle, which is situated the length of its diameter behind the front margin of the carapace, bears wart- like protuberances in its median line, varying from one only to a row of three or four. The mandibles are short and weak. The palpi rather slight, but tuberculated and strongly bespined. The rear segments and trochanters are strongly bespined and the carapace profusely granulated. ALGIDIA CUSPIDATA, sp. n. (PI. IIT. figs. 13 a-e.) Colour. Male: carapace dingy yellow, with two dark, broad, longitudinal stripes, beginning one each side of the eye-tubercle and reaching to the level of the fourth trochanter, where it turns outwards to the margin. The mandibles and palpi are darker, the latter covered with pale wart-like protuberances and the former with black network pattern. The legs are yellow with dark grey rings; the under side yellow-grey. The female is paler on the carapace; the dark stripes not so conspicuous, but the warty pattern more regular, The legs, mandibles, and palpi about the same as in the male. The eye-tubercle is hemispherical; the median row of warts three or four in the males, fewer in the females. The carapace in the male is strongly constricted behind the cephalic part, the sides straighter in the female. On the front margin in the male there are seven long spines in front of the eye-tubercle and three smaller behind each corner. In the female are three formidable spines in the centre, flanked by two small ones, and none at the side. The median area and sides of the carapace are thickly covered with warty pustules, but there are none on the darker stripes. On the abdominal portion in the male are four transverse rows of powerful spines, while in the female there are only a few large ones near the centre line, and a fewer number of smaller ones A wide intervals reaching to the sides, The trochanters of all the legs and the intervals between are strongly bespined. The legs themselves have small denticu- lations, with a short bristle on each as far as the distal end of the tibial joint. The metatarsal jomts smooth, the tarsi with short hairs. The tarsal claws are weak; those of iii. and iv. with short side wings springing from about the middle. On the under side the cox are all bordered with rows of warty prominences, the front margin of coxe i, having a row of sharp pointed black spines. The margin of the genital operculum is divided into about ten or eleven distinct scopulations or pustules, each terminated with a bristle. The mandibles are short and weak, and covered with short black beady pustules. The palpi are about the length of the carapace in the male, 48 ON SOME AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. strongly bespined with sharp bristly points; those of the female are longer and rather slunmer, but equally bespined. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Male. Ceph. lg. 14, lat. 13; abd. lg. 2, lat. 23; mand. 24; palpus 31; Ist leg 44, 2nd 8, 3rd 63, 4th 83. Female. Ceph. lg. 14, lat. 14; abd. lg. 22, lat. 2; mand, 12; palpus 44; Ist leg 54, 2nd 93, 3rd 83, 4th 102. The males are three from Mt. Algidus, Rakaia Gorge, and one from Mt. Remarkables, near L. Wakatipu. The females are one from Mt. Starve-all, near Nelson, and one from Canterbury. All these localities are in the South Island of New Zealand. There can be little doubt that they are all of the same species from the similar coloration of their parts. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. PrarE i, Fig. 1. Macropsalis chiltoni Hogg. § with short mandibles. Underside showing mouth-parts, genital operculum, and coxe. Macropsalis chiltoni Hogg. Profile of male. Pantopsalis pococki, sp.n. (a) Dorsal view ; (b) profile; (¢) Pantopsalis wattsi, sp. n., cepbalic part of carapace, dorsal view. ; . (a) Pantopsalis halli, sp.n., 8; (b) 2; (ce) genital operculum of %; (d@) genital operculum of ¢ turned back showing organ. . Pantopsalis grayi,sp.n. 2. (a) Ventral view of carapace; (b) mandible ; (c) patella and tibia of palp. ie Or Puate II, Trienobunus acuminatus, sp.n., 6. (a) Dorsal view of carapace; (6) ven- tral view of carapace; (c) eye-tubercle enlarged; (d) genital operculum turned back, showing dorsal and ventral sheaths and organ—distal end only. . Trienonyx cockayni, sp.n. (a) Under side of cephalic part of @; (6) under side of cephalic part of ¢; (c) genital organ of ¢ protruded from operculum—tront view ; (d) ditto—side view. 8. Trienonyx variegata, sp.n. (a) Dorsal view of 6; (6) ventral view of g ; (c) ventral view of cephalic part of 2. 9. Nuncia smithi, sp.n. (a) Dorsal view of carapace of 3 ; (b) ventral view, anterior portion of carapace; (c) tarsal claw of iv. o Fig. wT Prares III. Fig. 10. Monoxyomma hendei,sp.n. &. (a) Dorsal view of carapace; (6) ventral view of carapace ; (c) profile; (d) tarsal claw of iv. 11. Monoxyomma tuberculatum, sp.n. (a) Dorsal view of carapace ; (6) ventral view of carapace ; (c) eye-tubercle from side. 12. Monoxyomma trailli, sp.n. (a) Dorsal view of $; (6) ventral view of cephalic part of 3; (c) ventral view of cephalic part of 2; (d) eye-tubercle ; (e) iv. tarsal joint showing claws of ¢; (/) iv. tarsal joint showing claws of 2. 13. Algidia cuspidata, gen. et sp.n. (a) Dorsal aspect of 3 ; (b) dorsal aspect of ¢ ; (c) under side of cephalic part of ¢ showing genital operculum ; (¢) under side of cephalic part of 2 showing genital operculum ; (e) tarsal joints of iv. leg. ON THE ENGLISH SPECIES OF RED SPIDER. 49 4, Revision of the English Species of Red Spider (Genera Tetranychus and One sanehiay: By Stanuey Hirst. (Published by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.) [Received December 8, 1919: Read February 24, 1920. ] (Text-figures 1-5.) The following note deals with the Englhsh species of mites commonly called Red Spiders, and is almost entirely based on material collected by the author, the coloration being described from living specimens. AORTIC LIGAMENT IN INDIAN FISHES, 69 be absent from a few genera, though present and well-developed in the majority. V. Some Suggestions concerning the Role and Relationships of the Aortic Ligameiut. If a fish possessing an aortic ligament be completely stripped of its muscles, the vertebral column (with its dorsal elastic ligament and the attached aorta) becomes thrown into a series of serpentine curves. If now the aortic ligament be removed, the curves disappear. This is proof (1) that the lateral muscles keep the aortic ligament on the stretch; (2) that the aortic hgament, which is not closely adherent along its course to the vertebral column, is antagonistic in action to the dorsal elastic ligament, the latter tending to keep straight the vertebral column, the former tending to curve it; (3) that the aortic ligament is more powerful than the dorsal elastic ligament ; (4) that when the vertebral column becomes flexed by muscular action, the dorsal elastic ligament becomes stretched and the aortic ligament slackened. ‘These obvious conclusions, however, do not assist us much in comprehending the function of the aortic ligament. What this function can be, it is at present only possible to guess at. It would seem that it must be different to that of Reissner’s fibre in the nerve-cord and of the dorsal elastic ligament, if only because of its different situation and attachments. It would also appear that, in view of the fact that the aorta in these, as in other fishes, assumes the functions of a heart (the actual heart being separated from the aorta by the gill capillary system), the aortic ligament must either act as an auriculo-ventricular valve or actively assist in the propulsion of blood along the aorta. Since it is difficult to conceive in what way any alteration of position or tension of the vertical curtain of tissue formed by the ligament and its suspensory fold in the aorta can enforce the contractions of the aortic wall, the only feasible explanation of the aortic ligament is to suppose that it acts as a longitudinal valve preventing forward regurgitation of blood. According to Burne, Stewart suggested that since the aortic ligament, owing to its stoutness and tension, remains straight during the lateral flexions of the body, it, with its suspensory fold, must act as a diagonal curtain which sweeps the blood posteriorly in the aorta during the swimming movements of the fish. The flexions of the body originating anteriorly and passing posteriorly, successive portions of the aortic hgament curtain will assume a diagonal position in the aorta as the flexion proceeds posteriorly, and this process, it was suggested, may aid in the propulsion of the blood posteriorly. Since, however, the fold hangs loosely in the aorta and never completely closes it, it seems more likely that this diagonal curtain will be of more use as a valve which to some extent prevents regurgitation of the blood forwards, than as a mechanism which would have to be of MR. D. R. BHATTACHARYA ON THE 70 | "peyesuols puve MOLIeU UOLseL Tepney “4104S 5 Ors ae ke pure po}escuo[a uoLsor [epury ‘uy [esaop 44049 ‘po esuol[ i oe 66 “q10 4S ‘OZIS poonpodl jo 10 poyeouoje suy UVIpeW [VsLod ‘OULIV I "1OJVM YSTYPOVIG pure 66 *LOYVM-YSOL *104VM-YSOL A "“OULIVIAL "19YVA YSTYOVAG pu BS *104VM-YSOLA (14 (4 “OULIVNYSO pur 1o}VM-YSoLq (a4 66 66 a3 6% *1OPVM-YSOL ‘OULIVUL IO IOPLA -YSoL 13 iL OL iG ud uh 9 ug i iV iG il mi it th iG Or mae ved i a tv iG ua ye el jl WeOL iG u& il wae: 1G ie beak utOL S/T mis wh ut Hib % EV “pouturexo eo Y}.oUuerT “quosqy ‘quosotg 66 “‘quesqV Ge “quasOL | *podoyoaop A[qQooy ‘yuOsoIg “{UISqe Io yuosord PUIULVST] Noy cc 66 ‘soutzosrodnyy *SOULOFIULICAY | ‘Iopaoqug ‘BplapyusooaryO ce “2 p1a194.d0qo Ny co co BPLUTS ce a4 G6 66 ‘eprumdsy | ATUL QvLOp SNLJUGI0NY ar a ey qo.uvdoy 14 DIVpVYyI sn.azdozoNy suprssof snyrunuqooovg sae ithe aay see "-@puD 8ns0J01gq teehee ees ee eee Unbvur SDIMDIO SNISDADI SAUWOLID AL Fee eee . povjabunb DUPUNIUG wupunyong smsvbuvg nyova shyqyoudowuny onuvb snidounepnasg Fe ee eee et we eee. eee TEED) ohvyywy tine Ben ene Vp jatwoh snumbog ppqnd snosyouyywO OF Ip ee 2) Jape ats ce ohne a slfel'y 10 celty Lon (74 "SUDYPYCOLIVUL SNOLYIVYIVY “San erga nesses ee yoo DUP ees eae ee 107 snQubg orn = cen nspqypo 0aqn'T wpUBYING DYDO Rae ee es DDHWU DULYMLUY DIVOL OBQDT DUDADS SNQAVET gue te “= 009 SNUpUog Snails 0aqn'T Dgat DUYYMLVO snuojso) dip oaqu'T ‘soroedg va AORTIC LIGAMENT IN INDIAN FISHES. ‘Joos SoYVOTPUL , PUB SOyOUL soyouep pee *poyeVcuol[y *poyesuols ATATVT *poyVouo[y *peyesuoyo pue Modivu uor420d [epury ‘poeyvsuoyze ATALVT *popyV.suoly 66 66 66 66 (75 "UOLGOL [VUpNVd podeys-fey =‘ poyesuo;py 66 ce 66 66 66 66 C6 74 66 ce ce 66 66 66 ce ‘UOLGOL [epneo podvys “PW ‘“[Vstop poezecuo;[y ‘poyeouolea puv MOIIVU WOLSAL Tepney ‘poyecuoje ATATVJ [eVs1o(y 66 66 66 66 66 Wx0Ug pur pur pue ‘OULIV] ‘OULIVUL IOYLM-YSIL] “OULIVIYSO IOYVM-YSod (75 6G "TLOYVM-YSOL] | *LO9VM YSPOVAG pus Ysody 66 “OULIV]A *LOVBM-YSoty 66 66 “OULIV AT OULIVUL oe "TOYVM-YSOL ‘OULIVNYS pus 66 OULIVIA, 66 "IOYCM-USOL FT Hoo lol alo1 1d Ew 19 10 ~ as oe *VUOSqYV 66 ‘JUesSe1g ‘ris A104 doyqueoy ce a4 ce 6G a4 a4 *‘SOULLOFI[LON *‘SOULLOJIOUBIQUILG 66 "a Q SOULLOJIT[IN.SUy 66 "SOULLOFLOOSHY a4 os ‘NpPlUVBILIG ‘wBplokioeg | ‘eprauds | "NPlUVl1og | ‘xeprutouspog “VployvuULodya ‘VpyLony] “eplTyueqeuy a5 ‘xprpeydoeoorqdg ‘eprloudiydury 66 ix oe “eprlUuanasn JA 66 *BPLOOSaIq ULODG (a4 ‘epredniy pngipi UodD1ay T, wolpanu sipsvidriwh yr Ce ae SNIDVUIUE SHULIY IAT SUDINDUD SNUDALAY pee aca ae sniagaid snwmaulpog "* susuaUis snaqJDWoyy pyns..oa bn ee ea ae SNYDUYS eee ps sryopyound se ee snynwou snyoyda014 dG wryons snoudiydup 0..0qg shypzyorydo . Scecete; ‘eit “priery aay} Ds 66 Senza ateWpede . DIY] A88A} 6 SUR EPI 88 WULLODU a nersteessess ss manqoUnd DUBLN AL punpibuos “nubs eUuojag penne eee nee puroshyovug 66 2 pypbuoja DU0I)Aq ee sisUapurs ce 2 pidpya vadnyy DPUNIDYI SNSSBO]DU YL) yea SNILIDQDIDU & p.vnjye, syynvsbu TTT DUULUWUDUL SNSSB0JDYO SUAPUDIS SYQDUP | | | ‘1OYVM YSTYOVAG ‘UOLSOI [VpNed eae puv 10yVM-Ysor qT es e ee ‘eplpequeowysepy | ""'' SNIVULID SrydQuiaDIsSY IT : a 6 | : : | cc Ee es os aanunua sapoypasg ‘ ee LBL eprpoouoIMe}d | snynauvenbuinb snssopboulig , pur ora HeOL_ iT = ‘ ‘SpPIUMIyoUy, | tT MPDAMS SNUNYILWT, : : eee | : . PIE eres esd Ok: shuwyad snuwhy T, : : 1/6 | fe ; - ie LOppipwuUr snpouhyovouT, or C6 Jeseessace Porat vn 0-0 sndouqw a4 ce (4/4 eb (44 cc ° 2. [see eee eae peste eee A A 9 4 ‘i VpPLSUVLVy eee snyywb xwp.wg : ieee ‘eprpey doo Ayer mess gaqgnas snyoydahqw gq 3 s — OULTR TAT iv 7k ie es ‘eprIplouoyoy “" SaqD.LonnU srvaweyon E ; ed MSS ae : a “BPUGOL)s| a me es sna, sapror1gory) , ‘ : 9 : : ep Es ieee reresess ss" SELDUN] SUN Zi ; Me ig : | “" snsoquawmnyyf satay z WEG i SBpLIAOk) | “ svumsofeynnba vz2z09 ‘OULIV IAL ue oh 0 is [neat 2a Rak ede nyo} suibpulig e > | “OULIVNYSO : = 2 pur Jes Bods ae hers il ere Hes greeter en wafiepoyo sayy < 5 . OT : ee ieee wopo.y pha - E ean file 7 | coprysTeg |" 82.007}098 $0781) 0g z [epuey ; | ; OT : eal nee ae s epson ed SNYPUVIDULT, 3 | i‘ eT | . 2 ae erg sig.to snddvydi ‘ i‘ | ‘ 1.9 | : i Mees, snbuo snboydoywag 5 -“ UP ‘epryUopoyeyy SANYJUDH SIYJUdIDIOFY = | ie, us a PES EUG Cita ns| uar aaeeee pupyrs obnyyvg i : | OT : if | CCl aa enet|(aeteh ciekaiveiicton score TOON OD QM SLY IYOIO : | 9 : | Sone | a eens VW)JASSNL DUWUQUY “OULIV]AL | one) as re | pee |e eg DIDNIDU DUE! ‘OULIVNYSO *popVsuoly | DUB LoyEM-YsoTT “eS "JUISq VY ‘tis A104 doyyUuvoW ‘epIUeBlog |" SEE DUvd saprouwwg | ‘ SS SSS SS —— —|- at - ———_ —_—__—__ —-_—_ SSeS ‘gZIS poonped 2 “pouTUrExo “*JUOSQe ~ Jo 10 poye.suoja a ae ysy jo fo uongte *‘Ioproqna *ATTUTe ‘sotoed a suy werpeur pesiocy 104VM-YSOLq a quoulvsty BP a a to9dg ; {our OO N, 9 AORTIC LIGAMENT IN INDIAN FISHES. fe: powerful construction to be at all effective. For the suspended ligament to be of any use as a diagonal curtain, it is evident that the aorta, as part of the body, will have to undergo flexion, the nrenn remaining taut and straight, but, curiously enough, comparison of the statemeénts in the tables (pp. 70-72) shows that it is just in those fishes in which, owing to a deep thick body and envelopment by deeply groov ed vertebral and stout hemal arches, the aorta cannot experience much lateral flexion, that the ligament exists, Text-figure 5 c \ A diagrammatic representation of the position of the ligament inside | the aorta during the lateral flexions of the body. or., aorta; lig., ligament. On the other hand, the aortic ligament is absent or but feebly developed in all, or most of, those fishes in which the body is slender, and the median (especially the median dorsal) fins elongated in form, or the caudal region very much elongated narrow and tapering), 7. é., in just those fishes in which flexion of the body and therefore of the aorta must be most marked. This correlation of facts, founded on my examination of over 80 species of fishes, certainly does not appear to favour the hypothesis as to the mode of action of the aortic ligament suggested by Professor Stewart. Since I have no theory of my own to offer concerning the raison @étre of the aortic ligament, I-will merely add that it is 74 MR. D. R. BHATTACHARYA ON THE evident that though the ligament is well developed in the Siluridz (a primitive group), yet it cannot be regarded as a primitive structure, seeing that it is not developed in many other primitive groups of fishes. As regards the development of the ligament, [ have not been able to study this for lack of material. It is, however, evident that the ligament must arise as a special development of the inner dorsal wall of the aorta (Plate II. figs. 12, 13, 14), the elastic fibres of. the middle and inner coats of the aorta becoming ageregated to form the continuous elastic ligament. This view is borne out by the fact that in the “ sub-intervertebral ” regions of the aorta in Rita buchanani (Plate I. fig. 4), and also at the anterior and posterior ends of the aorta, the hgament pierces through its dorsal wall and runs through the middle coat of the aorta for some distance. Appendix: Methods of Preparation of Material. The marine specimens were fixed in 4 per cent. formalin, and the fresh-water specimens, which were available locally, were fixed in Potassium bichromate solution. The smaller specimens were decalcified in a solution of 3 per cent. nitric acid in 70 per cent. aleohol, which was changed every alternate day for from 3-5 weeks. Portions of trunk and tail region were imbedded in hard wax and sections 8 » thick were cut. The sections were stained on the slide, mostly in Delafield’s Hematoxylin, though I have also, at times, used Borax Carmine and Picro-indigo-carmine for differential staining with remarkably good results. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. Prats I, Fig. 1. Dorsal aorta of Clarias magur (X 25). Note the absence of any trace of a ligamentous structure in the dorsal wall of the aorta. c.aor., cavity of aorta; d.w.a., dorsal wall of aorta. . Longitudinal section through the vertebral column and dorsal aorta of Eutropiichthys vacha in the caudal region. showing the relative positions ot the dorsal ligament and the aortic ligament (X 5). The aortic ligament in the caudal region is more closely attached to the dorsal wall of the aorta than in the trunk-region. d.lig., dorsal ligament; sp.c., spinal cord; d.w.a., dorsal wall of aorta; lig., aortic ligament; v.w.a., ventral wall of aorta ; cav.a., cavity of aorta; s.v.m., sub-vertebral mass of connective tissue. ig. 3. Transverse section through the sub-vertebral region of the dorsal aorta in Rita buchanani (X16). car., cartilaginous tissue; lig., aortic ligament. Fig. 4. Transverse section through the sub-intervertebral region of the dorsal aorta in Rita buchanani (X 16). lig., aortic ligament. Fig. 5. Anterior termination of the aortic ligament in Silundia gangetica (X % nat. size). aor., dorsal aorta; lig., aortic ligament ; a., anterior position of aortic ligament which, passing through the dorsal wall of the aorta, becomes attached to the basioccipital bone ; c., the point of origin of the anterior branch of the ligament after it perforates the aorta; 0., basi- occipital; par., parasphenoid; a.lig., anterior branch of the lgament ; a., the fibres of the ligament which spread out to form a thin sheet. Fig. 6. Ventral view of the skull and anterior vertebree in Wallago attu (nat. size). par. parasphenoid; bas.o., vasioccipital; 1st v., first vertebra ; p.t., post-temporal ; 2nd v. second vertebra. ry 3a bo Fig. th 9. . 12. al e. 14, AORTIC LIGAMENT IN INDIAN FISHES. (3, PuateE IT. A diagrammatic longitudinal representation of the position of the ligament inside the dorsal aorta in Wallago attu. The lateral wall of the aorta has been removed to show the position of the ligament. Jig., aortic ligament; sus.f., suspensory fold; 8rd v., third vertebra; 2nd v., second vertebra; lst v., first vertebra; ba.o., basioccipital; d.w.a., dorsal wall of aorta; v.w.a., ventral wall of aorta: lig.per., the place where the ligment perforates through the dorsal wall of the aorta and becomes attached to the bone; cav.a., cavity of aorta; lig.a.’, anterior branch of the ligament running through the wall of the aorta; lig.a.’’, the place where the anterior branch of the hgament perforates through the most anterior dorsal wall of the aorta; lig.a.’’’, the anterior branch of the ligament after it comes out of the aorta and runs beneath the basioccipital bone; eff-a., efferent arteries. Transverse section through the aorta of Wallago attu in the region where the hgament perforates “through the dorsal wall of the aorta. This section is supposed to have passed throveh A-B region of fig. 7 (18). c.aor., cavity of aorta; d.w.a., dorsal wall of aorta; lig.per., the place where the ligament perforates through the dorsal wall of the aorta and becomes attached to the bone. Transverse section through C-D region of fig. 7. The ligament (/ig.) here runs through the upper region of the dorsal wall of the aorta (x 13). Lettering as in fig. 8. Transverse section through E-F region of fig. 7. The lgament here runs through the lower region of the dorsal wall of the aorta (X 18). Lettering as in fig. 8. Transverse section through G-H region of fig. 7 (X 35). d., adventitia ; c., cartilaginous tissue; 6., media; int., intima; a., elastic fibres; lig., ligament ; bwn., bundles of elastic fibres. Transverse section through I-J region of fig. 7. A slight prolireration takes place inside the cavity of the aorta in the region where the ligament is situated (X 16). car.c., cartilage-cells ; lig., ligament; d.w.s., dorsal wall of aorta. Transverse section through K-L region of fig. 7. The proliferation of the dorsal wall of the aorta containing the ligament grows deeper (X 18). Letterirg as in fig. 8. Transverse section through M-N region of fig. 7. The proliferation reaches nearly its maximum and the ligan nent acquires its characteristic shape. Posteriorly the ligament flattens out, being narrower dorso-ventrally than from side to side (X 18). Lettering as m fg. 8. ae : pane Th hs x ON SOME LIZARDS OF THE GENUS CHALCIDES. a 6. On some Lizards of the Genus Chaleides. By E. G. Bouncer, F.Z.8 [Received February 4, 1920: Read February 24, 1920. ] (Text-figures 1-4.) At a recent meeting of the Society a paper was read by Major Stevenson-Hamilton in which the subject of the geographical distribution of the varieties of various African mammals was touched upon, and it was pointed out that one would be justified in treating some of the varieties as distinct species were it not for the existence of intermediate forms. This paper brought to my mind some notes I had made about ten years ago on the classification and distribution of the Skink Chalcides ocellatus, a species inhabiting Southern Europe, Northern and N.-Eastern Africa, and S.W. Asia, which presents an extraordinary amount of variation: in fact, the structural difference between the two extreme forms is so great that, were it not for the wonderfully complete manner in which they are connected, they could not possibly be denied specific rank. I have recently gone over again the material in the British Museum, and completed my notes on this subject, which I now have the honour to bring before the Society. In papers written nearly 30 years ago my father, dealing with the matter, came to the conclusion that this species could’: be divided into five distinct varieties or subspecies, characterized mainly by the coloration and by the number of scales round the body, which was found to vary between 24 and 40—a range of variation far greater than is to be found in any other lizard * The five forms then described were the forma typica, and the varieties ragazzii, tiligugu, vittatus, and polylenis. To these must be added the var. occidentalis (Ch. stmonyi Stdr.). The position of the nostril has been used as a specific character in the lizards of the genus Chalcides, the species viridanus, of the Canary Islands, and bottegi, of Somaliland, being regarded as specifically different from C. ocellatus, mainly from the fact that the opening is pierced in advance of the suture between the rostral and the first labial instead of exactly above it, as is normally the case in the typical C. ocellatus. C. bottegi was described from a single specimen preserved in the Genoa Museum, and was stated to be closely related to C. ocellatus, but differ ed, apart from having the nostril pierced in advance of the rostral and first labial, in the body being much more slender and the scales of the vertebral rows being more than twice as broad as * Boulenger. Ann. & Mag. N. H. (6))v. 1890, p. 144. = Tr. Zool. Soc. xiii. 1891, p. 138, pl. xvii. ss Ann. Mus. Genova (2) xii. 1891, p. 12. BS 3) XVI. 1896, p. bol, Anderson. Zool. Egypt, Rept. p. 210 (1898). 78 MR. E. G. BOULENGER ON SOME Jong *. On examination of a large material since received at the British Museum, I find that this form cannot be accepted as a distinct species, the nostril being almost as often pierced above the suture in question as in advance of it; while in a number of specimens of the typical (’. ocellatus the nostril is pierced in advance of the rostral and the first labial. ‘The body of the form bottegi is, I find, not always more slender than in the typical C’. ocellatus, in which there is considerable variation in this respect. The number of scales, however, is less than in the typical C’. ocellatus, being as a rule 24, as in the var. ragazzii, but dropping sometimes to 22. The degree of enlargement of the two median rows of dorsal scales varies considerably both in the form in question and in the typical C. ocellatus. If the position of the nostril caunot in this genus be regarded as of specific value, the question arises whether C. viridanus, which apart from this character agrees so closely with C. ocellatus, must also be only allowed the “rank of a var iety to be added to the numerous other forms which are embraced in the specific conception of C. ocellatus. I find, however, that the head has a different shape, the snout being less convex—a difference which finds expression in the proportions of the upper labials, all or most of which are not deeper than long. There are two forms of (. viridanus—-the typical, from Tenerife, Gomera, and Hierro, with the sides and belly black and 26-32 (usually 28) series of scales; and the var. simonyi, from Gran Canaria, with the belly yellow, greenish white or grey, the head somewhat larger and better defined than in the preceding, and 28-34 series of scales. As pointed out by Steindachner, the Chaleides of Fuertaventura must be regarded as a variety (var. occidentalis) of C. ocellatus T. Great individual variation in form ‘is to be found in the structure of these lizards, especially in the proportions of the limbs and body. In the var. bottegz the latter may vary to a very great extent, namely from 18 to 28 per cent. In the distance hetween the axilla and groin the variation is also often great. The variations show that little importance can be attached to the proportions of the body and limbs, there being an overlap, for instance, in the length of the limbs between the two species ©. ocellatus and C. bedriagee. The latter lizard was described as differing specifically from C. ocellatus in the proportions of the limbs, and in the nostril being pierced in advance of the suture between the rostral and first labial. It has been shown that neither of these characters can be regarded as absolute. I have ascertained, however, that in C. bedriage the fourth labial normally takes the place of the subocular, and not the fifth, and * Boulenger. Ann. Mus. Genova (2) xviii. 1898, p. 719, pl. x. fig. 1, and (8) v. 1912, p. 330. of Lanzarote and Fuertayv entura, waterless and treeless and nearer the African coast, differ greatly from the other Canary Islands in their fauna, which is nearly identical with that of the neighbouring Sahara.—Tristram, Brit. Assoc. 1893. LIZARDS OF THE GENUS CHALCIDES. 79 that therefore it may, provisionally at least, retain its specific rank, In the small island of Linosa, between Tunisia and Malta, lizards similar to, but easily distinguishable from, the typical C. ocellatus are found, and have been regarded as the young of the var. tiligugw, which occurs in Tunisia and Malta. They differ from the typical form in the small size (the largest specimen measuring only 80 min. without the tail), in having the gular Text-figure 1. oy SERiIEs A. a a. Ch. ocellatus. b. Ch. sepoides. s ) : c. Ch. delislii. s < SF fi aya x sA 2 “ Viney Sf a g iy : yh Co d. Ch. mauritanicus. SERIES [3. a. Ch, thierryi. 7 v7 b. Ch. lineatus. c. Ch. tridactylus. 3 d. Ch. guentheri. Cc d Reduction in the hind limb. region spotted, and in the under surface being slate-colour. They are dorsally brown, spotted all over with small black and white ocelli. An indistinct paler dorso-lateral band is sometimes pre- sent. The number of scales round the body is 30 in all speci- mens, the two median rows being enlarged. These lizards are undoubtedly distinct from all the other forms of the species ocellatus, and for them I propose the varietal name of linose. C. thierryt was originally described as a var. of C. bottegi: it is, 80 :° MR. E. G. BOULENGER ON SOME however, a very distinct species, quite different from the nume- rous forms of C. ocellatws *. In its shorter not so unequal toes, in its large ear-opening, and in its long, thick tail, 1t approaches the groups including C. lineatus, tridaciylus, guenthert; and my father bas given it as his opinion, that, although derived from the same stock as C. ocellatus, it represents one of the pentadactyle forms from which the more degenerate types referred to above have been evolved ; whilst a continuous degeneration can be traced from C. ocellatus through C. sepoides to C’. delisliti and C. mauwri- tanicus. | In all, therefore, we now have, apart from the typical form, seven varieties of the lizard C. ocellatus, and it is interesting from the evolutionary point of view that they are geographically connected, it being possible to trace every link in the chain from the short and stout variety with as many as 40 scales from Moroeco, which must be regarded as the most generalized form, to the long and slender type with only 22 scales round the body from Abyssinia and Somaliland. The general reduction in the number of scales takes place as follows :— 1. var. polylepis (34-40 scales). Morocco. 2. ,, occidentalis (30-32 ,, ). I. of Fuertaventura. 3. ,, vittatus (30-34 ,, ). Tangier. 4. ,, tehigugu (28-34 ,, ). Sardinia, Sicily, Malta, S. Italy, Algeria and Tunisia, N.of the Sahara. 5. forma typica (26-32 ,, ). Arabia, Persia, Kgypt to Algerian Sahara, Syria, Cyprus, Greece, Eritrea. 6. var. linose (30 » )» Lot Limesa (5, \ragazen (24 wi ye Asser: 8. ,, dottegr (22-24 ,, ). Abyssinia, Somaliland. The following are definitions of the 8 forms into which C’. ocellatus may be divided :— 1. Var. polylepis Blgy. 34-40 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows not enlarged ; light brown above, with- out ocelli, but with a round yellowish spot on each scale, forming regular longitudinal series sometimes separated by dark lines: young-with vertical black-and-white bars on the sides of the neck. Maximum length from snout to vent 155 mm. 2. Var. occidentalis Stdr. 30-32 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows not enlarged; coloration as in the preceding, but the yellow spots less numerous. Maximum length from snout to vent 100 mm. * Ch. bottegi var. thierryi Tornier, Arch. f. Nat. 1901, p. 87. Ch. thierryi O. Neumann, Zool. Jahrb., Syst. xxii. 1905, p. 401. Ch. pulchellus Mocquard, Bull. Mus. 1906, p. 466. 81 LIZARDS OF THE GENUS CHALCIDES. °8N}D]1290 saprayMyy JO WorynqLysip peoupdersoang “HZZWOWH' YWA *YSONIT ‘NYA “SITWLN3IGIO9NO ‘HWA “SIdSTATOd’ HWA LLL LALA LI : oe “"SNLYWLILIAS SYA "1INaLLOg uwa “NONSIMNL awa | Proc. Zoor. Soc.—1920, No. VI. ‘G VINSY-9XOT, 82 3. 4. On 6. MR. E. G. BOULENGER ON SOME Text-figure 3. Relatienships and distribution. Var. vitiatus Blgr. 30-34 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows not enlarged; brown above, without spots or ocelli, with a light dorso-lateral and a dark brown or black lateral band, both sharply defined. Maximum length from snout to vent 115 mm. Var. tiligugu Gmel. 28-34 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows not or but feebly enlarged ; olive or brown above, with black and white ocelli and a well-defined yellowish dorso-lateral band edged with black below. Maxi- mum Jength from snout to vent 150 mm. Forma typica Blgr. 26-32 scales round the body, the two median rows not or but feebly enlarged ; yellowish or brown above, with black and white ocelli, sometimes confluent into irregular transverse bands; a light dorso-iateral band sometimes present. Maximum length from snout to vent 140 mm. Var. linose,n. 30 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows not enlarged; dark brown above, ocellated all over, with or without a more or less distinct pale dorso-lateral band ; belly grey; gular region spotted with black. Maxi- mum length from snout to vent 80 mm. . Var. ragazsii Blgr. 24 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows feebly enlarged ; pale greyish brown above, with an ill-defined paler dorso-lateral band; no ocellar spots except on the posterior part of the body, the hind hmbs, and the tail; crowded black spots form a lateral band from nostril to above axil, passing through the eye and above the ear-opening. Maximum length from snout to vent 75 mm. LIZARDS OF THE GENUS CHALCIDES. 83 Text-figure 4. Ch. ocellatus, var. polylepis. Ch. ocellatus, vay. bottegi. 8. Var. bottegi Blgr. 22-24 scales round the body. the two median dorsal rows more or less strongly enlarged; yellowish or greyish brown with black and white ocelli, with a dark, often black-edged dorsal band along the median rows of scales and a dark brown or black lateral band, the two separated by a sharply-defined pale area, Maximum length from snout to vent 130 mm. The two extreme forms are represented on text-figure 4. 6* ON DEATHS IN THE GARDENS IN 1919, 85 7. Report on the Deaths in the Gardens in 1919. With Notes on Avian Enteritis. By Navaaniet 8S. Lucas, M.B., F.Z.8., Pathologist to the Society. [Received February 6, 1920: Read February 24, 1920. ] (With 4 Charts.) The total deaths in the Gardens for the year 1919 amount to 926. The total is composed as follows :— Vicars 2.0 oes ee ea 299 ICS: — tee etc wcees cee 368 Reptiles, etc. ............ 209 Pi Shy ee ahs eA ed tes 50 In the following table are shown :— In column — [. animals in Gardens at beginning of year ; - EL 3 added during the year ; ‘ IIL. total of animals in Gardens ; ne IV. total of deaths ; iy V. percentage of deaths. I. Li. Tih TVs \.. Mammals) oo)... tes ©=6- O7D 279 954 299 oleic POSH ee ceneiciere neste essa, PLELO 801 1947 368 Loess PRC POMES oes tdsescyecucrntnce \ 2d 658 937 209 22:25 The large percentage of deaths among the mammals is to be accounted for by the high mortality among the macaques. The usual table giving the deaths from various diseases is not given, as no figures are available this year. The subject of Enteritis deserves special mention. The high rate of mortality from this disease is shown by the charts for 1919. These emphasize the importance of an attempt being made to deal with the disease. Enteritis is the name given to inflammation of the intestine. It begins as congestion and a consequent catarrh. The mucous membrane inside is pink, deepening to red, and the contents are liquid due to an excess of mucus and usually milky. The congestion deepens and hemorrhages occur, so that the whole gut becomes a deep red, and contents become blood-stained and eventually black from altered blood. The final stage shows sloughing of the mucous membrane lining the intestines, so that the walls are thin and the contents dark and thickened by the destroyed cells. It can be acute or chronic. The final stage of sloughing is usually seen in this acute type. Often owing to the weakened 86 DR, N. 8. LUCAS ON Chart No. I. 30 20 Other Causes. 10 Enteritic. Chart No. II. 20 10 Erteritic. Other Causes. Enterstic, Other Causes. 20 10 Other Causes. Enteritic ce) In these charts the deaths caused by enteritis are shown in a continuous line, those due to all other causes in an interrupted line. The birds are grouped according to the food eaten, though in the last group the chief point is that these birds live mostly in the open and their food is scattered on the ground and not placed in a receptacle. Enteritis is less prominent in this group, on the whole, and most prominent in Group II., where the food is of the sort which forms a good culture medium for bacteria and is almost always put into receptacles. DEATHS IN THE GARDENS IN 1919. 87 state of the bird bronchitis or pneumonia slips in and finishes the illness. The cause of the inflammation is irritation, and this may be either mechanical or toxic. The mechanical source would be foreign bodies in the intestine, e.g. grit. This appears a less likely cause. The toxic cause may be either bacterial in origin or brought about by poisons from unsuitable or decomposed food. Which of these causes is the true one or which the prepond- erating one is the subject of the investigation which has now to be made. MR. A. WILLEY ON AN APODOUS AMIA CALVA. 89 8. An Apodous Amia calva. By Artuur WILLEY, F.R.S., F.Z.8., McGill University, Montreal. f Received March 13, 1920: Read April 13, 1920.] It is known that a good many interrelated genera of fishes differ from each other by the presence in one and absence in the other of ventral fins. Perhaps the classic and primitive example of this contrasting condition is that of the Crossopterygian fishes, Polypterus and Calamoichthys, upon the theoretical interest of which Gegenbaur (1895) laid some stress. Calamoichthys is a Crossopterygian eel, the Mastacembelidee are Actinopterygian eels (Giinther), the Murenoids are Malacopterygian eels—all lacking ventral fins. The Nostrils. Contrary to the current belief, all the South American Monkeys are not, strictly speaking, Platyrhine. There is great variation in the shape and situation of the nostrils. Typically both in the CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 93 Hapalide and the Cebide the internarial septum is wide, greatly surpassing 1n width the longest diameter of either nostril, and the nostrils look outwards and slightly forwards, but so slightly in some cases as to be only just visible when the face is viewed from the front, as in Cebus, Ateles, Cacajao (Ouakaria), and Calle- cebus (text-figs. 1 & 2, A-C). But in two of the genera—dotus, Text-figure as - Nostrils of Cebus. E. Lagothrix. re Saimniris sciurea. . Side view of muzzle of Aotus. Half protile view of the same, enlarged. Nostrils of the same. Nostrils of Alouatta. . The same from above. I. Side view of muzzle of the same. x 4. ha Om as recorded by H. O. Forbes, and Alcwatta—the nostrils are less lateral, are visible to a great extent from the front, and are separated by a septum which hardly exceeds the long diameter 94 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL of either. According to H. O. Forbes’s account, the nostrils of Brachyteles seem to resemble those of Alowatta. (Text-fig. 2, D-I.) The nostrils also vary in shape in a very interesting manner. In Callicebus they are practically circular, and nearly so in Cacajao. In Cebus they are longitudinally ovate. In Ateles the upper edge has an §§’-like curve, the bantenon portion of the orifice being a narrow slit, owing to the presence of the down- wardly pr ojecting lobe which constr icts the nostril behind. This lobe is also present in Alowatia, but it is relatively larger in dotus than in any member of the Cebide. In that genus, indeed, the nostrils with their comparatively narrow septum and well- developed posterior lobe are of a more primitive type, and more reseinble the nostrils of the Strepsirhine Primates (Lemurs) than do those of any genus of the Haplorhine Primates, including even Tarsius. To sam up—the nostrils are typically platyrhine in Hapalide, Callimico, Callicebus, Saimiris, Cebus, Cacajao, Lagothrix, Ateles ; and stenorhine in dotus, Alowatta, and, it is alleged, in Brachy- teles. The Kars. In my paper on the genera of Hapalide, the ears of Hapale, Mystax*, Leontocebus, and Cidipomidas were described, and it was pointed out that Gdipomidas may be distinguished by the suppression of the free edge of the pinna from a point just below the level of the upper portion of the antitragal thickening. In the Cebidee the pinna of the ear generally resembles that of the Hapalide, showing variations in suppression apalogous to those of thatfamily. In the majority of cases (Aotus, Callicebus, Alowatta, Cacajao, Cebus, and Callimico) the pinna is provided with a freely projecting laminate margin. which terminates inferiorly just beneath the antitragal thickening as in all the Hapalidee except Wdipomidas. In the ear of Cebus, which will serve as well as another as typical of the group, the intertragal notch is bordered in front by a comparatively small tragus and behind by an enlarged, prominent antitragus, which has a well-developed ridge on its inner surface and is defined behind by a notch from the strong ridge of the antihelix, which curves upwards and forwards, dividing above into two rancher: less well-defined, passing forwards and upwards towards the upper edge of the pinna in front, the other, which runs horizontally forwards, constituting the well-defined and shelf-like supratragus (plica principalis). The anterior end of the supratragus 1s overlapped and concealed by the backwardly folded edge of the antero-superior portion of the pinna; but this backwardly folded edge is carried only a * The only example of Hapalide examined by me since that paper was written was a specimen of Mystax mystax. In this the ear resembles that of WZ. midas. die CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS, 95 distance below the supratragus, which is set high very short dis above the middle of the ear, there being a long space between the inferior termination of the backwardly folded edge and the Text-figure 3. SS Ma la »)y iq N S Mag Y WANN \ a. ait oan Rens AZ - ‘ ~ RES ss wi as: » CB Was BS 4 q Sohee® in 98 es 4. . Right foot of the same. X 3. . Right hand of Callicebus moloch, young. X 4. . Right foot of the same. Me CO > The hands and feet of Callimico need no detailed description, since they resemble in all important points those of Hapale or Mystax. (Text-fig. 4, A, B.) CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. Text-figure 5. ght hand of Cacajao rubicundus, from below. Right foot of the same. A. Ri Bb. C. Right hand of Aotus, from below. D. Right foot of the same. foo] 1 2 x 7* 100 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EX'TERNAL The hands and feet of the typical Cebide while exhibiting an interesting range in structural variation—e. g., in the develop- ment of the pads, the relative lengths and spacing of the digits as described below under the different genera—have certain features in common, which may be briefly referred to by way of introduction. The talons are always narrow and compressed and not infre- quently acuminate, but are never so strongly compressed, curved, and pointed at the tip as in the Hapalide and Callimico. As in the Hapalidee, the pollex, when present, is a short edition of the other fingers, and is never truly opposable to them even to the extent that it is in the Old World Monkeys, being set much closer than in the latter to the base of the second digit, although the space between them varies to a certain extent according to the genera. The hallux is typically well developed, although somewhat reduced in Ateles. It can be extended at right angles to the long axis of the foot, and it projects approximately from the middle of the side of the latter, nearly half-way, that is to say, between the second digit and the tip of the heel. The digits of both hands and feet, apart from exceptional cases, are free from webbing—that is to say, they are separated almost down to the plantar pad when viewed from the lower side. Digits 3 and 4 both on the hands and feet are frequently sub- equal; and since they are occasionally subequal in Lemurs and in the Catarhine Monkeys, there is in this respect a complete gradation between the Lemurs, in which digit 4 typically sur- passes 3, and the Catarhine Primates, in which digit 3 typically surpasses 4, The plantar and digital pads are as a rule not well defined, but in Aotus they are especially well developed, and they surpass the average in Saimiris. In Cebus the palm of the hand is tolerably long and digits 2, 3, 4, and 5 are subequally spaced ; digit 1 (the pollex) is com- paratively long, and a little further removed from digit 2 than the latter is from digit 3. The foot is much longer than the hand: (Text-fig. 6, A, B.) The hands and feet of Callicebus do not appear to differ materially from those of Cebus. (Text-fig. 4, E, F.) Saimiris has the pads better defined than in either of the preceding, and the palm of the hand is relatively broader. (Text-fig. 4, C, D.) In Aotws the hand is also relatively broader than in Cebus and Callicebus, and the pads are exceedingly well developed and coarsely striate. It seems probable that the exceptional develop- ment of the pads and sensory striz in this genus is an adaptation to the nocturnal habits of this Monkey, the specialised tactile sense compensating for imperfect nocturnal vision*. (Text-fig. 5, CG, D.) * W. Kidd (‘The Sense of Touch,’ pp. 34-38, 1907) has figured and described the hands and feet of Hapale, Saimiris, and Cebus trom the point of view of the sensory ridges. CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 101 In Cacajao the length of the hand as compared with the foot is about the same as in Cebus; but in the former genus the pollex is shorter and the interval between digits 2 and 3 isa Text-figure 6. NON NS Se 3 ee 7 4 a < ; . oe ; OR 4 + See 4 Le 4 Sd 4, tf Y eG, “1 iG “FD A. Right hand of Cebus, from below. B. Right foot of the same. C. Right hand of Lagothriax infumatus, from below. D. Right foot of the same, with abnormal basal webbing between digits 2 and 3, x 2 approx. little greater than between 3 and 4 or 4 and 5, thus foreshadow- ing the more marked inequality in spacing that obtains in Alowatta and Lagothrix. (Vext-fig. 5, A, B.) 102 MR. R. I. POCCCK ON THE EXTERNAL In Alouatia and Lagothrix the hand is relatively larger and its digits are longer as compared with the foot than in the genera previously mentioned, and the space in the hand between digits 2 and 3 is markedly greater than between digits 1 (pollex) and 2 or 3 and 4. The hands are thus in a sense zygodactylous, like Text-figure 7. SSN —- ~ A. Right hand of Alouatta villosa, young. B, Right foot of the same. C, Extremity of tail of Ateles ater. See the paws of Phascolarctos and of Cuscus amongst the Marsupials, there being a grasping interval between digits 2 and 3 instead of between digits 1 and 2 as in Lemurs and Catarhine Monkeys *. * From a photograph of a living Pitheeia pithecia I judge that there is a wide space between digits 2 and 3 in that genus also. CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 103 Both in Alouatta and Lagothri« the pollex is normally developed for the family, being perhaps a little shorter relatively than in Cebus but longer than in Cacajao. The hallux is also of normal length and strength*. (Text-fig. 6, C, D, and text-fig. 7, A, B.) In Ateles, as is well known, the hand differs from that of other genera of Cebide, except Brachyteles, in having the pollex func- tionless and at most forming a small excrescence on the side of the palm ; and it is noticeable that digits 2, 3, 4, and 5 are evenly spaced as in Cebus, Callicebus, etc., and that there is no grasping space between digits 2 and 3 as there is in Alouatéa and Lago- thrix. The hand of Aéeles is therefore not derivable from the type of hand seen in Lagothrix, but from the more primitive type of hand seen in Cebus for examplet. (Text-fig. 8, A, B.) Text-figure 8. A. Right hand of Ateles paniscus, from below. Bb. Right foot of the same. The foot of Ateles is characterised by the reduction in the size of the hallux, which is both shorter and weaker than in other genera, the big muscular lobe at the base, representing the ‘“‘ ball” of the human thumb, being scarcely visibly developed. * In a specimen of L. infumatus the second and third digits of the foot were anited basally by a short web. Possibly this was an abnormality, since no such variation occurred in an example of L. lagotricha. + The only genus of Monkeys which resembles Afeles [and Brachyteles| in the suppression of the pollex is the Catarhine Colobus. In the latter, however, the suppression of the pollex is clearly foreshadowed in Pithecus (= Preshytes = Semno- pithecus), where it is greatly reduced. 104 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL Setting aside Callimico, which in the structure of the hands and feet falls in with the Hapalide, the genera of Cebide, so far as known to me, may be arranged as follows by their extremities :— a. Pollex suppressed and functionless; hallux short, with basal muscular lobe scarcely developed .... Ateles [and probably Brachyteles |. a’. Pollex and hallux normally developed. 6. Feet relatively short as compared with the hands; a wide grasping space between digits 2 and 3 of the hand. Alouatta, Lagothrix. b’. Feet long as compared with the hands; digits 2 to 5 of the hand generally approximately evenly spaced, space between 2 and 3 a little wider in Cacajao. ec. Pads exceedingly well developed and coarsely striated ...... Aotus. ec’. Pads not noticeably strongly developed and comparatively weakly striated .................. Cebus, Callicebus, Saimiris, Caeajao. The hands and feet of Ateles show an interesting resemblance to those of the Orang Utan (Sima) amongst the Anthropoid Apes. In the latter the pollex and hallux are both small, the Ape depending mainly for its hold upon the clutch of digits 2 to 5, which form powerful suspensory hooks. The same applies to Ateles, which, like the Ape, is no jumper, but climbs by reaching from bough to bough, commonly in an inverted position, aided by its prehensile tail. Lagothri« and Alowatta with comparatively short feet and highly prehensile tails also climb by reaching instead of by jumping from branch to branch. The rest of the genera with relatively longer feet jump, so far as my experience goes, to a certain extent. The species of Cebus indeed, despite their pre- hensile tails, are tolerably good jumpers, but the only South American Monkeys which appear to rival in arboreal activity the more agile Catarhine Monkeys are the Marmozets, which can cover a surprising distance with a leap. The Tongue. As in Lemurs, and some other Mammals, the lower surface of the tongue in Platyrhine Monkeys is provided with a lamella—the Jrenal lamella—in close connection with the orifices of the sub- lingual salivary gland. In all cases observed this lamella ends distally in a pair of slender juxtaposed processes, and its free lateral margm runs backwards on each side towards the base of the tongue*. (Text-fig. 9.) I have not seen a sufficient number of specimens to establish generic differences in the structure of this frenal lamella. Its apparent narrowness in some vases and breadth in others may be due to contraction or expansion in accordance with the mode of preservation. The greatest variation was noticed in a common Marmozet (Hapale jacchus), in which the edge of the lamella was denticulated; and this condition was correlated with somewhat coarse beading of the edge of the tongue. In this particular * This lamella corresponds, I believe, to Wharton’s papillse of human anatomists, and not to the sublingua of the Lemurs. CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 105 specimen the lamella recalled in appearance the sublingua of the Lemurs. (Text-fig. 9, A, B.) [n\ Text-figure 9. i A. Lateral view of tongue of Hapale jacehus. B. Lower view of the same. C. Lateral view of tongue of Leontocebus rosalia. D. Lower view of tongue of the same. rp yp Alouatta. F. 93 i Cacajao. G: Saimiris, with frenal lamella turned aside. iH Tongue of Cebus, with the tip raised to show the relations of the frenal lamella, The Anal and Genital Areas of the Female. In the Marmozets Hapale jacchus, Cidipomidas cedipus, and Leontocebus rosalia the orifice of the vulva les between a pair of simple labia, and there is no visible external pendulous clitoris. The most noticeable difference between these species in the 106 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL | » Text-figure 10. External Generative Organs of female. A. Leontocebus rosalia, from behind. B. Hapale jacchus, from behind. C. The same, from the front. D. Aotus, from behind. i. Saimiris sciurea, from behind. F. Tip of clitoris of the same, from the front. G. Side view of clitoris of the same. a., anus; @., ischial prominence; cl., clitoris. CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 107 naked ano-genital area is the presence in /H/. jacchus of a number of whitish pustules round the anus, on the perineum and on the ischial prominences. These exude under pressure a sebaceous substance, which may be odoriferous. There is no trace of them either in Z. rosalia, in Mystax, or in EHdipomidas edipus. (Text- fig. 10, A-C.) In the Cebide the ano-genital area varies considerably accord- ing to the genus. In immature and unpaired females the urino- genital orifice is a longer or shorter slit, above which, but concealed from view by membrane (the hymen), lie the apertures of the urethra and of the vagina. (Text-fig. 11, B, D.) In nearly all cases-—-that is to say, in Callicebus, Saimiris, Aotus, Alouatta, and Cebus—the ischial prominences and the area between the anal and genital orifices and above the anus are naked or scantily hairy; but in Lagothriz the hair grows tolerably thickly and closely round the anus and genital area, covering the ischial prominences and perineum. In an adult, but unpaired, female Aotus the urino-genital orifice is a very short and narrow slit bounded by small labia, but there is no visible clitoris, the perineum and the area to the right and left of the labia being somewhat swollen. The condition observed resembles tolerably closely that of the Hapalide. (Text- f1.10), 1D.) In an adult Callicebus personatus (preserved in alcohol) the perineum is comparatively short and the generative area is piri- form, broad above, and narrowed below, the orifice being flanked by thickened labia inferiorly converging upon a small glans- shaped, grooved clitoris, which is hardly, if at all, pendulous. A young C. moloch resembles the last described, but the orifice is merely a narrow slit, the thickened labia being undeveloped. (Text-fig. 12, A, B.) In an immature Alowatia the rima is an elongated slit, wider above than below and flanked by swollen labia. The clitoris is short and subconical, with a slightly expanded apex. (Text- fig. 11, B.) In an adult female Lagothrix the elongated rima is flanked by a pair of much swollen labia, forming together an oval area nar- rower below, where it passes into a short subglobular, ungrooved clitoris, defined proximally by a constriction *. Lagothriw and Alowatta resemble one another tolerably closely in the structure of the female external genitalia. (Text-fig. 11, A.) In an adult but unpaired female Saimzris the clitoris is long, slender, pendulous, and grooved practically to the tip, which, although tapering and not incrassate, has a shield of thickened integument on its anterior surface. (Text-fig. 10, E-G.) In Cebus the clitoris is elongated, slender, and grooved, prac- tically to the apex as in Saimiris, but it is more penis-like, the * This specimen of Lagothrix had been injected for anatomical purposes, and possibly the genitalia were abnormally turgid, owing to the injected preservative. 108 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL tip being incrassate and enveloped in a definite preputial fold of integument. (‘Text-fig. 11, C, D.) Text-figure 11. See <7 . WM #entN f. WT, y, j ) “, WW Wp A ARM? p Nie@ C External Generative Organs of female. A. Lagothrizx. B. Alouatta. C. Cebus. D. Cebus. a., anus; 4., ischial prominence; cl., tip of clitoris; w., orifice of urethra; and v., orifice of vagina exposed by cutting away the hymen in D and shown diagrammatically with the hymen intact in B. X F CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 109 I have had no opportunity of examining the dead body of a female Ateles, but in living examples the clitoris attains a quite unusual size. It is pink in colour and subcylindrical in shape, and so greatly exceeds in size and prominence the penis of the male, that people unacquainted with the facts invariably confuse the sexes of this genus. This clitoris is apparently ungrooved, and its apex 1s truncated and not incrassate. The Anal and Genital Areas of the Male. In the Marmozet Hapale jacchus the naked circum-anal in- tegument, the ischial prominences, the scrotum, and the area above the scrotum are studded with white glandular pustules, like those of the female. The penis, which emerges from the centre of the naked area of pustular skin, the lower half of which is formed by the anterior surface of the scrotum, is subacuminate, ending distally in a subcylindrical prominence, which lies above and overhangs the transversely crescentic urino-genital orifice. (Text-fig. 13, A—D.) In Leontocebus rosalia the pustules, as in the female, are absent; and the penis differs from that of H. jacchus in ending in a definite hemispherical glans, carrying on the lower half of its distal surface the transversely crescentic urino-genital orifice. (Text-fig. 13, E, F.) In Mystax ursulus the subcaudal integument is without glan- dular pustules, and the penis ends in a small hemispherical glans, which is described in my notes as bilabiate. That epithet might also be applied to the glans of Leontocebus; but whereas in the latter the labia are apparently dorsal and ventral, in Mystax they appear to be lateral and to close over the small subcentral orifice of the urethra. Fresh material, however, is required to substantiate these apparent differences in the glans in the genera of Hapalide. In the Cebide the penis differs to a greater or less extent in the genera examined. In Saimiris it terminates in a somewhat cordate glans with longitudinally elongated orifice on its under- side (text-fig. 138, G, H). In Callicebus personatus the generative area of the male closely resembles that of the female, the scrotum recalling the labia of the generative orifice and the penis re- sembling an enlarged clitoris. The penis, which is short, ends in an ovate glans, with an elongated orifice on its inferior or pos- terior side as in Savmiris (text-fig. 12, C-F). In Callimico (text- fig. 12, G), the penis has a hemispherical glans with terminal orifice. In Ateles the penis is subcylindrical from the base to the tip, which is a little expanded, Its distal extremity is a nearly flat, subcircular area, the orifice piercing the middle of its lower half (text-fig. 13, K-M). In an immature example of Lagothrix infu- matus the penis apparently differs from that of dAéeles in having the orifice in the middle of the terminal field. In neither of 110 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL Text-figure 12. yin EN ~ External Generative Organs. A. Callicebus personatus, 9 ad., from behind. B. 'The same, from the side. C. Callicebus personatus, g ad., from behind. D. The same, from the side. E. Tip of penis of the same, from the front. F. The same, from behind. G. Callimico goeldii, 8 ; penis and scrotum from behind. a., anus; 7., ischial prominence; cl., clitoris ; /., labium of vulva; p., penis s., scrotum. | pars CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. eel Text-figure 13. . - ‘ee Ip i; F External Generative Organs of males. Rear end, with tail raised, of Hapale jacchus. Tip of penis of the same. Naked area round penis of the same. . Side view of extended penis of the same. . Tip of penis of Leontocebus rosalia. . Side view of extended penis of the same. Lower view of extended penis of Saimiris. . Side view of same with bristle passed through urethra. Lower view of scrotum and extended penis of Cebus. . Side view of extended penis of Ateles. Side view of tip of penis of Ateles (another specimen). . Tip of the same. . Tip of penis of Cebus. ZS RunOreoOn> a., anus; 7., ischial prominence ; s., scrotum ; 9., orifice of penis. 112 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL these genera is the organ provided with a baculum (os penis). In Cebus, however, the terminal portion of the penis is strengthened with a baculum as in the Catarhine Monkeys, and the tip of the baculum forms a small prominence in the middle of the subcir- cular terminal area of the penis, thrusting the orifice to the right of the middle line. For the rest the penis of Cebus differs from that of Ateles in the gradual expansion of its distal portion up to the truncated tip. (Text-fig. 13, J, N.) The Tail. I have no new facts to add to those already recorded about the tails of South American Monkeys. In the four genera of Hapalide (Hapale, Mystax, Gidipomidas, and Leontocebus) and in six of the genera of Cebide (Callimico, Callicebus, Sainviris, Pithecia, Cacajao, and Aotus) the tail is evenly bushy or hairy throughout and not prehensile. Only in Cebide of the genera Cebus, Lagothrix, Brachyteles, Ateles, and Alowatta is it prehensile. Since, therefore, the tail is prehensile in only fifty per cent. of the genera of South American Monkeys and in a minority even of the Cebidee, the prevalent idea, derived from the text-books, that caudal prehensility is characteristic of Platyrhine Primates is indefensible. In nearly all the species of Cebus the tail, although prehensile, is evenly hairy to the tip above and below. Only in the Central American form (C. capucinus) is the end naked below. In this genus practically the only modification of the tail is the develop- ment of the flexor muscles at the expense of the extensors, so that the organ is normally curled in its distal half. So far, there- fore, as the tail is concerned, Cebus bridges the interval between such genera as Saimiris or Aotus, for example, and the genera Lagothrix, Brachyteles, Ateles, and Alowatta, in which the prehen- sile power and tactile sensibility of the tail reach a maximum. In the latter genera the distal portion of the tail is highly mobile and sensitive, with the skin of its lower side naked and trans- versely ridged, like the underside of an Elephant’s trunk (text- fig. 7,C). It serves, indeed, the purpose of an additional hand not only for climbing, but for grasping objects beyond the reach of the arms*. Iam unable to satisfy myself, however, that this special modification of the tail is proof or even strong evidence of aftinity between the genera that exhibit it. z i b i et « r ‘ Py F F ( f inte \ 4 , rey” nie : as 4 Peis ey, ek eI & \ he : on s - * 19 t ‘ Van a. na al : , , ‘ ' ¥ 5 vee 4 cr j ' \ t Bie > Pie. seme : i . ‘ xt ua ah ete? Lone ite / eS - { nf t F « ‘ . 7 ;; 4 ; ii 1 ea ba ary J ; { ‘ 1 k ; 5 , : 1 | id 1 Ty ' ¢ : { \ : a : ; : i x * r ay . f : 2 ; i ‘ , r oe : ni . ty : 3 ¥ { | VW pitas : \" ; a at s ed 4 EXTERNAL CHARACTERS OF THE RATEL AND WOLVERENE. 179 14. On the External Characters of the Ratel (A/ellivora) and the Wolverene (G'ulo) *. By R.I. Pococr, I’.R.8., F.Z.S. "Received April 13, 1920: Read April 13, 1920.} (Text-figures 14-18.) ConTENTS. Page Tit OCMREM ROTM ha, }lece susie had tno didiaaxeuweneceaitee Boe UTD External form Riise oa tin deviate ootecaie eee Mbe EA GaAWe hee diacsaae casledan athe civn ia eseoen meee ae OL: The Feet .. Beker ee ie No)” The Anus and the External Genitalia. Pe tes 184: Conclusion .. : Yee oes de pera CLO Introduction. Writing on Mellivora in 1902 (Zool. of Egypt, Mammalia, p. 245), de Winton remarked :—‘“‘ A glance at the generic names mentioned in the synonymy of the African species will show that great uncertainty has existed as to the true relationship of the animal. Even in the latest text-books it has been placed among the badgers, while in truth it is nothing but a giant weasel modified for digging and quite closely related to Jctonyx. Without admitting the truth of the last proposition, it is unquestionably the case that the majority of authors, judging from the structure of the feet and the general form of the body, followed Gray in classifying Mellivora in the group, family, or subfamily, as the case may be, typified by deles. De Winton, on the contrary, rejecting the external characters and relying upon the teeth and skull, piacedit in the subfamily Musteline, which comprised the following genera :—ZJephitis, Conepatus, Galera, Galictis, Mellivora, Ictonyx, Mustela (now Martes), Putorius (now Mustela), Peecilogale, Lyncodon, and Gulot. It would have been very difficult to define the Musteline, as thus constituted, and de Winton, perhaps wisely, made no attempt to doso. That question does not concern me now. The point to which attention may be drawn is the placing of J/ellivora in the same group as Gulo. Although no authors appear to be very clear about the precise position of Gulo, its kinship with J/ustela and Martes has been generally admitted. The latest opinion on the subject is that of Mr. G. 8. Miller, who proposed to make it the type of a distinct subfamily, Gulonine, equivalent to the Musteline, Meline, and Lutrine, these four subfamilies comprising the genera of Mustelide of Western Europe (Cat. Mamm. Western Europe, pp. 341 and 432, 1912). * The facts recorded were based upon the examination of fresh material in the Society’s Prosectorium. + Weber (Die Saug. p. 537, 1904) followed de Winton in classifying Mellivora and Gulo in the Mustetine. I2* 180 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERS Text-figure 14, _ Ye - 4 “4 S —— ; AN ULLLYS, Ye LATE ms Ce ( Z Rf] pig *-247 \ GM eae lon gene eg /, \ ~“ / ie Be Ce We A 2S TG Yy EZ, \ AA aN NG (YESS tes \ | oe eS ME Tn WAS My, “ emENC wd NA A. Side view of head of G'udo. B. Front view of rhinarium of the same. C. Piece of the pinna of the same, showing the bursa, with its anterior lamina (a) turned forwards and its posterior lamina (2) turned back- wards. TD. Side view of head of Mellivora. E. Front view of rhinarium of the same, All figures, except,C, tole e OF THE RATEL AND THE WOLVERENE. 181 The claim of Gulo to rank as a subfamily may be set aside for the present, but it appears to me that Millers guess at the affinities of the genus with Jellivora, expressed in the following passage, is very wide of the mark. He wrote (op. ett. p. 433) :— “The subfamily Gulonine, consisting of the genus Gulo alone, is well characterised by its peculiarities of skull, teeth, and external form. Though usually regarded as a near relative of the Musteline, the genus more probably finds its true affinities in the African genus Mellivora.” This means that in Miller’s ‘opinion Gulo is more nearly allied to Jfellivora than it is to Mustela or Martes. The main purpose of this paper is to refute that idea. External form. Apart from being heavily and powerfully built and provided with comparatively short tails, the two genera are quite unlike in shape. Jellivora essentially resembles JMeles or Taxidea, being low on‘ the legs, plantigrade, broad across the back and flat along the spine, the body being rather depressed than com- pressed. The form is that of a terrestrial fossorial beast, without power to leap and with running capacity reduced almost to the Carnivore minimum. The hair is everywhere short, sleek, and coarse. Gulo stands comparatively high on the legs, is digitigrade, comparatively narrow across the back, and arched along the spine, the body being compressed rather than depressed. The form is that of a terrestrial and arboreal beast, capable of running at some speed and of leaping to a moderate extent. The hair is everywhere, except on the face, soft, furry, and mixed with wool. The Head. The top of the head in Mellivora is high and arched ; in Gulo it is low and flat. (Text-fig. 14, A, D.) The tufts of facial vibrisse are alike in the two genera in the sense that they are the same in number and _ position as in typical predatory Carnivores like the Canide, Viverride, Mungotide, and most Mustelide. (Text-fig. 14, A, D.) The riinarium of Mellivora recalls that of MJeles in having a well-defined area encircling the nostrils below and _ laterally, although this area is considerably shallower than in that genus. Also it is not continued inferiorly as a philtrwm dividing the upper lip. In G'ulo the rhinarium is hke that of Canis, being continued inferiorly as a distinct philtrum dividing the upper lip, and the nostrils are encircled laterally by an area of naked moist skin continuous with the philtrum in front. (Text-fig. 14, B, E.) The external ear in Mellivora has been described as absent The truth is that there is no definite laminate pinna standing away from the head, the cavities of the ear being merely 182 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERS surrounded above and behind by a thickening of the integument. The supratragus (plica principalis) is a simple oblique ridge, the tragus, antitragus, and other inferior ridges are hardly apparent and there is no trace of the bursa (text-fig. 14, D). In Gulo the ear is quite normally developed, the pinna standing away from the head as a mobile lamina. The cavity of the ear is larger than in Mellivora, the supratragus is a larger ridge with a semiglobular thickening, the tragus and antitragus and the normal ridges in- ternal to them are well defined, and the bursa is well developed, its posterior wall consisting of a semioval lamina arising behind the margin of the pinna (text-fig. 14, A, C). The Feet. The fore foot of Mellivora is provided with long, powerful, blunt fossorial claws The digits are short and unevenly spaced, Text-figure 15. A. Lower side of right hind foot of Mellivora. B. Lower side of right fore foot of the same. Xs; = the distance between 1 and 2 being considerably greater than the distances between the others. Digits 2, 3, and 4 are rather tightly tied together by webbing, which extends more than half- way along the digital pads. Digit 5 has more freedom of movement. The plantar pad isa large, irregularly semicircular mass, with its four elements ill defined. It is followed by two carpal pads separated from it by a deep groove. The external carpal pad is a large mass; the internal is much smaller and OF THE RATEL AND THE WOLVERENE 183 differs in its smoothness from the rest of the pads, which are coriaceous. The whole of the under side of the foot back to and including the carpal pads is hairless. (Text-fig. 15, B.) 2 aS : =e y — | —— (Ouakaria), 98, 94, 96, 97, 108, Anabantide, 71. | 104, 112, Lis: Anabas scandens, 71. Calamoichthys, 89. Anelytropide, 160. | Callicebus, 93, 94, 96, 97, 100, 104, 106, Anguilliformes, 71. WIPE lee Aotus, 93, 94, 96, 100, 104, 106, 112, 6 -—- (Callithrix) moloch, 92. 1138. —~—— personatus, 107, 109. —— (Nyctipithecus) trivirgatus, 92. Callichrous macrophthalimus, 67, 70. Proc. Zoot. Soc.— 1920. C XIV Callichrous pabda, 67, 70. Callimico, 94, 96, 97, 98, 100, 104, 109, | 1a ey, goeldit, 92. Capromys pilorides, 193. Carangide, 72. Caranx atropus, 72. gallus, 72. Catarrhactes chrysolophus 192. Catla buchanani, 65, 67, 70. Cebus, 93, 94, 96, 97, 100, 103, 104, 106, 107, 112, 113. -—— albifrons, 92. apella, 92. Cephalophus spadix, 194, Chetodontide, 72. Chalcides, 77. ——- bedriage, 78. hottegi, T7, 80, 88. delislii, 80. -—— guentheri, 80. lineatus, 80. —— linose, 79, 80, 82. —— mauritanicus, 80. (z. 5, L.), —— occidentalis, 80. ocellatus, 77. —— polilepis, 80. ragazzit, 80, 82. sepoides, 80. —— simonyi, 78. —— tiligugu, 80, 82. — tridactylus, 80. — viridanus, 78. vittatus, 80, 82. Chaneleon biteniatus, 1638. ——- dilepis, 160. isabellinus, 168. gracilis, 160. ——- hehnelii, 163. jacksoni vauerescece, 163. melleri, 166. Chameleontide, 160, Channa orientalis, 90. Chasmorhynchus nudicollis, 191. Chatoessus chacunda, 71. manminna, 67, 71. Chelys fimbriata, 190, Chirocentride, 70. INDEX. Chirocentrus dorab, 70. Cinnyris mariquensis (z. 8. L.), 189. Cirrhina mrigala, 70. reba, 70. Clarias magur, 70. Clupea alosa, 61. chapra, 71. —— ilisha, 67. sindensis, 67. Clupeide, 71. Clupei formes, 70. Conepatus, 179, 184. Coronella amahilis, 189. zonata, 189, Cricetulus migratorius (z, 8. L.), 189. Cuscus, 102. Cynoglossus quinquelineatus, 72. Cyprinide, 70. Cypriniformes, V0. Dipsosaurus dorsalis, 189. Echeneis naucrates, 72. Kcheneidide, 72. EKlasmodactylus triedrus, 140. Engraulis malabaricus, 71. -——§ telara, 67, 70. Ephippus orbis, 72. Equus prjevalskit, 189. Eremias spellii, 148. Esociformes, 71. Eurypyga helias, 190. Eutroptichthys vacha, 67, 70. Felis caracal, 189. leo, 189, 193. —— tigris, 189. Feylinia currori, 160. Galeopithecus, 116. Galera, 179. Galictis, 179. Gastropholis vittata, 147. Gazella subgutturesa, 191. INDEX. Gazza equuleformis, 72. Geckonide, 132. Gerres filamentosus, 72. Gerride, 72. Gerrhosauride, 149. Gerrhosaurus flavigularis, 150. | major, 149. nigrolineatus, 150. Gobiide, 72. Gobioides tenius, 72. Grisonia, 184. Gulo, 179, 181, 182, 184, 186, 187, 193. Hapale jacchus, 91, 97, 98, 104, 108, 106, 109, 112. Hemidactgqlus brookii, 154. citernii, 132. —— mabouia, 138. —- ruspolii, 134, squanulatus, 134. Histiophorus, 89. Holacanthus xanthurus, 72. HHolaspis guentheri, 149. Hystrichopsylla talpe, 191. Ichnotropis capensis, 148. Ictonyx, 179, 184, 187. Julis lunaris, 72. Labeo ceruleus, 70. calbasu, 70. diplostomus, 67, 70. rohita, 65, 70. Labium approximatum, sp. n., wih. —— associatum, sp. n., 20. bicoler, 24. —— bivittatum, sp. n., 8. —— brevicorne, sp. n., 6. — centrale, sp. n., 6. clavicorne, 19. Serrugineum, 19. -~— fulvicorne, sp. n., 22. —— hobartense, sp. n., 20. xv Labium longicorne, sp. n., 23. —-— montivagum, sp. n., 16. eae multiarticulatum, sp.r., 23. —— occidentale, sp. n., 16. petitorius Hrichs., 7. subsp. concolor, subsp. n., 8. ——- pilosum, sp. n., 10. ——- sculpturatum,, sp. n., li. —— spiniferum, sp. n., 12. —— subequale, sp. n. 15. —— subpilosulum, sp. n., 11. —— vasseanum, sp. n., 13. —— walkeri, sp. n., 4. , Key to the Species of, 3. Labride, 72. Lacerta vauereselli, 147. Lacertide, \47. Lagothrix, 94, 96, 97, 101, 102, 108, 104, 106, 107, 112, 118. infumatus, 92, 109. -— lagotricha (=humboldti), 92. Laniatores, 36. Latastia johnstoni, 148. longicaudata, 147. Lates calcarifer, 72. Leontocebus rosalia, 91, 105, 106, 109, 112; Lethrinus miniatus, 71. Lophophorus tmpeyanus, 194, Lutra maculicollis (z. s. u.), 189. Lygodactylus capensis (Smith), subsp. n., 1305. jischeri scheffleri, 136. —— grotei, 136. picturatus, 136. Lygosoma ferrandii, 157. sundevallti, 155. Lyneodon, 179. ’ Mabuia brevicoliis, 152. maculilabris, 152. megalura, 152. quinguetentata, 158. striata, 153. varia, 153. Macacus fascicularis, 27. rhesus, 190 192. xvl Macrones aor, 67, 70. ~— cavasius, 70. seenghala, 67, 70. Macropus bennetti, 191. Mamunalia, tongues of, 1168. Martes, 179, 181, 187. Mastacembelide, 72. Mastacembelus armatus, 72. Meles, 179, 181. Mellivora, 179, 181, 182, 184, 185, 187, 193: Mephitis, 179, 184. Monopeltis colobura, 149. Monoxyomma heudei, sp. n., 44. spinatum, 44. —— trailli, sp.n., 45. tuberculatum, sp. n., 44. Mugil corsula, 71. Mugilide, 71. Mugiliformes, 71. Murena macrura, 71. punctata, 71. —— sathete, 71. tessellata, 71. Murenide, 71. Mustela, 179, 181, 187. putorius, 184. Mydaus, 184. Myocastor coypus, 192. Myripristis murdjan, 71. Mystax midas, 91. —- mystax, 91, 96, 97, 98, 106, 109, 112. —— ursulus, 91, 109. Netopteride, 70, Notopterus chitala, 67, 70. kapirat, 70. Nucras emini, 147. Nuncia enderbei, 42. smithi, sp. n., 42. — sperata, 41. —— sublevis, 41. — valdiviensis, 41. (Hdiponidas, 96. - edipus, 91, 94, 105, 106, 112. Oligonychus quercinus, 59, ulini, d8. INDEX. Oligonychus simplex, 60. ——- wnunguis, 59. Ophichthys boro, 71. Ophiocephalide, 71. Ophiocephalus marulius, 71. —— punctatus, 71. striatus, 71, 90. Otolithus ruber, 72, Palpatores, 32. Panda, Abnormalities of the Abdominal Arteries of a young, 175. Pangasius buchanani, 70. Pantopsalis, 32. — coronata, 33. —— grayi, sp. n., 35. —— halli, sp. n., 34. Jenningst, 33. isteri, 33. -— nigripalpis, 33, —— pococki, sp. n., 34. tasmanica, 33. -—— trippt, 33. —— wattsi, sp. n., 33. Pellona brachysoma, 71. elongata, 71, Percide, 72. Phatangiide, 32. Phascolaretos, 102. Phelsuma laticauda, 139. Pithecta;, O12907, V2 ier Platycephahde, 72. Platycephalus scaber, 72. Platypholis fasciata, 139. Pleuronectide, 72. Plotosus arab, 70. Poecilocryptus nigripectus, sp. n., 24. nigromaculatus, 26. Pecilogale, 179. Polynemide, 71. Polynemus plebeius, 71. Polypterus, 89. Procavia capensis, 189. Psettodes erumet, 72. Pseudeutropius garua, 61, 62, 63, 67, 68, 70. Putorius, 179. INDEX. Raccoon, Abnormal features in the Peritoneum of a, 169. Report on the Deaths in the Gardens im 1919;-85. Rhampholeon brevicaudatus, 166. kerstenti, 167. Rhyssa persuasoria, 19+. Rita buchanani, 67, 70. Saccobranchus fossitis, 70. Saimiris, 94, 96, 97, 100, 104, 106, 107, 112, 1128. (Chrysothrix) sciureus, 92. Pye) Scatophagus argus, 72. Scelotes eggeli, 159. Sciena maculata, 72. Scienide, 72. Scienotdes pama, 72. Scincide, 152. Scolecoseps boulengeri, sp. n., foe: Scombresocide, 71. Scombride, 72. Serranide, 71. Serranus angularis, 71. Sillaginide, 72. Sillago sihama, 72. Siulundia gangetica, 67, 68, 70. Siluride, 70. Szmia, 10-4. Sorensenella hicornis, 438. — prehensor, 438. Sparide, 71. Stromateide, 71. Stromateus sinensis, 71. Symbranchiformes, 71. Synagris tolu, 72. Tanqua tiara, 145, Taurotragus oryx, 1938. Taxidea, 181. Testudo loveridgii (z. s. L), 190, 191. XViL Tetranychus carpini, sp. n., 56. ——— Chatepel, sp. nol. —— populi, 52. -—_— schizopus, 50, —— talisiz, 8p.n., 54. == PCLGT US. OO), tiliarium, 97. -——, Key to the species (males), 49. Therapon jarbua, 71. Thynnus pelamys, 72. Trachynotus insidiator, 72. Triacanthide, 72. Triacanthus brevirostris, Triznobunus acuminatus, sp. n., 36. Trienonyx aspera, 39, —— cocKkayni, sp. n., 39. —— certacea, 89. rs da. -—— rapax, 39. —— stewartius, 39. testaceus, 39. —— variegata, sp. n., 40. Trichiuride, 72. Trichiurus savala, 72. Umbrina russellti, 72. Ursus americanus, 191. arctos, 191. Varanida, 143. Varanus albigularis, 148, 192. —— niloticus, 144, Vormela, 187. Wallago attu, 67, 70. Xiphias, 89. Zonuride, 143. Zonurus derbianus, 192. --— troptdosternuim, 143. PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANUIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET, PROCKEDINGS OF THE GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCLETY aS OUND OEN. 1920, pp. 195-656, witH 14 Puares AND 143 Tex'-FIGURES. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, SOLD AT ITS HOUSE IN REGENT’S PARK. LONDON: MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO, PATERNOSTER ROW, Lis £ OF THE COUNCIL AND OFFUCIG. OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, DOZ0: Patron. His Masssty Tur Kina. COUNCIL. His Grace Tae Duke or Beprorp, K.G., F.R.S., President. Tim Hon. Cecrt Barine, M.A. ALFRED H. Cocks, Esq., M.A. Lr.-Cot. S. Monckton Cops- MAN, M.D., F.R.S. CHARLES Drummonp, KEsqQ., Treasurer. Huan 8. Guapstrone, Esq, M.A., F.R.S.E. Sir Srpney F. Harmer, K.B.E., M.A., DiSe:, E.tas8 Wee- President. Pror. James P. Hin, D.S8Sc., E.R.S., Vice-President. WiiitiAM Huntsman, Ksq. Pror. Ernest W. MacBribe, DSe., LL.D) FR. S0 6Y¥ ice- President. Cou. Sir Henry McManon, G.O.MLG., KC aR: K. G. B. Mrape-Watpo, Ksq., Vice-President. P. CuaumMers’ MircHen, Esq., C.B.E.,’ MOA., Ses 2. FLR.S., Secretary. Tue Karu or Onstow, O.B.E. Masor Arperr Pam. Aprian D, W. Pourock, Esa. His Grack Tae DvuKe or YUTLAND, K.G. THe Marquis oF Siico, F.S8.A.,, Vice-President. Masor RicHarp 8. TAYtor. A. Trevor-Bartye, Esq., M.A. AntHony H. WINGFIELD, Esq., Vice-President. PRINCIPAL OFFICERS. P. Cuatmers Mircuet., C.B.., M.A., D.Sc., LL.D., F.B.S., Secretary. R. I. Pococx, F.R.S., F.L8., Curator of Mammals and Resident Superintendent of the Gardens. D, Seru-Surrn, Curator of Birds and Inspector of Works. Epwarp G. BouLencer, Curator of Reptiles. Miss L, E. Currsman, F.E.S., Curator of Insects. Prof. R. 'T. Lerern, D.Se., M.D., Director of Prosectoriwm. Dr. C. F. Sonntag, Ch.B., Anatomist. Dr. N. 8. Lucas, M.B., Ch.B., Pathologist. Dr. G. M. Vuvers, M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., Hon. Parasitologist. F, Martin Duncan, F.R.M.S., Librarian. F. W. Bonn, Accountant. W. H: Coz, Chief Clerk, LIST OF CONTENTS. 1920, pp. 195--656. EXHIBITIONS AND NOTICES. The Secrerary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of April, 1920............ Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a mounted specimen of a pale variety of the White-bearded Gnu (Connocheetes albojubaius) ...... Miss Joan B. Procter, F.Z.S, Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a living specimen of the tailed Batrachian DPCERNCS J UWSCUS DOGADAPLC, 60. 6.c ci. cee -+ 044 vo opesen nnd anes Prof. J. E. DurerpDEN, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of lantern-slides illustrating the sexual display and nesting habits of the Ostrich ............... Prof. R. T. Lererr, D.Sc., M.D., F.Z.8. Exhibition of lantern-slides illustrating the experimental trans- mission or some Helminth infections.......<.....csdc.<; Dr. P. Cuatmers Mitrcue tz, C.B.E., M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.RS. An Account, illustrated with lantern-slides, of his recent Aeroplane Trip from Cairo to Tabora... The Szrcrerary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of May, 1920............ Prof. J. EK. Dusrpen, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks tole a Series Oly OSLTICN CSOS.i:. 222s u. ai feamens veers eos Dr. R. J. Tittyarp, M.A., F.L.S. An account of the Life- mMISCOMY Olt NOmDNARONN Ys aysac aks BAjie vee) cenctey< ovhekes ot The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of June, July, August, AMC SODvOUUIS MLO AY) ery fen) wean eesssimnrse cee xe oa = Page 437 438 438 438 1v Dr. P. Cuatmers Mrrcuenr, C.B.E., M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a Double- tailed nzard... 02s. eccis ae eee Mr. R. I. Pococn, F.RS., F.2.5. Uxhibition, of, “and remarks upon, the skin of the groin of an example of Tragelaphus bumtone. cis ccc hse coe coer ee Mr. E. G. Bouuencer, F.Z.S8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon,’ living specimens’of WVecturus \...... sje eee Mr. T. A. Barns, F.Z.8. An~-Account of his recent Hixpedition through the Forests of Africa in search of Gorillavand’ Okapr (205i. 5:56 suse see eee The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s « Menagerie during the month of October, 1920 ...... Mr. J. T. Cunninauam, M.A., F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of the Leech TYvrocheta, recently found in the Society’s Gardens.......:.......... Mr. F. Marriry Duncan, F.R.M.S., F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of Cinematograph Films of Animals inthe Society's Gardens.......:..0)5ee 656 656 656 16. Lie 18. 1; Lo i) PAPERS. . The Life-History and Habits of two Parasites of Blow- flies. By A. M. Aurson. With an Introduction by Prof. H. Maxwett Lerroy, ¥.Z.8. (Text-figures BS ZOE et ects. ha enanse er ee rene ee A Revision of the Nematode Family Gnathostomidae. By H. A. Bayuis, M.A. Oxon., Assistant in the Department of Zoology, British Museum (Natural History), and Ciayron Lane, M.D.Lond., Lt.-Col. I.M.S. (vet.). (Text-figures 1-40; Plates I.-VITT.).. Contributions to a Study of the Dragon-fly Fauna of Borneo.—Part IV. A List of Speeies known to occur in the Island. By F. F. Larpiaw, M.A. (Camtab:), F.Z0... (Dext-figures 1=4.) ...2....c.000004. On some new Therocephalian Reptiles from the Karroo Beds of South Africa. By R. Broom, M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., C.M.Z.8. (Text-figures 1-9.) 0.0... Chalicotheroidea from Baluchistan. By C. ForstEr- Cooper, M.A., F.Z.S., Superintendent of the University Museum of Zoology, Cambridge. (Plate Aiea Wot OUn es Lai.) cisseseeswragte ts adauesa. vodarcse sd . Fauna of Western Australia.—II]. Further Contri- butions to the Study of the Onychophora. The Anatomy and Systematic Position of West Australian Peripatoides, with an account of certain histological details of general importance in the study of Peri- patus. By Wma. J. Danin, D.Sc, F.Z.8., F.LS., Professor of Biology, University of Western Australia. Meee Te ee AN Nisan Saeki tee ohh « 5j,8 sas asd aes sate eae . Notes on Marine Wood-boring Aninals.—I.. The Ship- worms (Teredinidae), By W. T. Cauman, D.Sc. (HOURS UN) tacit etipl on ocd Sur tal one peat rae ates otis! - Report on Entozoa collected from Animals which died in the Zoological Gardens of London during eight months of 1919-20. By G. M. Vevers, M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., F.Z.S., Beit Memorial Research Fellow, Demonstrator in Helminthology at London School of ‘Tropical Medicine, and Hon. Parasitologist to the Zoological Society of London... .......5 .cccesecsss sees: Page bo Te Or dll 343 oot 367 39] i) (Sx aye) 30. dl. V1 . Ona Collection of Tailless Batrachians from East Africa made by Mr. A. Loveridge in the years 1914-1919. By Miss Joan B. Procter, F.Z.8. (‘Text-figures 1-4.) . On the Type-specimen of Runa holsti Boulenger. By Miss Joan B. Procrer, F.Z.8. (Text-figure 5.) ...... - On the External and Cranial Characters of the European Badger (J/eles) and of the American Badger ( Taxidea). By R. I. Pocock, F.R.8. (Text-figures 19-25.) ...... . Onsome Results of Ligaturing the Anterior Abdominal Vein in the Indian Toad (ufo stomaticus Liitken). By: W. N.. F. Woopnasp, D.Sc.(Lond:),: B.Ziss Indian Educational Service, Senior Professor of Zoology Muir Central College, Allahabad, U.P., India. (Text-fisure 1.) og e.s. 7 aoe ae ee . Some Observations on the Structure and Life- History of the Common Nematode of the Dogfish (Seylliwm canicula). By J. H. Luoyp, M.8c., F.Z.8., Assistant Lecturer and Demonstrator in Zoology at University College, Cardiff? \(Vext-figures 1--3,)\".0..2 nen eee . On the Sexual Phase in certain Indian Naicidee (Oligo- cheta). By Haru Ram Menura, M.S8c., Professor of Zoology, Hindu University, Benares. (‘Text- figures 1--3.) Observations on the Flight of Flying-Fishes. By EH. H. Hankin, M.A., Sc.D., Agra, India. (Text-figures ae es Lire eR ee HET ; Observations on the Life-History, Biology, and Genetics of the Lady-bird Beetle, Adalia bipunctata Mulsant. By Onéra A. Merrirr Hawkes, M.Sc.(Birm.), B.Sc. oc © arn Penner sant Hr Manne ncmAtne Snare tnn A he Filarud Worms from Mainmals and Birds in the Society’s Gardens, 1914-1915. By C. L. BouLencsr, M.A., D.Se., F.Z.8., Professor of Zoology, University of the Punjab, Lahore. (Text-figures 1-12.) ......... . The Fauna of the African Lakes; a Study in Com- parative Limnology with special reference to Tangan- yika. By Wm. A. Cunnineton, M.A., Ph.D., F.Z.8. (Text-ipuires: 1-2.) + . uel RU e biel aa Winey, A., MA. D Sci hs. 7s: Remarks on the Respiratory Movements of Wecturus and: Cryptobramehus, ae y aN ebay eae ae beeen ae eee Woopiann, W.N. F., D.Se.(Lond.), F.Z.8., Indian Eduea- tional Service, Senior Professor of Zoology, Muir Central College, Allahabad, U.P., India. On some Results of Ligaturing the Anterior Abdominal Vein in the Indian Toad (Bufo stomaticus Liitken). (Text-figure, 1s) <0 lsjecneny seep ns atu aa tee Page Al] 649 INDEX Acanthocheilonema diacantha, Pies. 3,4, | pp. 495, 496. -——— gracile, Figs. 5, 6, 7, pp. 497, 498- African Lakes, able to illustrate rich- ness of Fauna, Fig. 2, p. 594 Alopecopsis atavus, Figs. 4, 6, pp. 347, 349, 3950. Alysia manducator, Wigs. 1-12, pp. 199, | 201-203, 205, 206, 208, 209, 212. Arthroleptis stenodactylus, Fig. 1, p. 414. | Branchiodrilus hortensis, Figs. 1, 38, | pp. 459, 468. Bufo stomaticus, Fig. 1, p. 445. Chalicotheroidca, Figs. 5-7, pp. 864, 365. Copera atomaria, Fig. 4, p. 334. Curve showing growth of knowledge of | Tanganyika fauna, Fig. 1, p. 593. Diplotriena diuce, Figs. 9, 10, pp. 501, | 502. —— flabellata, Fig. 11, p. 503. ——- tricuspis, Fig. 8, p. 500. Echinocephalus multidentatus, Pls. VI.- VIIL, p. 245; Figs. 33-36, pp. 286, | 287, 290. ' southwelli, Pls. IV.-V., p. 245; Figs. 80-32, pp. 282-284. spinosissimus, Pl. IV., p. 245: Figs. 25-29, pp. 279--281. uneinatus, ig. 24, p. 276. Proc, Zoou. Soc.— 1920. OF ILLUSTRATIONS, Filaria aramidis, Big. 12, p. 504. subcutanea, Figs. 1, 2, pp. 492, 493. | Flying-fish, Flight of, Figs. 1, 2, pp. 469, 473. Gnathostoma spinigerum, Pls. VIL., VIIL., p. 245; Figs. 37-40, pp. 293- 295. Ictidosuchus lonyiceps, Bigs. 1-8, pp. 844- 346. _ Megalivalus loveridegii, Fig. 4, p. 418. Meles meles, Figs. 19-25, pp. 425, 427, 429, 431, 482, 434, 435. Melittobia acasta, Fig. 20, p. 240. Moschorhinus kitchingi, Figs. 7, 8, pp. 851, 3538. | Nats pectinata var. inequalis, Figs. 1, 2, pp. 459, 460. | Nasonia brevicornis, Figs. 13-29, pp.217- 220, 222, 225, 226, 240. | Peripatoides, Pls. I.-V., p. 367. Phyllotillon narieus, Pl. 1, p. 857 ; Figs. 1, 2, pp. 358, 360. Proleptus scillicola, Figs. 1-8, pp. 451, 452, 454. Rana holsti, Big. 5, p. 421. | Rappia platyrhinus, Fig. 3, p. 416. puncticulata, Fig. 2, p.415.- Cc X1V Rhinocypha moultoni, Figs. 1, 2, pp. 829, 330. Scatophaga stercoraria, Figs. 1-14, pp. 631-645. Schizotherium ? pilgrimt, Pl. 1., p. 857 ; | Higs. 3, 4, pp. 862, 353, Spiroxys contorta, Pls. 1—II., p. 245; Figs. 1-3, p. 250. gangetica, P1_IT., p. 245; Figs. 4-6, p. 202, Tanganyika fauna,Curveshowing growth of knowledge of, Fig. 1, p. 593. Tangua anomala, Pl. IV., p. 245; Figs. 16-20, pp. 265-267. INDEX OF ILLUSTRATIONS, Tanqua diadema, Pls. III.-IV., p. 245 ; Figs. 21-23, p. 269. —- tiara, Pl. III., p. 245; Figs. 7-15, pp. 259-261, 263, 264. Tawidea americana, Figs. 19, 20, 22-25, pp. 425, 427, 431, 482, 484, 435, Teinobasis kirbyi, Fig. 4, p. 337. Teredo mannit, Figs. 2, 3, pp. 395, 396. navalis, Fig. 1, p. 393. Whaitsia platyceps, Fig. 9, p. 354. Xylotrya australis, Figs. 6-8, pp. 899- 401. capensis, Figs. 9-11, pp. 401-403. saulii, Figs, 4, 5, p. 399. PROCEEDINGS OF TITE GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. PAPERS. 15. The Life-History and Habits of two Parasites of Blow- flies. By A. M. Attson. With an Introduction by Prof. H. Maxwewui Lerroy, F.Z.8.* [Received March 29, 1920: Read April 13, 1920. ] (Text-figures 1-20.) INDEX. Page A Short Account of the Start of the Work «..........:..cccccccccsseevensees 196 Breeding Methods ........... aos Life-History and Habits of Ayia miniuamtor spa. mand ree ae 8 Life-History and Habits of Nasonia brevicornis Ashm.and Hosts ... 216 Super-parasitism, or Accidental Secondary Parasitism ................... 2380 Refrigerating Experiment .............. en ea ee eee Pee Conclusions upon the iconouiic Tincorthi ance ior A, manducator Pama amd OREULCOT NUS) ASTIN. 52.240 cavers ces ian dos svc oteedssnceseenere (24k Summary . Posen ieearas 2 feng, BAD norledements et 243 References............ 243 INTRODUCTION. This paper deals with part of the work initiated after a visit to Australia, where the lack of any means of control of the Sheep Blow-flies is painfully evident. As some of these probably came from England, it seemed desirable to study the natural checks * Communicated by Prof. LEFRoy. Proc. Zoou, Soc. —1920, No. XV. 14 196 MR. A. M. ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND that keep down the pest here: and the accidental discovery at the Society’s Gardens of three important checks gave the work a start. In this communication two Hymenopterous parasites are discussed: other parasites are under investigation. Acknowledgments are due to the AGeaen Commonwealth Government fone a small grant to assist the work. H. M. Lerroy. A SHort ACCOUNT OF THE START OF THE WORK. About the last week in June Prof. Maxwell Lefroy gave the writer a tin containing approximately 1500 Dipterous puparia to breed out. These had been forwarded by Miss Cheesman, the Society’s Assistant Curator of Insects. The contents of the tin were divided into five lots, and put into an equal number of jars containing damped soil. The jars were covered with muslin. (At the outset, it should be explained that occasional damping of soil was necessitated by the fact that the soil was kept in sacks in the laboratory, and consequently any moisture originally in it soon evaporated.) Adult flies began to emerge a week later, and continued to do so for a period of six or seven days. They were identified as Calliphora erythrocephata Meig. The jars containing the empty puparia and a large number of intact puparia were then put aside. They were occasionally examined, and on 14th July the first jar inspected was found to contain an active Hymenopteron, which upon closer observation appeared to be a female Braconid; the examination of the other four jars showed that three of them also contained specimens of the Braconid. Asthe remaining jar did not contain any Braconid, the contents were emptied and carefully examined; all empty puparia were separated from those which were still intact, and six of the latter were opened, with the result that two were found to contain fully-formed flies which had failed to emerge, another a Shapeless, smelling, moist mass—an atrophied fly-nymph—and the other three contained Braconids, one in an early pupal state, the others fully-formed adults apparently ready for emergence, free of the pupal skin, and wings fully expanded *. With the appearance of this parasite, breeding experiments were commenced. The Braconids were released in a muslin- covered glass cylinder, which was placed in a large tray containing soll. Food was put in. Blow-fly larvee and eggs were obtained by exposing meat at the Zoological Gardens and on the balcony of the Imperial College of Science, South Kensington, and a test made to ascertain if the Braconids would parasitize the larve. The test was satisfactory, and one female began ovipositing one minute after the admission of the larvee, and in 25 minutes five females were at work. * Both insects crawled out of their opened puparium ; one at once passed the meconium and discharge, the other did not: both were males. The former lived a normal period, the latter was dead on the second day. —— HABITS OF TWO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. 197 Numbers of the parasite were emerging from the jars at this time, anda large cage was brought into use to contain them. As it was desirable to obtain as many adults as possible, a search was made at the Society’s Gardens at the spot where the original material was found, and a further supply of puparia obtained. Whilst sorting out this material preparatory to putting the intact puparia into jars, a number of Chalcids were observed crawling about on the soil. Most of these were captured. A closer scrutiny of the puparia disclosed minute holes in several and Chaleids emerging from some of them; it was also noticed that a few puparia showed that Braconids had emerged from them. In view of the appearance of this Chalcid, each puparium—they were of a Calliphora species and presumably erythrocephala, the same species as the flies—was placed in a separate tube. Both para- sites continued to emerge from this mater ial daily for a period of twelve days. As no Chaleids appeared from the original material, which had been in the jars for nearly a month, it was evident that they had carried out their attack after the original material had been removed; and as this consisted entirely of puparia, it seemed reasonable to assume that this Chaleid parasitized the pupal stage. This supposition proved correct, and will be referred to later. A constant supply of blow-fly material for parasitization was maintained by putting small receptacles containing meat out in the open and placing it under control as soon as eggs had been deposited on it. No opportunity occurred at this time to obtain meat blown by flies of definite species under control; but with this object in view, small quantities of the larvae from each lot of blown material were segregated and allowed to develop into adults, when their species were determined, and they were then placed under control in separate cages. In the hope that the Braconid was still about, and in order to obtain large numbers of them, receptacles containing soil and meat were put out in the vicinity of the spot from which the original material was obtained; this, Miss Cheesman kindly undertook to do, and the receptacles were left in the open until the blow-fly larve had commenced pupation, when the material was removed to the laboratory to be bred out. It was at once observed that the large parasite was still about. It was seen to come to the receptacles and to attack the Jarve. Whilst this was being done, Prof, Lefroy put receptacles out at Heston to see if the ‘parasites could be obtained in this locality. Only the Braconid parasite appeared from the latter place. All lots of material obtained from Regent’s Park and Heston were bred out to observe if any parasites other than the Braconid and Chalcid made their appearance: none did. By the end of August large numbers of the parasites were in the cages in the laboratories and extensive breeding operations in progress, and every effort was made to maintain a constant 14* 198 MR. A. M. ALISON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND supply of active parasites so that by the end of the year there would exist a large stock of hibernating material. It was not until October that the writer took specimens of the parasites to Mr. J. Waterston at the Natural History Museum for identification. The Braconid was identified as Alysia mandu- cator Panz. and the Chalcid as Nasonia brevicornis Ashin. Mr. Waterston kindly brought to the writer’s notice a paper by Graham-Smith (1) in which these parasites were referred to. Up to this time no reference to the Braconid was known, and that the Chalcid should prove to be Wasonia brevicornis was not anticipated, especially. as the illustrations in Australian publica- tions in the writer’s possession depicted a female of this species walking with an extruded ovipositor, a position which it only assumes in death. BreEepinc Merruops. After the first lots of the parasites had completed their work, the several species of blowflies, which had been obtained from the meat exposed in different localities, were segregated. The species obtained were :— Blue /Bottileig senna ..... Calliphora erythrocephala Meig. Lea Si thee Meena seenn s a vomitoria Linn. British Sheep Mage got-fly ... Lucilia sericata Meig. Green Bottle ..... Sper an the 5; cesar Linn. Green Bottle ..... Po aiatens . Phormia grenlandica Att. In addition to these, the Common House-fly, Musca domestica Linn., which is constantly bred at the College, was available. Upon Prof. Lefroy’s advice as to the best medium in which to breed the larve, ox liver was used, and found very satisfactory. A somewhat important point in this connection was that liver could be procured easily as it did not fali within the scope of the ‘Meat Rationing Order.” The liver was cut into small pieces, placed in glass receptacles and put into the cages containing the different species of ‘“ blow- flies.” As soon as it had been blown—that is, eggs deposited on it—the receptacle was withdrawn and emptied into a glass dish, in which additional pieces of liver were put when the eggs hatched. The receptacles were refilled and put back into Fis cages when more eggs were required ; this method was continued 1s long as larvee or puparia have been required. The glass dishes with the newly-hatched larve were placed in large trays of 18 inches diameter and 4 inches height, and which hontained ae ely sifted sand or soil to a depth of 2 to 3 inches. It was found that the full-grown larve invariably crawled out of the glass dishes, and after roaming about on the sand, proceeded to disappear and pupate. This method of breeding the blow-flies was successful with all species except Lucilia sericata; the original lot of these were obtained from the fleece of a “ sticle” sheep. A. piece of sheep's S skin was obtained consisting of the tail and the whole of the anal HABITS OF ''WO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. 199 area with a quantity of feces adhering to 1t, and was placed on a piece of liver on fine damped soil in a tray; artificial heating was applied, and the species was successfully reared by this means. Several methods of presenting the larvee for parasitization were tried, the original object being the attainment of those conditions in which they would be an easy prey for the Braconid’s attack. It was found that free larve severely damaged the females, so that it became necessary to reproduce conditions as nearly natural as possible, In the case of the Chaleid, host puparia—in a proportion of 20 per female—were placed in small receptacles in the cages and left there for ten days for parasitization. The puparia were obtained from the trays by sifting; this rough handling did no appreciable damage. The breeding operations were in progress from July to the end of December; from July to the middle of September all lots of parasitized material were reared to maintain supplies of parent generations for the cages; after this period the parasitized material was exposed on the balcony of the College to hibernate and form the necessary stock for shipment. Lire-Histoky AND HaBirs OF ALYSIA MANDUCATOR PANzZ., AND Hosts. Introductory.— Alysia manducator Panz. was selected by Latreille as the type of his genus Alysia, and belongs to the group Exodontes of the family Braconidee. It should be noted that the following account is mainly based upon observations of this insect in captivity; opportunities to observe it under natural conditions were very limited. The Length of the Life-cycle.-—The length of the life-cycle from egg to adult is, under suitable conditions of temperature, from 33 days and upwards, with a mean average of 52 days, but varies considerably for some reason even amongst those of the same parent and under the same conditions. Table I. shows this extraordinary variation, and refers to nine lots of material para- sitized in the laboratory. Graham-Smith (1) records an instance in which the life-cycle took only 25 days. The Egg—The egg (text-fig. 1) is very small, cylindrical, tapering, and broadly rounded at one extremity, broadest at the Text-figure |. Eeg of A. manducator, from ovary. Size °675X°150 mm. X61. Original. other? with the micropyle narrowly attached and having the appearance of a large protuberance. It is just visible to the 200 MR. A. M. ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND TABLE I.—Showing variations in length of life-cycle. Alysia manducator. Dates Nos. of Jars containing parasitized material and | Daily of first and dates when parasitized. | Temp. to last Vas a wri ; — | nearest emergence |No.1.| No.2.| No.3.| No. 4.| No. 5.| No.6. | No.7. | No.8.| No.9. degree of adults. |17/7/19)18/7/19|18/7/19 19/7/19)21/7/19)21/7/19 31/7/19\31/7/19) 6/8/19 | Cent. Aue lS. A | 25 BO) eee. | 24, PAO) nie | 22 haga we | 22 DD) cece | 19 Dade sai te | 22 OSG | 19 Deere | 18 2G. 2esmns | 18°5 Oe isthe 17's 20) oe 16 vA Maes ee 19 SOM etna! 17a Sil antes | 19 Septe ee 17 Die eecs | 18°5 Oia eee 19 Ai. Sacra | | 21°25 5 Sees | | 24 Cre PUP es 22'5 Tic tees | 21 Bees. - | p 22°5 Ole 24. IL aaa 25 beg eee | Vv | A 27 1 pa See | eel | | 27 ieee | | bu x 19 ae Vv Wi 18 ADs abc | AS tl 16 . | 17 LW hae | | | 20 See | | | 21 10's | | | 18 2071 los | | | 18 Die, | ish) DOO tae | | 18°5 230 a. | | | 19 * QA. | | | 20 2 | | | | NA 21 BGI ha | | 20 OTe. | | | 20 73 Mae | 20 Theat | | | |. 195 208 2 | | 19°5 Octenies | | 20 Drees | | 20 ce | | 20 Tae | | 19°5 bone | 20 6a | | 20 gee | | | 20 Speen: | | | | Le OntE | | | | | 20 LO es | | | | 20 Ly cee | | | 19°5 Lees | | | | ¥, 20 * Artificial heating from 23rd Sept. Thus, contents of No. 1 Jar took to complete cycle 33-58 days ; No. 2, 51-56 days; No. 3, 50-57 days; No. 4, 51-56 days; No. 5, 53-55 days; No. 6, 49-55 days ; No. 7, 44-68 days; No. 8, 45-57 days; No. 9, 40-69 days: giving a general average of 465-59 days with a mean average of 52. HABITS OF TWO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. 201 naked eye. It is translucent white, with a smooth glossy surface. The time required for the egg to hatch varies, and in an investi- gation into this point active first instar larve were found in the hosts, which had pupated 66 hours after the eggs were deposited, the temperature during this time being 20°C. But, that the egg hatches in from 30 to 50 hours generally is obvious from the condition of the host pupa, which is either in a state of histo- lysis or an early stage of histogenesis ; and also by the occasional distorted appearance of the host puparium. The egg is deposited in any part of the larval host, and this lack of discrimination accounts for the non-appearance of the parasite on occasions. If, for instance, the egg was lodged amongst muscles, it would be crushed by the movements of the host larva; this point is mentioned again under Oviposition. The Larva.—The first instar larva (text-fig. 2) differs in appearance from the later instars, particularly in the shape and appearance of its head, which is a thickly chitinized brownish capsule fitted with a stout pair of mandibles, and has a pair of small protuberances on the dorsal surface, the antenne. It Text-figure 2. First instar larva of A. manducator. Camera-lucida drawing, partly reconstructed. 41. Original. consists, apparently, of 14 segments including the head; the abdomen terminates ina ‘ tail”-like appendage, the abdominal vesicle. A similar organ in A/tcrogaster, and other endo-parasitic Hymenoptera, Gatenby (5) concludes is respiratory in function. That this is the function of this organ in A. manducator appears very probable, and it presumably functions by means of osmosis. Since the larva sometimes hatches in the body of its larval host before histolysis has begun, its head seems well adapted to enable it to move in the host pupa if it hatches—as it usually does—-during the process of histolysis or that of Listogenesis. What part of the host forms the food of the various instars has not been observed, but it must consist of liquid or semi- liquid, and in the first instar would probably be the body-fluid and fat-bodies; and the later instars would feed on those systems which have ceased breaking down or building up after the original attack of the first instar larva. That the larva sometimes hatches before the host pupates is evidenced by the fact that a puparium containing the parasite occasionally bears a 202 MR. A. M. ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND distorted appearance—indicating the severance of a muscle—or is shrivelled and excessively wrinkled (text-fig. 8). The first instar Jarva, with the exception of its brownish head, is translucent white and glabrous throughout ; the integument is very soft and easily onacee Text-fig. 3 illustrates a larva of the second instar, in which the capsule head has disappeared and has given place to one the type of which remains constant in the later instars. The particular Text-figure 3. fe x SY’ yj Y / S | y SS a SN Second instar larva of 4. manducator. Greatly magnified. Original. larva illustrated was removed from a Calliphora sp. puparium, and was placed in a watch-glass containing three macerated fly- nymphs with a few drops of water added to reduce the density, and with the aid of a microscope it was kept under observation for more than half-an-hour whilst feeding. The larva remained quite motionless during this time, its mouth-parts alone were constantly working; no movement of the mandibles was observed, but the extensive lip-like labium was seen to be continually moving with a “rippling” action whilst the liquid was being absorbed. The abdominal vesicle has proportionately shortened. The mid-intestine now shows up clearly, swollen with food and giving a pale yellow colour to the larva. The intermediate instars show no superficial difference from the second, beyond the shortening of the “ tail”-lhke abdominal vesicle and the increase in the size of the larva and corresponding swelling of the mid-intestine. Text-figure 4. AMA Full-grown larva of A. manducator. Greatly magnified. Length 4°25 mm. Original. The last instar larva (text-fig 4) differs from the preceding instars In that ~-with the exception of the cephalic and posterior HABITS OF TWO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. 203 segments—the integument is covered with fine sete and scattered sensory hairs (text- -fig. 5). The mouth-parts of this stage are well defined (text-fig. 6). .The posterior appendage has almost disappeared; easily visible just under the integument and scattered about in the abdominal region are large white particles. The spiracles, which are of a very simple structure, number nine pairs, and appear on the second thoracic and first eight abdominal seg- ments. There appears, on either side, a eradil main trachea with segmental branches. Text-figure 5. Text-figure 6. Text-fig. 5.—Seta and sensory hairs on portion of integument of full-grown larva of A. manducator. Greatly magnified. Original. Text-fig. 6—Head of full-grown larva, partly reconstructed, camera-lucida drawing. x 25. Original. During all the larval stages the mid-intestine is closed caudally, and it is not until the emergence of the adult insect that the residuary and undigested food-matter is voided. The last instar larva has , on several occasions, been observed feeding upon the hquid remnants of its host. having at some stage pushed the trachee of the host to the sides of the puparium ; the latter being lined with the fly-nymph’s pupal skin. It seems only reasonable to assume that chitin, represented by the ris ea of the fly pupa, and the main tracheal trunks of the blow- fly larva which remain constant in histolysis do not form part of the larval diet. ‘This postulation, if correct, would exempt the Braconid larva from the necessity of eating its own east larval skins. Before the pro-pupal stage, the final instar larva—which by this time completely occupies the puparium of its host—spins a silken cocoon, which either adheres (a) to the thick chitinized walls of the puparium, or (6) to the stretched integument of the fly pupa, and which generally is caused to adhere to the walls of the puparium. In (@) the absence of the fly-pupal skin would be accounted for by the first instar larva having started its attack before the host larva had settled down te pupate or before histogenesis had started, and (b) after histogenesis had started. So that the texture of this cocoon or lining to the puparium is not always the same, the external portion of it—that 204 MR. A. M. ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND which is in contact with the fly puparium—may be silk or pupal integuinent, and in those cases examined the tracheal system was visible either outside the silk or between the silk and pupal integument; no cast skins however were detected, the search was not very thorough. Sometimes the cocoon with the fly- pupal integument shows the outline of the tly-nymph’s legs etc., indicating late hatching of the egg and after histogenesis had proceeded some time. The spinning of this cocoon raises an interesting point as to the means whereby the larva, which appears to fill the puparium, is able to move about within it, to accomplish the task of covering every part of the inside, and also of absorbing the liquid remains of the fly-nymph, taking into consideration that its intestine is now filled with a semi-solid mass of undigested fly-pupa. It has been observed that the spinning of the cocoon reduces the size of the larva to some extent, but observation has not definitely established the means adopted; some larve have been found contracted into a small compass as though able to revolve within the puparium and thus change their direction, whilst others appear to be working in the manner common amongst. silk- spinning Lepidopterous larve. The latter method is the most probable, and is supported by the appearance of the larva. The lining strengthens the puparium considerably, and is a sure indication of the presence of the parasite in its last stages. It is weakest at the anterior end of the host puparium, where the chitinized mouth-parts of the blow-fly larva form an obstruction. The length of larval life in the different instars appears to vary considerably, but no details were obtained; in one instance, however, a full-grown larva was found in a puparium 18 days after the ege was deposited. ‘This is the shortest period recorded. On the orien hand, some intact puparia, which were from a lot parasitized on 6th August, were opened on 26th November, and 13 were found to contain full-grown healthy larve, 112 days after the eggs were deposited. he final instar larva is the stage where the great variations in the life-cycle occurs. The time taken to pass from this stage to that of the pupa varies from a few days to many months. This point has been observed by Graham-Simith (1), who also observed in 1915 that from material parasitized in 1914, “the individuals emerging in the spring were much larger than those which emerged in the autumn.” This and the observations made during the course of this work have caused the writer to form the opinion that among the factors responsible—beyond the question of food-supply—is that of the size of the host puparium. The integument of the puparium of an undersized blow-fly larva is much thinner than that of the full-grown larva, consequently the parasite within the former is more susceptible to the variations of the temperature, which alone would retard development. In size the full-grown larve vary considerably, but this is naturally dependent upon the size of the host. HABITS OF TWO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. 205 The pro-pupal stage, 7. e, after spinning the cocoon, may last a few days or several months. In two specific instances observed the pro-pupa changed to the pupa, the one 2 days after it was exposed in the puparium, the other 5 days after. Some hibernating larvee from the stock have been observed in puparinm which they had not yet lined, although four months had elapsed since the date of oviposition. The Pupa.—The pupa (text-fig. 7) is loose within the cocoon, and is capable of slight movement. The meconium now appears to become slightly compressed, due to the process of meta- morphosis. Text-figure 7. Lateral and ventral aspect of pupie of A. manducator. Greatly magnified. The figure on left a few days older than that on right. Original. During the whole pupal stage the afore-mentioned large white particles are visible, at first scattered about in the abdomen and later can be seen between the tergites and sternites. The pupa, which is glabrous throughout, is, at first, creamy white with reddish-brown eyes and ocelli, in a few days the head and thorax turn grey, gradually becoming black; meanwhile, the sternites and tergites—widely separated over the distended abdomen—begin to turn grey, and the eyes and ocelli darken ; the legs and antenn™ similarly begin to show the coloration of the adult, likewise the mouth-parts. The last larval skin sphts across the head dorso-ventrally backwards, and then apparently slips back to the apex of the abdomen, from which it 1s disengaged by movements of the abdomen and antenne of the male or the ovipositor of the female. In no instance has the larval exuvium been found attached to the pupa, but lying in a crumpled mass beyond the apex of its abdomen. The length of the pupal stage was, in two specific instances, found to be 7 and 10 days respectively with a mean temperature 206 MR. A. M, ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND of 21° C., but lengthens considerably in a low temperature ; although this will not delay indefinitely the emergence of the adult, which either emerges upon the slightest increase in the temperature, or, in the event of a steady and _ prolonged decrease, dies within the puparium. The Adult.—Theadult emerges from the host puparium and its cocoon by breaking away that part directly in contact with the head (text-fig. 8). It is furnished with a very powerful pair of mandibles (text-fig. 9, @) beautifully adapted for the work in hand. It breaks away the cocoon and puparium by an outward movement, and does not bite the obstruction. Text-fig. 9, b illustrates the outline of a section through the centre of a man- dible, and shows its scoop-like appearance ventro-dorsally, In Text-figure 8. Text-figure 9. Text-fig. 8—Shrivelled and wrinkled puparium from which A. manducator has emerged. Greatly magnified. Original. Text-fig. 9—(a) Left mandible of adult. (b) Section through centre of mandible of adult. x41. Original, . the outward movement of the mandibles a small fracture appears on the puparium, generally between the second and fourth segment, gradually increasing in size until the perfect insect has created an aperture large enough to enable it to escape. Obser- vation has failed to disclose any use for the mandibles other than breaking out of the host puparium, which operation, when in progress by several insects, has been distinctly audible by putting the ear over the mouth of the jar in which they were confined. It is worthy of note that the mechanism of the man- dibles must be diametrically opposed to that of most insects, but upon consideration it seems obvious that by no other means could so large a parasite escape from the puparium, which presents to it a concave surface. HABITS OF TWO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. 207 The aperture made in the puparium is usually just large enough to allow the insect to extricate its head and antenne, thorax and legs, and part of the wings and the base of the abdo- men, when by the pressure exerted against the distended abdomen, the voiding of the meconium is assisted, and is either accompanied or followed by a white discharge—the white particles previously referred to,—which instantly dries and has a cement- like appearance. ‘This substance, upon analysis, has been found to contain sodium hydroxide, but whether some of this is used to soften the silk has not been established. The compressed meconium, which is a deep black-brown rod, is completely enclosed in a sac of integument, which resists boiling in caustic potash, giving the impression that it is chitinized and probably the larval mesenteron, which during metamorphosis has become closed at the anterior end and compressed. In some instances the exit-hole is made too Jarge, and the adult appears with its abdomen still distended ; then by constantly passing the tarsi of the hind-legs along it, it exerts sufficient pressure to enable it to void the meconium: this method is not always successful, and results in one or two days in the death of the insect. Flight is impossible with the meconium unvoided, although vain efforts to rise have been observed. In some instances the transverse cut made with the mandibles is extended so far around the puparium that, on emerging, the insect com- pletely breaks off the top of the puparium. Hmergence generally takes place from the cephalic end of the puparium, but in several instances it has been observed that this was accomplished from the posterior end. The wings ave always fully extended before the adult attempts to break out of the puparium. Only in a very few cases has it been observed that the wings have become damaged and torn by the jagged edges of the emergence hole; this condition i is generally accompanied by injuries to the soft integument between the abdominal pilates, resulting in the death of the insect in one to two days. Examination of intact puparia some time after the emergence of the parasites has shown that for some reason unascertained—not due to temperature—a small number never succeed in escaping, whilst a few have been found with the cocoon-lining too thick to extricate themselves. Nothing of the pupal exuvium of those insects, which void the meconium whilst escaping. can as a rule be seen; it is generally buried under it, whereas the others are usually found with it attached to the apex of the distended abdomen. Males emerge before the females. ‘he greatest emergence of males is from 3 to 4 days earlier than the females. The Sexes.—Size:—The size of the adults varies considerably, but is, of course, relative to the size of the host. The measure- ment of several discloses a range of from 24 mm. to 63 mm. in length. i 208 MR. A. M. ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND General appearance.—The males (text-fig. 10) are easily distinguished from the females by their long antenne, which are approximately equal to the over-all length of the insect from the frons to the apex of the wings when in repose, and which extend beyond the apex of the abdomen. The ovipositor 1s barely visible when the insect is looked at from above, but can be seen when in a lateral aspect. Both sexes are shining black, with rufous legs. Text-figure 10. Male A. manducator. Greatly magnified. Original. Courting and Mating.—This takes place very shortly after emergence, but never occurs unless the ineconium has been voided some time. When seeking a mate (in the cage) the male moves rapidly along, violently swaying the antenne and vibrating the wings, aon are opened as in flight. Mating lasts about 8 minutes, but was not frequently observed. The sex attraction is only evident in the male, and when newly-emerged females were admitted to the cage, males eagerly sought them. ‘The female evinces little interest in the male and can easily repel it. The males make no distinction between virgin and fertilized females. Flight.— Both sexes are capable of sustained flight. This has been observed in the cage, and on fine days it appeared as if all were ‘‘on the wing.” Any which escaped from the cages or when handling were generally instantly out of reach and through the open skylights. Those observed around baited receptacles in the open appeared to come from all directions; this is con- firmed by Marshall (quoted under Oviposition). HABITS OF TWO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. 209 Ovipositicn.—Females do not begin ovipositing until a day or so after emergence, and irrespective of whether they have mated or not; a few have been observed trying to oviposit before voiding the meconium. The ovaries are large and well filled with eggs. A dissection of the ovaries of 12 females gave an average of 366 eggs per female. The greatest number counted in a single female was 416. Graham-Smith (4) records a female with ovaries containing ‘at least 549 egos.” Table IL. gives the details of the count of the contents of individual ovaries :— Tap_LeE I1.—Contents of Ovaries of 12 females. | |No.| No.| No.| No.| No. | No.|No.|No.|No.| No.! No.! No. Females. 4 | : N | Pe 2.0189 (pSerls.2| 6: | 7.) Bs |. /10, faa: | aarp ott | verge, 0. of 2 eggs. 4121375 408 | 368 352 328 363 416 | 362 325 338 347 4394 36616 Oviposition takes place in the larva of the blow- fly (text-fig.11); half- to full-grown larve are usually selected. In the cage the Text- figure 11. Female A. manducator ovipositing in larva of Phormia grenlandica. Greatly magnified. Original. chemotropic effect of carrion was—when the atmosphere was not charged with the odour—alimost instantaneous upon the females ; they became violently agitated, swaying their antenne, and then might proceed to clean themselves, particularly the antenne and the abdomen ventrally in the region of the ovipositor, and fly to the carrion, or reverse the procedure and fly over and around the receptacle containing it and the larvee, and then alighting near by, go through the cleaning process. It is, of course, obvious 210 MR. A. M. ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND that the sense-organs in the antenne and the palps of the ovipositor had suddenly received the odour of the carrion aud stimulated the insect to oviposit. The males are also attracted by carrion—apparently a sexual tropism to enable them to locate the females. Marshall (3) observes :—‘‘ They ” (both sexes) “ scent the aroma of carrion at a surprising. distance, as I once had occasion to observe in watching the remains of a dead rook, upon which they descended in constant succession, apparently from the sky, like vultures. The males generally alighted on blades of grass close to the attractive object, as if to wait for their partners, without interrupting them in their unsavoury occu- pation.” As soon as the females have alighted, they begin their search for the larve, and if the initial effort to insert the ovipositor is successful, they remain depositing eggs until they die, either from exhaustion or because their task is completed. A few have been observed to leave the larve and go in search of food and not return the same day. Only one egg is deposited in each larva by an individual female, at least, under conditions which are approximately natural—7. e., where the larva has means of escape by disappearing into the meat or earth. The ovipositor is inserted diagonally under the integument of the larva when the attack takes place in the thoracic or abdominal regions. The larva makes every effort to escape, wrigeling and squirming, and frequently damaging the female. These frantic efforts to escape are put an end to by the effect of a poison injected with the insertion of the ovipositor. The immediate effect of the insertion of the ovipositor is to cause the larva to vomit and void. The poison produces a_ paralyzing effect, and causes the larva to contract and then he motionless whilst the ege is deposited. This operation varies in time, and may take 30 seconds to 5 minutes*—the more exhausted the female is, the longer it takes. The “temporary paralysis” of the larva lasts from one to two minutes, so that when an exhausted female delays the with- drawal of the ovipositor ‘the larva endeavours to release itself ; normally though, when the ovipositor 1s withdrawn, it is stall motionless, and remains so for some seconds. The female then moves off in search of another victim. The first movements of a larva recovering from the “ temporary paralysis” are to extend itself to its full length, and then, still slightly under the influence of the poison and the unpleasant ovipositor, it goes through a series of extraordinary convulsive and constrictive movements, which ripple the integument either from the cephalic to the anal end or vice versa, as though it was endowed with intelligence * One female, which had not oviposited in more than a dozen larvee, was observed to retain the ovipositor within a larva for 21 minutes, and as the initial dose of poison did not suffice to keep it motionless, further doses were apparently adininistered each time it moved. Needless to say, this larva died, HABITS OF TWO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. Did and was trying to squeeze and crush the egg*. As soon as this ceases it hastily disappears into the soil or carrion, apparently stimulated by its experience to pupate. The foregoing obser- vation, naturally, only refers to larve free of the carrion or on top of it (otherwise they could not have been observed), but those attacked which are partially buried in it do not appear to behave in the same manner; they are surrounded by food and hidden from the hight. The first 20-30 larvee attacked will be ‘“ paralyzed” instantly, and then the poison apparently becomes less rapid in its effect ; whilst it has been noticed that a female which rests for some time and feeds, seems to renew the effectiveness of its poison. An individual female—as has been already noted—does not normally attack the same larva twice. In this connection a series of experiments were carried out under conditions as nearly natural as was possible, and by employing one female at a time it was observed that each larva parasitized, either free of the earrion or partially embedded in it, made every endeavour to get into the soil after it had recovered from its ‘‘ temporary paralysis ”’ either directly or through the carrion. It appears to be definite that effective oviposition stimulates the larva to pupate. How- ever, in cases in which two or more females inject the same larva the second one coming upon it just when it begins to move or encountering it on its way to escape,—its death ensues within 24 to 48 hours. Its organs appear to disintegrate, the dead larva gradually darkens until it turns black; dissections disclosed little else than a thick dirty putrid liquid. In warm weather, with a temperature of about 22°C., the dead larva dries up within 6 or 7 days. The majority of these over-parasitized larvee never succeed in getting into the soil, A female does not attack a motionless larva, but may prod it with the ovipositor, usually causing some movement with unpleasant results for the larva. It is also in this way that a larva just recovering from ‘‘temporary paralysis” becomes a victim to over-parasitism. On several occasions the writer has observed a moving larva stop suddenly and lie motionless upon the approach of a female, although it may have been touched by no more than one leg of the latter. This behaviour is obviously due to the Jarva having been previously attacked by a female, but whether it was attri- butable to chemotropism, which is most probable, has not been established. The predominant odour was that of carrion. Females which have been ovipositing for some time and are in a filthy condition from the carrion and putrefactive juices, will endeavour to insert their ovipositor into any object which they happen to feel moving, with the result that frequently two or more can be seen together, ‘ jabbing” their ovipositors amongst each other’s legs in a vain effort to get it firmly fixed. * The writer, as previously stated, is of the opinion that many of the eggs are damaged by this movement, particularly if located in or amongst muscles. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920, No. XV. 15 212 MR. A. M. ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND The ovipositor, which is extruded, is inserted in different parts of the larva’s anatomy. Generally, when the larva is free—i.e., on the surface of the carrion, under it, or on the surface of the soil,—it is inserted about the Ist to 3rd abdominal segments ; very small females attack the cephalic end or the anal plate, particu- larly in the case of full-grown larve, probably owing to their inability to get astride the victim, as is usuai with the larger females. When the larva is moving in the carrion and the movement is perceptible, the female endeavours to insert the ovipositor through it into any part of the larva, whilst a female coming upon a larva disappearing into the soil or carrion will attack the apex of the abdomen or anal plate, and sometimes is unable to bring the victim to a standstill before the ovipositor has disappeared into the cavity ; whilst, on the other hand, a larva emerging from the carrion is attacked in the anterior region. Whilst the insect is ovipositing, the palpi or “ feelers” (text- fig. 12), which in repose form lateral sheaths to the poison and Text-figure 12. Palp of ovipositor of A. manducator. W.P., wiping-pad. 61. Original. piercing-blades, are constantly in use for locating the moving larva. The ovipositor is withdrawn from a victim with a distinct jerk in order to disengage the barbs of the piercing-blades, and by means of the powerful muscles attached to the hinge-like continuation of the blades, it instantly springs back between the palpi, the apex of the former alighting at the base of the latter, so that whilst the sternites are assuming their normal position of repose, the point of the ovipositor is cleaned by the ‘“wiping-pads ” (text-fig. 12, W.P.) of the receding palpi. These “ wiping-pads” are on the inside of the basal portion of the palpi, extending HABITS OF TWO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. es bs) approximately half of the length, and consist of soft dirty white integument roughly in folds. Length of Period of Oviposition.—Females, whether freshly emerged or otherwise, and which had or had not mated, once allowed to oviposit, were dead the next day if they had been constantly ovipositing, or when resting and feeding occasionally lasted three to four days; in one instance a female lived five days ovipositing in about 50 larvee daily. Progeny of Single Females.—No extensive data were obtained on this point, but in the laboratory the average was 33°74 per female. (See Percentage of Parasitization.) Parthenogenesis.— Unmated females reproduced males ; whether the latter were fertile was not investigated. Proportion of the Sexes.—'Vhis appears to be about equal on the whole in individual lots of material parasitized in the laboratory, although one sex may considerably predominate. The figures given under this heading are details of emergence from three lots of material which were parasitized by free Braconids in Regent’s Park, and give the following result: 199 ¢ and 294 9. No other details of emergence from outside material were compiled. Graham-Smith (4) gives, substantially, the following details for “Spring” and “ Autumn” batches which emerged in 1916 from material parasitized in the autumn of 1915. The sum total for both batches are 2891 ¢ and 749 9°, clearly indicating arrhenotokie, a proportion, which the writer ventures to suggest may, in this instance, be due to the immediate proximity of host-infested carcases when the females of the autumn batch of 1915 emerged. Length of Life of Adult.—In the laboratory the length of the life of adults was not very long. Observations showed that, in the case of two freshly-emerged males which were not permitted to mate, one lived 25 days, the other 31 days; two unfertilized females not allowed to mate or oviposit lived 33 and 38 days; two females and two males confined together, the former not being allowed to oviposit, the males lived, the one 18 days, the other 23 days; the females, one 25 days, the other 33 days. And as stated oviposition rapidly ends the female’s life. In each of the foregoing tests ample supplies of food were given, but the insects were confined in glass jars, which did not give much opportunity for flight and the atmosphere was permeated with the odour of carrion. The length of life in the open or in unpolluted air would doubtless be longer. The length of life within the main cage appeared to be much shorter during the months of November, December, and January in spite of a mean temperature of 20°C. Activity was always greatest on fine days, and particularly when the sunshine was directly upon the cage. food.—When the breeding operations began, the adults were fed on sugar diluted with water in a ratio of 1 to 5, but owing to the “‘ Rationing Restrictions,” honey had to be substituted, and 1o® 2 leh MR. A. M. ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND diluted in the same proportion proved to be the better food, and was occasionally varied with water only. Observation in the open failed to discover any of this species feeding, and in this connection Marshall (3) only observes “ both sexes likewise fre- quent flowers for the purpose of feeding.” It is probable that “honeydew” constitutes a source of food, as is the case with many Hymenopterons, but was not tested with this species. Seasonal Abundance.—From 14th July, 1919, to the end of January 1920, with a few days’ exception, there have been active adults in the main cage; the breeding, which, to begin with, was almost a daily occurrence, caused such an overlapping of generations as to bring about this result. Graham-Smith (4) observes :—‘‘ The parasite, however, is abundant throughout the season, for it was observed attacking fly larva from 30th May to lst November, 1916.” From the observations of the writer, these insects were present in large numbers from July to October 1919 in Regent’s Park; and as the original stock bred in the laboratory appeared on 14th July, and taking the average period of the life-cycle as 52 days (see Table I.), this gives 24th May as the date upon which the parents of this generation were deposit- ing eggs; this therefore confirms the above observation. Details of Hmergence.—Accurate sex details of the daily emer- gence from certain lots were kept from 18th August to 20th September, after which date these had to be abandoned, the breeding operations at this date occupying all available time. Details of daily emergence for the period 3rd to 12th September, ' corresponding to the period of greatest activity shown in Table I, and affecting laboratory-bred material from the jars No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, No. 4, No. 5, & No. 6 and from No. 7 for one day shown in Table I., are given below in Table III, :— Tasuy ITT.— Details of Daily Emergence. | Jars Nos. |g 9/d 91d 9s Zid Bld Blo Zs els Bis Q| Totals. | 1, 2, 25 4, 5, | ae any Gere has e. re XG | & 6and7 3 3 VE Sr sce te eae es ee aon Males. | for one day. — 2 a 9 13) 88). 42). 34). Sl." 42) See ree trea | ‘ ; | Females. | Sept. | 8rd | 4th | 5th | 6th | 7th | 8th | 9th | 10th}11th|12th| 214 These figures merely indicate the early appearance of the males. During the period covered by Table III. the average daily contents of the main cage was over 300 individuals of both sexes ; this figure allows for the withdrawal of ovipositing females and admission of daily emergences from all sources. Percentage of Parasitization.—Graham-Smith (1), referring to two lots of material attacked by ‘‘free” A. manducator in 1914 and bred out in 1915, states :—‘“ In the former it is 60 per cent., HABITS OF {WO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. 215 in the latter nearly 90 per cent. That the latter figure is a true index of the extent of Braconid infection in the original stock of pupe is shown by the fact that 9 per cent. of the pup in the sun tin were not parasitised.” Of two lots of puparia from which— the Deere emerged during 1916, this observer found (4) :— “ At least 25 per Coun of rhea puparia” from one lot ‘and 57 per cent. of those” from the other ‘“ were infected with A. mandu- cator.’” Summarizing his observations on emergence of this parasite im 1915-16-17, he says (4):—‘‘Of the 16,028 puparia collected in the autumn of 1914-15-16 from sunny and shady situations 7041 or 43 per cent. were infected with 4. manducator, while of the 4787 puparia collected during the summer months of 1916-17 only 508 or 10 per cent. were micered From two lots of material collected from Regent’s Park on 27th July, and where parasitization by “free” Braconids occurred under conditions similar to those above, the writer found the percentage of parasitism to be 23°12 per sent. and 52°32 per cent. respectively. These lots were both brought in at a time when the larvee had begun to pupate, they were examined in November, previous to this time emergence had ceased. The figures given are derived from the number of puparia from which A. mandu- cator had emerged, and from those intact puparia in which dead adults, dead pupee, and active and dead larvee of the parasite were found, as against the total number of puparia in the receptacles, including those from which flies had emerged, or failed to emerge, and those containing atrophied fly- nymphs. It would be of interest to know the number of females responsible for these figures. Dead females were always found in the receptacle, but no reliance can be placed on their number. In laboratory-bred material, in ten lots, it was found that the percentage of parasitization ranged from 15:04 per cent. to 48°99 per cent., the latter figure being due to nine females. But the outstanding feature of this examination was, that it took a total of 39 females to reproduce definitely 1306 individuals exclusive of over-parasitized larve—an average of 33°74 each, or only 9°89 per cent. of their average ege-capacity. This result can but be attributed to confinement and to the bad ventilation of the cage, also to the fact that the parasite’s sense-organs, which are normally stimulated to bring about the inclination to oviposit, would have been dulled and deadened by the ever-present odour of carrion in the laboratory. Under better caging conditions and when living in an atmosphere unpolluted with the stench of the putrefactive juices of the carrion, better results would certainly be obtained. Hibernation.— A. manducator hibernates as a full-grown larva. This was observed under natural conditions by Graham-Smith (1 and 4), and is supported by the condition of the stock material and bv the Refrigerating Experiment. Attraction to Light.—Artificial light is very attractive, and caused the insects to crowd on that side of the cage nearest to it. 216 MR. A. M. ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND Hosts.—The species of larve used in this work and from which A. manducator Panz. was successfuily bred, are as follows :— Lucilia sericata Meig. i eeesor Tamia: Phormia grenlandica Ztt. Calliphora erythrocephala Meig. mu vomitoria Linn. No preference was shown for any individual species, the odour of the putrefactive juices being the chemotropic stim ulation to oviposit; and therefore it is probable that other carrion- feeding cyclorhaphous larvee would be found to be suitable hosts. In this connection Marshall (3) states:—‘‘ They have been reared from various maggots, as Lucilia cesar L., Cyrtoneura stabulans Fall., Hydrotea dentipes Fab.” Lire-Hisrory anp HaBirs oF VASONIA BREVICORNIS ASHM., AND Hosts. Mistorical.—Nasoma brevicornis Ashm. was first described by Girault and Saunders, 1909 (6). They bred it from the puparia of the Common House-fly (d/wsca domestica Linn.) at the linois Entomological Station at Urbana in 1908. It has since been reported from Chili and India, and was bred in 1911 from the puparia of COC. erythrocephala Mg. by Graham-Smith (1) at Cambridge, England. In November 1913 it was bred from the puparia of Ly ycnosoma rufifacies by McCarthy (2) at the Govern- ment Sheep-fly Experiment Station at Yarrawin in New South Wales, and a few days later discovered at Longreach, Central Queensland (7). As already stated, page 197, it was first bred by the writer from the puparia of C. erythr ocephalu collected from Regent’s Park, London, in July 1919. Introductory. —TIn the following account of the life-history and habits of this insect, the writer freely quotes from the writings of the previous observers, adding here and there observations of his own. In doing this the writer desires to put forward as general and collected an account of this important insect as possible ; further, it may be observed that the writer had already made an independent study of this subject before specimens were identified and the original description of Girault and Saunders (6) brought to his notice. Full acknowledgment is made to these references, which for the sake of the continuity of the account are mostly signified by reference numbers only. The Length of the Life-cycle.-—This is entirely dependent upon the temperature, and its influence affects the full-grown larval stage the most. The various observers differ as to the period of the life-cycle, but this can be accounted for by the probable differences in temperature when the observations were made. Girault and Saunders (6) give 224 days as the average in the spring and 15 days in autumn; McCarthy (2) 11 days in summer; Froggatt HABITS OF TWO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES, DAG. (7) 11 to 14 days; Froggatt (8) 15 days. Under laboratory conditions with a mean temperature of 20° C. it was found to average 21 days. The Lgg.—The egg is translucent white, with a smooth glossy surface, cylindrical, slightly tapering to one extremity and broadly rounded at both ends (text-fig. 13). The newly-deposited egg measures from ‘30 to °35 mm. in length and :11 to *14 mm. wide at broadest part (8). The eggs are placed in clusters under the shell of the puparium and upon the surface of the pupal integument of the developing fly, the latter occasionally being punctured by the ovipositor. They are found in clusters of Text-figure 13. Egg of NV. brevicornis, 26 hours old. Size °125°350 mm. X41. Original. 2 to 12 or more or singly, and are situated on any part of the fly- nymph, but are commonly found in the depression of the junction of head and thorax, or thorax and abdomen. ‘‘ The eggs appear to be coated with a trace of some sticky substance, which causes them to adhere together, and to the covering integument of the fly-pupe ” (8). ‘The egg undergoes a slight increase in size as the development of the embryo progresses. The duration of the egg-stage varies considerably ; those observed ranged from 30 to 74 hours. The Larva.—Immediately upon hatching, the young larve start feeding. They puncture the pupal skin of the host with their mandibles, and with these firmly attached to the enveloping skin of the pupa, proceed to absorb the body-fluids of their host. They remain about the same position until full-grown. As the larvee develop, the host is gradually absorbed, and consequently shrinks inversely to the growth of larve. ‘As a rule, the remains of a parasitised host—the fully-formed pupa—is a flat, scale-like mass, apparently consisting of the ventral shell of the pupa and that of the head; for example, the thece of the eyes, legs, and wings are discernible, and the remains are not much shrunken so far as the original length is concerned. In the case of Cynomyia cadavernia, in one puparium infested with 21 larve of the first spring generation the parasites were all attached to the dorsal surface of the host from the pronotum to the tip of the abdomen; these parasitic larve were nearly full- grown. But in another puparium of the same host, in which 13 larve were found, their attachment to the host appeared to be haphazard, and the host-pupa was considerably shrunken, especially in width” (6). No evidence of larval predaceousness is forthcoming, although dead larvee are frequently found; these 218 MR. A. M. ALTSON ON THE LIFE-HISTORY AND are sometimes found with living ones, but usually all are dead. The dead larva is always discoloured and appears to have shrunk to the size of the meconium, so that they are then quite hard. The number of larval instars have not been worked out, but the general appearance of the larve is constant. The larva (text-figure 14) is a typical vermiform hymenopteron, broadest in the centre and tapering towards the extremities. It consists of apparently 14 segments. It has nine consecutive pairs of Text-figure 14. Full-grown larva of NV. brevicornis. X25. Original. spiracles, of a very simple structure, on 2nd and 3rd thoracic and Ist to 7th abdominal segments. The integument is smooth, glabrous, very thin and easily damaged; it appears to secrete some sticky fluid which entirely athe the integument, and which enables it to ‘ grip” the surface over which it 1s moving. An examination of the larval integument discloses minute pores scattered about the surface and presumably the source of this “sticky” fluid. Larvee have been frequently found in a puparium from which a number of adults have emerged with portions of pupal exuvia attached, sometimes completely covered with it. The mid-intestine is closed caudally during the entire larval development, and the waste matter within it is brown. This gives the larva a dirty white appearance. The slightest puncture made in an active larva about the centre of its body will cause the contents of the intestine to exude instantly, leaving the larva white. The period of development of the larve occupies about 7-10 days from the time of hatching, with a pro-pupal stage of 1-3 days. A few hours before casting its last larval exuvium, the contents of the mid-intestine is voided. This appears to indicate that the mesenteron and proctodeum become connected before the pupa is formed. ‘The meconial discharges of this parasite, found scattered through the host puparium, are brownish yellow or dark olive-green in colour, and consist of small conglomerations of round pellets, or are sometimes in irregular chains, like some bacteria, but are never single, solid pieces. .... ” (6). The length of larval fion is very variable. The Pupa.—After voiding the meconium the larva remains motionless—unless disturbed by a fellow-occupant of the host HABITS OF TWO PARASITES OF BLOW-FLIES. yak!) puparium—with its posterior segments surrounded by the me- conial discharge, which dries rapidly. So that when the larval skin bursts and recedes, the pupa (text-fig. 15), which does not entirely free itself from the larval exuvium, consequently becomes anchored to the meconium. This has been observed by emptying the larval contents of a puparium into a small glass tube. Text-figure 1). Pupa of N. brevicornis. Greatly magnified. Original. The duration of the pupal stage is variable. ‘‘ This was obtained in one case only.

Inst of Localities. The localities fall into three divisions :— 1. Brivis Kast AFRICA. Nairobi. Parklands, Nairobi. Besil, about 50 miles south of Nairobi. Donya Sabuk, 30 miles from Nairobi. Thika, about 50 miles from Nairobi. Kagiatlo, about 100 miles due west of Makindu, which is on the Port Florence-Mombasa Railway. Kedong Valley, about 100 miles from Nairobi, and south of Escarpment Station on the railway. Kenia Forest. Tumu Tumu, on the road from Thika to Mt. Kenia. 2, Ex-German Hasr Arnica (now Tanganyika Territory). Gonya, about 50 miles south of Kilima-Njaro. Longido West, about 50 miles west of Kilima-Njaro. Amani, 40 miles from Port Zanga. Dodoma, about 110 miles west of Morogoro, on the Dar-es- Salaam—Tanganyika Railway. Kongwa, about 20 miles north of Mpapua. Morogoro, about 100 miles west of Dar-es-Salaam on the railway. Tulo, ] Duthumi, { * Pipide should also have been represented, but the large series of Xenopus collected were lost in transit. 50 and 60 miles south of Morogoro. 412 MISS JOAN B. PROCTER ON TAILLESS Mhonga, about 20 miles east of Morogoro. Dar-es-Salaam. 3. PortuGuEsE East AFRICA Lumbo. RANID2A. Rana, s. str. 1. Rava nutri Blgr.* Nairobi. Morogoro. Longido West. 35 specimens. Average length of adult males 55 mm., of adult females 70 min.; largest female 83 mm. : : : ae Snout variable both in length and in degree of acumination. Subgenus TOMOPYERNA. 2. RANA DELALANDII Bibr. Kagiado. Ex-G.E.A. 4 specimens. Length of adult females 41 and 45 mm. A fine white vertebral line in one specimen ; a linear vertebral groove in three specimens. Subgenus PrycHADENA. 3. RANA OXYRHYNCHUS Sund. Thika. Nairobi. Morogoro. Duthumi. Gonya. 72 specimens. Average length of adult males 40 mm., of adult females 55 min. An extremely variable species. Snout equal to or twice as long as diameter of eye, rounded or acutely pointed, sometimes very projecting. Length of tibia 14 to 1% times in length of body, more often 14 times in females. Posterior corner slit- like opening of male’s vocal sac in line with lower border of arm. No hght vertebral band. 4, RANA MASCARENIENSIs D. & B. Nairobi. Gonya. Ex-G.E.A. 15 specimens. Average length of adult males 47 mm.; females half-grown. Hind limb very variable in length, tibio-tarsal articulation reaching anywhere between eye and “tip of snout ; length of tibia 1% to 13 times in length from snout to vent in males, 12 to 2 fie: in females. Vocal sac of male in line with upper header of arm; 11 half-grown females have rudimentary vocal sacs. Markings very regular, the first two series of spots coinciding with the first two glandular folds, and often bisected by them ; almost all specimens have a broad light vertebral band, and often a still lighter fine vertebral line in addition. * “ A specimen of Nutt’s frog was taken at Kabete, which had retained its tail though nearly full-grown.”’—A. LovrripeGs, Field Notes. BATRACHIANS FROM EAST AFRICA. 413 Subgenus HiILDEBRANDTIA. 5. RANA ORNATA Ptrs. Ex-G.E.A. 1 specimen, 2. Length 56 mm. Exquisitely marked with series of dark, large, elongated spots, broad temporal bands, barred hinbs ; tga and bre ast mottled with dark brown, with the characteristic paired Y-markings. CHIROMANTIS. 6. CHIROMANTIS XERAMPELINA Ptrs. Ex-G.E.A. 1 specimen, probably a female. Length 66 mim. 7. CHIROMANTIS PETERSII Blgr. Dodoma. Ex-G.H.A. 3 specimens. Length 50, 55, and 59 mm. Inner fingers with a mere rudiment of web, outer differing from those of the type in being j instead of 3 webbed. PHRYNOBATRACHUS. 8. PHRYNOBATRACHUS NATALENSIS Smith. Kagiado. Nairobi. Longido West. Morogoro. 29 specimens. Average length of adults 30 mm. An extremely variable species. ‘Toes sometimes 3 instead of, 4 webbed. Skin perfectly smooth or extremely warty; all male specimens from Nairobi are of the latter description, but three females from the same locality are smooth. A wide white vertebral streak in three specimens. 9. PHRYNOBATRACHUS RANOIDES Bler. Morogoro. Ex-G.H.A. 2 specimens. Length of larger 33 mm. 10. PHRYNOBATRACHUS BOULENGERI de Witte. Morogoro. Duthumi. Gonya. Tulo. Ex-G.Hi.A. 61 specimens. Average length of adults 26 mm. Skin perfectly smooth or warty. Markings variable, three forms with and one without vertebral bands; five specimens have a very broad vertebral band, two havea broad one, and two have a fine white vetebral line. These four forms are shown in figures of P. natalensis *, P. Z.S. 1907, pl. xxi. * Boulenger, “Second Report on the Batrachians and Reptiles collected in South Africa by Mr. C. H. B. Grant. 414 MISS JOAN B. PROCTER ON TAILLESS 11. ARTHROLEPTIS WAHLBERGII Gthr. Morogoro. Amani. 2 specimens. Length 25 mm. Dark without distinct markings; dermal ridge along the vertebral line. Back of ene specimen covered with minute tubercles. 12. ARTHROLEPTIS WHYTII Bler. 1 specimen. Length 35 mm. Pale brown above, with a dark subtriangular marking between the eyes; a fine dermal ridge along the vertebral line. 13. ARTHROLEPTIS MINUTUS Bler. Kenia Forest. Nairobi. 33 specimens. Average length 17 mm.; large specimens 22 mm. The majority of the specimens are dark olive, without distinct markings; four have a fine, and two a broad white vertebral line. 14. ARTHROLEPTIS STENODACTYLUS Pfeff. Morogoro, Duthumi. Ex-G.K.A. 16 specimens. Average length of adults 32 mm. This species, described by Pfeffer * from a single female from Kihengo, is new to the collection of the British Museum. Text-figure 1. Hand of male and female Arthroleptis stenodactylus. Underside, X 2. Head broader than long; canthus rostralis obtuse; loreal region oblique, concave; interorbital width greater than that of upper eyelid ; tongue with a conical papilla; tympanum distinct, usually 4 diameter of eye. First and second fingers equal in length, third 13 times length of second in females, 12 to 2 times in males; tips of fingers and toes somewhat swollen but not * Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anst. x. (1893) Taf. i. fig. 11. BATRACHIANS FROM EASY AFRICA. 415 dilated ; toes with a rudiment of web; inner metatarsal tubercle as long as or slightly shorter than inner toe; no outer tubercle. Tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the eye or slightly beyond; length of tibia 3 times its breadth, twice in length of body. Skin smooth. Reddish brown or olive-grey above, with the dark vertebral markings characteristic of the genus; a fine white vertebral line in five, a broad one in three specimens ;_ barred limbs; whitish beneath, sometimes with a dark throat; a few spots on lower lip. A fine linear vertebral ridge in two specimens. Males with an internal vocal sac. RAPPIA *, 15. RapprA GRANULATA Bler. Ex-G.E.A. 6 young. 16. RAPPIA PUNCTICULATA Pfeff. Morogoro. Ex-G.H.A. 7 specimens. Length 22 to 32 mm, Text-figure 2. Rappia puncticulata. Nat. size. Interorbital space varies from 14 to 2 times width of upper eyelid. lingers with a rudimentary web, toes ?# webbed. Length of tibia 24+ to 23 times its breadth, 3} to 4 times in, length of body. The specimen figured by Pfeffer is of a uniform colouring, * “ Rappia, sp. A Tree Frog was found impaled on the spike of an Aloe, in company with sundry grasshoppers which formed the larder ot a Shrike.”— A. LovERIDGE, Field Notes. € 416 MISS JOAN B. PROCTER ON TAILLESS with a light dark-edged lateral band passing round snout and ending on the sacral region; it has also a fine dark vertebral line. Several young in the British Museum collection have similar markings, but the seven noted above differ considerably. In these the light lateral band is heavily bordered with black, the enclosed dorsal area and upper surfaces of tibia, tarsus, and forearm irregularly spotted with black or dark grey; they have also a large white dark-edged spot on the heel. The markings of the smallest specimen are so light and indistinct that it more resembles the type specimen. 17. RAPPIA PLATYRHINUS, Sp. n. Nairobi. ] specimen, ¢. Head small, broad as long, moderately depressed ; snout flat, markedly truncate, as long as diameter of eye; canthus rostralis feebly marked ; loreal region oblique, concave; nostril at end of Text-figure 3. Rappia platyrhinus. Nat. size. snout; interorbital space nearly twice width of upper eyelid ; tympanum hidden. Fingers long, z webbed, second longer than first; toes slender, fully webbed; subarticular tubercles soft, flat, small; inner metatarsal tubercle also soft and small; no outer one. Tibio-tarsal articulation reaches middle of eye; length of tibia 5 times its breadth, 13 times in length from snout to vent. Skin smooth above, granular below. Uniformly brownish-grey above, finely speckled with black pigment cells which are slightly concentrated along canthus rostralis. Male with internal vocal sac and adhesive subgular dise, BATRACHIANS FROM EAST AFRICA. 7b Lg Measurements ir millimetres. SMO UI UORVEITOM 75. i., intestine; po., postanal papilla; pr., preanal papilla; sp., long spicule ; spi., short spicule. Female 30-43 mm. in length; the body attains a thickness of 0-9 mm. Anus about 0:1 mm. from the rounded extremity. The vulva projects slightly from the ventral surface, 0°35 mm. from the cephalic end. Vagina short, 0-9-1 mm. in length. Oviparous. Eggs thick-shelled, measuring 0:045-0:05 x 0:03 mm. . DIPLOTRIZNA FLABELLATA (v. Linstow, 1888). My material includes a single specimen of a female Diplotriena from the body-cavity of the Red Bird of Paradise, Paradisea rubra. I take it to be the same species as LD. flabellata described from Paradisea apoda by v. Linstow in the ‘ Challenger’ Reports (1888). Specific diaqnosis.—Iiplotriena : Body short, more attenuated anteriorly than posteriorly. WORMS FROM MAMMALS AND BIRDS. 503 Cuticle transversely ringed. QCisophagus not divided into two regions, harrow anteriorly, increasing in width gradually behind the nerve-ring, the latter 0°3 mm. from the oral end. Trident 0°25 mm, long, its antevior stem truncated. Text-figure 11. ‘ 1 ' t Diplotriena flabellata (v. Linst.). Lateral view of anterior extremity of female. x 120, Lettering as in the preceding text-figures. Female 44 mm. in length, with a maximum thickness of about 1 mm. Caudal extremity rounded, broader than the head, Position of anus not ascertained. Vulva prominent, 0°6 mm. from the anterior extremity ; the thick muscular vagina has a length of 2 mm. Oviparous. Eggs thick-shelled, 0°04—-0:045 mm. x 0°25 mm, INCERTA SEDIS. FILARIA ARAMIDIS, sp. 0. A single specimen of this species was obtained from the leg- muscles of the Cayenne Rail, Aramides cayennensis. In the absence of the male it is impossible to place the form in its HOA PROF. C. L. BOULENGER ON FILARIID proper systematic position ; I have, therefore, retained it in the genus Milaria s.1. In some respects it appears allied to certain species known from the muscular system of Mammals, e. g. Filaria scapiceps Leidy (Hall, 1916). Specific diagnosis.—Kilaria s.1.: Body comparatively short and thick, tapering nearly equally at both extremities. Cuticle finely striated transversely. Text-figure 12. Filaria aramidis, sp.n. A. Anterior extremity ; B. Posterior extremity. Lateral view. > 75. Lettering as in the preceding text-figures. ov., loop of ovary. Head rounded, bearing four very small submedian papillee ; lateral papille not seen. (Esophagus narrow and simple, 2.¢., not divided into anterior and posterior regions. Nerve-ring close to the anterior extremity. Female 25 mm. in length, with a maximum breadth of about lmm. Width of nead 0°2 mm. The csophagus has a length of 1-lmm. Posterior extremity rounded ; position of anus uncertain, about 0°15 mm, from the end of the body. WORMS FROM MAMMALS AND BIRDS. 5O5 Vulva 0°82 mm. from the anterior extremity; the slender vagina is directed posteriorly and has a length of 2°4 mm. Kegs thin-shelled, measuring 0:03-0:035 x 0°02 mm. BIBLIOGRAPHY. Dissine, K. M. (1861).—‘“ Revision der Nematoden.” Sitz- ungsber. d. Kais. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xi. 1860, pp. 595-736. Haut, M. C. (1916).—“ Nematode Parasites of Mammals of the Orders Rodentia, Lagomorpha, and Hyracoidea.” Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. Washington, |. pp. 1-258. Henry et Ozovux (1909).—“ La Filaire du Foudi.” Bull. Soc. Path. Exot. Paris, 1. pp. 544-547, Liystrow, O. von (1888).-—‘‘ Report on the Entozoa collected by H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ during the years 1873-6.” ‘Challenger’ Reports, xx1u. pp. 1-18. —— (1891).—‘“* Ueber Filaria tricuspis und die Blutfilarien der Krihen.” Arch. f. Naturg. Berlin, Ivii. p. 292. ~—— (1899).—*‘ Nematoden aus der Berliner Zoologischen Samm- lung.” Mitt. a.d. Zool. Samml. d. Mus. f. Naturk. Berlin, i, (2), pp. 1-28. Primer, H. G. (1915).-—“ Report on the deaths which occurred in the Zoological Gardens during 1914, together with a list of the blood-parasites found during the year.” Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1), pp. 1238-130. Ratuiiet, A., Henry, A., et Lancrron, M. (1912).—‘‘ Le genre Acanthocheilonema Cobbold, et les Filaires péritonéales des Carnivores.” Bull. Soc. Path. Exot. Paris, v. pp. 392-395. Srossico, M. (1897).—‘“ Filarie e Spiroptere. Lavoro Mono- grafico.” Bull. Soc. adriat. di sci. nat. Trieste, xviii. pp 11-162 Proc. Zoou. Soc,—1920 No. XXXIV, 34 A Au AIM Lhe WORLD a eRe) Me ee GST kane i | td Ui 4 ey ON THE FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES, 5O7 32. The Fauna of the African Lakes: a Study in Compara- tive Limnology with special reference to Tanganyika. By Wiuuiam A. Cunninaton, M.A., Ph.D., F.Z.S. ‘Received May 31, 1920: Read November 16, 1920. ] (Text-figures 1-2.) InDEx. Page EESCOMCATOOUIVEY inctesccnct sachs teaine teeter ore ke a OUT General Introduction .......... Miia ee Cee Le Systematic Account and iste of Spies PORES Tris yt 5Y ie, General Discussion and Conclusions ...,.............. 592 SRA sass gd seuss abs sci. Maeedeapeeeeans 14009 JE OABYOVSAG O10 ew ae ae Bf Het eet ORO REE cs PRET gH 1. HISTORICAL SURVEY. Ever since the days of the great African explorers and their quest of the sources of the Nile, there has existed a certain fascination about the big lakes of Central Africa. While the scientific world was at first concerned principally with the geography of the heart of the continent, opportunity soon offered of learning something of the organisms which live in the vast inland seas, and it then became evident that matters of no little biological interest were involved. It is the object of this paper to deal in comparative fashion with the animals of the principal lakes, and since Tanganyika* holds a unique position as regards its fauna, a somewhat detailed account of its zoological exploration seems fitting, as it will afford both an introduction to a study of the lakes and an enumeration of certain outstanding facts. Little more than sixty years have passed away since Burton and Speke, the first Europeans to penetrate to Lake Tanganyika, reached the shores of this big inland sea. ‘Their expedition, after encountering numberless hardships, arrived at the lake between the Malagarasi River and Ujiji on the thirteenth of February, 1858. Although little was done in the way of exploring Tan- ganyika, Burton described, with a surprising degree of accuracy, various facts concerning it which he learned from the Arabs and natives, while Speke, on his return, brought certain shells from the lake shore, which came into the possession of the British Museum. * Some years ago I called attention to the orthography of the name ‘Tanganyika,’ advocating the adoption of the spelling ‘'Tanganika’ by English writers (69). The arguments advanced in favour of the change have not lost their force, and still seem worthy of consideration. As there is no indication that writers in this country are prepared to accept the moditication, I adhere reluctantly to the old form. 34% D08 DR. W. A. GCUNNINGTON ON THE It was in the examination of these shells that the unusual interest which still attaches to certain forms of life found in Tanganyika had its origin. 8. P. Woodward, who reported on the collection, was struck by the fact that some of the shells were curiously marine in appearance, Of one of them, which he named Lithoglyphus zonatus (now known as Spekia zonata), he said (205, p. 348) that it so much resembled a Nerita or Calyptrea that it might have been taken for a sea-snell. Of another, he remarks that “Its colour, solidity, and tuberculated ribs give it much the appearance of a small marine whelk (Vassa).” At the time, these opinions attracted little attention, although the matter was destined to come into prominence at a later date. Some twenty years later-—_in 1878—there was established the first settlement of Kuropeans on the shores of Tanganyika, when August of that year. With praiseworthy public spirit, the Directors of the Society had given instructions that the gathering of scientific information should be considered among the duties of this pioneer expedition, and thus it is that E. C. Hore (101), a member of the party, was the first to attempt a systematic collection of the forms of life occurring in the lake. While the collections since made by trained naturalists have, of course, added very largely to the knowledge of the fauna and flora, the forms obtained by Hore embraced many different groups, and afforded the first comprehensive glimpse of the organisms which the lake contains. This English Mission was very shortly followed by the estab- lishment of a French Catholic Mission, and it should be noted that these White Fathers of Algeria have also been instrumental in gathering information, and in particular have made large collections of shells which have been described in later years by French conchologists. At the end of 1879, Tanganyika was visited by Joseph Thomson. Collections of shells made by Hore and Thomson were reported on by Edgar Smith in 1880 and 1881 (159, 160, 161), and he also had occasion to remark on the marine appearance of some of them. ‘This matter being brought to the front once more, Thomson put forward the view (190, vol. ii. p. 85) that the water of the lake had probably been saline until recent geological times, when it became freshened through circulation and outflow to the Congo (compare also 191, where he goes further, and suggests the origin of the lake from a former sea occupying the Congo basin). The discovery of meduse by Bohm (114), a German explorer who crossed Tanganyika in 1883, only emphasised matters and laid stress on the supposed marine character of the lake fauna, since, with few exceptions, such organisms are confined to the ocean. Von Wissman (204, p. 253) confirmed this discovery when sailing on the lake in 1887, and a few years later, F. L. M. Moir, the manager of a British trading company, undertook to FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 509 obtain specimens of these meduse properly prepared for scientific investigation. This valuable material, on its arrival in England at the Pond of 1892, was placed for examination in the hands of R. T. Gunther of Oxford. | It was Giinther who first put forward a detailed theory to account for the presence in a central African lake of animals with apparently marine affinities. In his report on the Tan- ganyika medusa he suggested (95, p. 289) that if at some early period the interior of Africa stood at a much lower level, with the Atlantic Ocean extending over the Congo basin and the lake existing as an arm of the sea, it would then be possible readily to explain the presence in it both of the medusa and the remark- able molluscan forms. As the lake became separated from the sea, so the salinity of the water would tend to decrease if 1t were supplied with inflowing rivers and found an outlet through which to carry away the salt. Since the problem presented by Tanganyika had now become so interesting and definite, it seemed very desirable that the lake fauna should be investigated upon the spot by some trained zoologist. The matter was taken up by Ray Lankester, who, with the help of others interested in the question, obtained the necessary grants from the Royal Society and organised the First Tanganyika Expedition. This was put in charge of J. E. S. Moore of the Royal College of Science, who from that time onwards contributed largely to the knowledge of the lakes of Jentral Africa. The expedition left England in the autumn of 1895, and Lake Shirwa was visited as well as Nyasa, while Moore spent several months on the shores of Tanganyika. As a result of this journey, the original problem seemed far from being solved, for the expedi- tion brought matters to light which only made the lake appeax more remarkable. Many strange and unique animal forms were collected, certain of which were thought to show marine aflinities, while the majority were new to science. The collection included a number of types not unexpected in a tropical lake; only a proportion of the fauna exhibiting the unusual features to which reference has been made. Moreover, although the expedition had visited Nyasa and Shirwa, in neither of these lakes had marine- like forms been found resembling those of Tanganyika. Through a study of the newly acquired material, especially the anatomy of certain of the molluscs, Moore arrived at the conclu- sion that the forms exhibiting a marine appearance could not be compared directly with any marine types of the present day, but vather possessed archaic and generalised characters which sug- gested that they were the relics of a marine fauna of a previous age. Further, he considered that some of the Tanganyika shells offered a strong resemblance to certain marine Jurassic fossils, in particular those of the Inferior Oolite of the Anglo-Norman basin. Taking this as evidence of the period from which these remarkable living forms had been derived, Moore propounded 510 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE once more a theory of the former connection of Lake Tanganyika with the sea, asserting that this connection existed in Jurassic times (131). The discoveries of the First Tanganyika Expedition, while stimulating interest in the faunas of the African lakes, only emphasised the need for further information. It was still to be determined whether any of the other big lakes contained organisms with a marine appearance, and it was very desirable that more should be learned of the geology of the Tanganyika basin, as having a direct bearing on the question of a former con- nection with the sea. Ray Lankester, therefore, took the initiative once more, formed a comiittee of scientific men interested in the subject, and organised a second expedition. In view of the geological and geographical work to. be undertaken, a liberal grant was made by the Royal Geographical Society, and Moore was accompanied by Malcolm Fergusson as surveyor and geologist. The Second Tanganyika Expedition (136) left England in 1899, and after proceeding up lakes Nyasa and Tanganyika, visited Kivu, Edward Nyanza*, and Albert Nyanza before returning to the coast by way of the Victoria Nyanza. An examination of the collections obtained in the latter lakes only laid additional stress on the unique nature of Tanganyika, for in none were found animals suggestive of the sea. Indeed, the already long list of forms found only in Tanganyika was aug- mented by the expedition, more particularly as regards the fish. Certain of the little-known regions between Tanganyika and the Albert Nyanza were mapped, and considerable attention was paid to the study of the geology of this district as well as that of the Tanganyika basin. Not long after the return of the expedition, Moore published a volume entitled ‘The Tanganyika Problem” (137), in which he dealt at some length with the question which had so occupied his attention. A large amount of new informa- tion was given in this work. It treated in a comprehensive manner the physiography and geology of the part of Africa con- cerned, and besides giving a complete review of the fauna of Tanganyika as then known, discussed the origin of fresh-water faunas in relation to the matter. While a great deal of information bearing on the geology and geography of the lake regions had been obtained, and extensive collections had afforded a knowledge of the fauna of Tanganyika, the flora of the lake had not been dealt with as it deserved. To those who had been impressed with the marine characteristics of certain animals living in the lake, it appeared quite conceivable that when the flora came to be investigated, plants equally remarkable and equally suggestive of marine affinities would be discovered. If, for example, specimens of the red Algz so charac- * The lake, formerly known as the Albert Edward Nyanza, is always referred to in this paper 4s Edward Nyanza or Lake Kdward. ‘The change of name was approved by the late King Edward, and should be universally adopted in order to avoid confusion with the Albert Nyanza or Lake Albert (ef. 55, p. 129). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 5I1 teristic of the ocean were to be found, this would afford very valuable evidence concerning the ancient history of the lake. Jt was with this end in view that a Third Tanganyika Expe- dition (68) was organised by the Committee, with the conduct of which I had the honour of being entrusted. One of the principal objects of this expedition was therefore to make a careful collec- tion of the water plants of Tanganyika, at the same time collecting in Nyasa, with the idea of affording a comparison with a more normal African fresh-water lake. My instructions also provided “ That other groups of organisms likely to throw hght on the Tanganyika Problem, and especially fishes, shall not be neglected.”’ Including observations en various points of interest, the work before the expedition was thus sufficiently extensive, although matters of geology and geography were outside the field of enquiry. I left England in the spring of 1904, proceeding via the Zambezi and Shiré rivers to Lake Nyasa, w here e a few weeks were spent in collecting. My stay on and around Tanganyika lasted about eight months, which were fully occupied in making collec- tions and observations as far as facilities offered. Returning to the coast by way of the Victoria Nyanza, an opportunity was afforded of obtaining representatives of the flora of that lake for purposes of comparison with the plants collected in Nyasa and Tanganyika. It may at once be stated that the flora of Tanganyika fails to exhibit quite the remarkable features which some had expected it to show. As regards the higher aquatic plants, a comparison of the species from Tanganyika with those from Nyasa and Victoria Nyanza does not throw any light on the hypothesis of a marine origin for Tanganyika. The “Frosh: water Algze of the lake, however, have proved to be a strange and interesting assembly, a considerable number being peculiar to ‘Tanganyika while several show undoubted marine affinities. The lower forms of vegetable life which occur thus tend to confirm the unique biological nature of the lake. On the zoological side, my collections have added not a little to the number of forms known from the lakes, the results appearing as a series of memoirs principally in the Proceedings of the Zoological Society. For the first time systematic tow- nettings were made in ‘Tanganyika on an extensive scale, and as a result, detailed infor mation is to hand about whole eroups of organisms, only the bare existence of which in the lake was known before. ‘Thus reports have now been published on the smaller Crustacea (Copepoda and Ostracoda) as well as on the Rotifera, while in addition the groups Branchiura and Hydrach- nida are new records from the lake. In completing this brief review of the zoological exploration of Tanganyika, it is only necessary to refer to the Belgian expe- dition to that lake and to Lake Mwero undertaken by the late Louis Stappers, This expedition visited Tanganyika in 1912- by DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE 1913, and brought back valuable information concerning the ‘depth of the lake and the salinity of its water, as well as repre- sentatives of its fauna. kivuensis Bue a K Ree TAGCUMG oo... 0 scenes E a ec) » fergussonit ....... Senet oe ‘fold Cc 0 E§ oo a) COWATOINNUS .......,.... ae E i CUNVSHOMIUS —............ E » Yhoadesu see iis E se platy MMAMWS ..2......... i eC ee E 3 JOMTIBTONM .. ..... 2... E woe trimacwiabus ......... i P vist las bu Cie: P i; © Paludinosms ............ P » thikensis ee A ie PS caghto be AS » wminchini E » tetraspilus K » sexradiatus on 10) by MONT MNOS foc ce vee eee es aes K » apleurogramma ...... 9 » innocens te Se P , Be MECOMOMLEUTA. <2 066... E sy UTOSTICNMA’......... E » arcislongee we} K PPUMMETIMNCC Ss 556.5. hls. fe P| ee mispilopleura ......... Pr || » doggetti ae E » lafukiensis E » magdalenz bane E Barilius microcephalus......... ee EK ne + MIMOOTN oeecce css eka cesses iP; P be tanganice wie K sh microlepis ............ E Engraulicypris sardella...... pe 10) - argenteus... a E rs minutus ...... E Family S1LuRID&. Clarias anguillaris................ se PPPOE Perc ones en E » Mmossambicus ......... Ma eee RU PHUAIZBE Ne reteset ove site P Ve » carsoniil Beate: ue, dec » submarginatus fe ued » locephalus wae P és ee UCTS ee ee 1D PLY CUMLOM NS cx a6 sect. esos ans ae i Dinotopterus cunningtoni Gen. E Eutropius niloticus ............ we le RE SR ats P Schilbe mystus Other parts of the world. Nile. Upper Shiré R. Victoria Nile . Abyssinia to fambeai. KE. Africa. Rusisi R. Victoria Nile. Zambezi, Angola. i. Africa. K. Africa, Natal, K. Africa. (Angola. Uellé R. Malawa R. E. Africa. Nile. Abyssinia. Upper Shiré. Upper Shiré. Nile, Chad. Abyssinia, E. A‘rica. Syria, Nile, W. Africa. Uganda. Cameroon, Ituri kh, Ubanghi R. Uganda. Nile, Senegal. Nile, Tropical Africa. § Not actually recorded from the lake itself. || This record: needs confirmation. —~ 026 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE ; Tangan- Victoria Albert Edward jy... Other parts of Name of See yika. Nyanza. ~*7** Nyanza. Nyanza. the world. Bagrus bayad 1 ar ae 1B Nile, W. Africa. fs ORIEN bal Ts wee hvala ces.” ¥ ae iP; E. Africa. Bnd | ACLOCIIAG, hositseanietopecen axe Je iv Nile. » degeni i ey E wpa MCTIGIONALlIS ........4.... me E§ Upper Shiré R. Chrysichthys sianenna. E os CAE LIQe neces E x cranchii ......... 12 Congo. 5 stappersil ...... E ms myriodon ...... y * @randis 061. 4. 1D) br achynema EK Phy lonemus typus Gen. E Amphilius platychir. .......... 2 iP = K. Africa. Auchenoglanis occidentalis ... P P Nile, W. Africa. Synodontis granulosus ......... E A dhonti me aD) *, zambesensis ...... fs P Zambezi, E. Africa. * melanostictus... iP Zambezi, Bangweolo, ri multipunctatus ... E [ Mwero. 5 VICE OMM Ce memesere kee i Malawa R. rs afro-fischeri ...... D TUTICA pelea eons ets Boe sh 12 Nile, W. Africa. Malapterurus ‘electricus ee P Pp Nile, Tropical Africa. Family CyPRINODONTID. Fundulus teniopygus ......... ae KE. Africa. Haplochilus dhonti ............ E§ Lukuga R. %; PUMAUSe eee ea 1g johnstonii ...... aft P§ Nyasaland, Zululand. Lamprichthys tanganicanus.. Gen. EK Family SERRANIDZ. Lates niloticus cee As Nile, W. Africa. a) UMMICTOLE PIS Aten aes E Sy aM OUStUTOMSe a. eee E Luciolates stappersil ......... Gen. E i NOVA OTe. ne.cecee mate EK Family CicHLipz +. Hnlapiatshinarial. a ey eee P Zambezi. - mossambiea ............ At P§ = .. #. Africa, Natal. pag) A LILOUICAl oa cnt io eee re ae P iP P Syria, Nile, W. Africa. > eduardiana nee P§ P§ E. Africa. Ss varia bil isn ao eee ee es Victoria Nile. 4 auromarzinata’..(....,” E > squamipmnis 2... oa E ... Upper Shiré. 3 Melanopleura “.--. eg 1g P W. Africa, Zambezi, sy, HIDUTLONT = een ee ig P { Zululand. »» adolphi- frederici ...... i E 28 pCallliipterawe ee Ve Zambezi. 55 williamsiitseel ee of E Sh wpe liOUli aa cee men sat. csr nee E § Not actually recorded from the lake itself. + Quite recently, and since this section on the Pisces was completed, an important paper dealing with the classification of the Cichlids has been published by Regan (145). Entering on a revision of the fishes of this group, he deals in this introductory article with the Tanganyika genera. Since he has not yet completed his investigations, I have not attempted to revise my list in accordance with his views, and merely call attention to the paper in this place. It is clear that in this tabulation I am compelled to conform to the standard originally adopted, which cannot be brought into line with the suggestions put forth in the above-mentioned preliminary essay. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. Name of Species. WilapiaPerGel? .......0.... 60.60. 5 ~ bimmilior 3 pallida 3 pappenheini ......... 2 Sli st » nhubila PMU RMCTODS hs... ‘| QS ON ON » bayoni » Migricans Oe Uo ai 74S ea on CVOSCRIED, oooh Se eee oy) | PLCUTORAAT............. » johnstonii 3 «6 «tebraSHISMA .....:..... ie a0" er » lateristriga » lethrinus + rostrata aster PO OMOEWIAIT a 50. 5.5 scent » Mmacrophthalma ...... we Orevis » mornata Syaeee “3 trematocephala ...... » | beops » grandoculis Petrochromis tanganice ...... 3 andersonil ...... i polyodon ...... . PYVSSOO cs fasciolatus...... 29 Cunningtonia longiventralis.. Simochromis diagramma...... Tropheus WNOOril ............... 55 WMNNECHENS /o. cess... Asprotilapia leptura............ Lobochilotes Jabiatus ......... Docimodus johnstonii ......... Haplochromis hivingstonii MEMUSUUS «ici cs cuss 29 mn Sehubotz! ”.........: - nuchisquamulatus » jeanneli 3 angustifrous ...... ie mshimaeli: .....s 1.5. ms PODER so. sees cuca s SUP ge = percoides............ Hs graueri ie strigigena ......... - desfontainesii sg cA URE RUC ee Paratilapia gest¥r- ae wee Ee Atiicas 5) ONC! (en a a ee ey her P ae o ... KE. Africa. & PULPULENS.. 2.00... £% se iG ter a vai be Adrica. - schweinfurthi ...... nee EK -s sinistrorsus ......... P - ae eo oe ... . Africa. *Leroya bourguignati .....,... Gen. E Family HypRosiip™. *Spekia zonata 4 oar tana, ts) Ne) O) *Tanganyicia rufofilosa ......... Gen. E *Rumella neritinoides .......... Gen. E *Stanleya giraudi ................ Gen. E _ rotundata .........+.. K = smartiiana ' 2.05.3...) {) *Limnotrochus thomsoni ....... Gen. E MOhytra kirkit..................:... Gen. EB ithynia-alberti. ~............<. ze ae n P i o umerdsar .....05.04. ee Ae. Ie Pe P 55 multisulcata ......... E rs SUM VT ok, oats tins = Bs E a WALTEEN) cocc sec... e ec be E *Syrnolopsis carinifera ..,....., Gen, E BS WaGustris™ .,.0.2... E + Additional particulars and bibliographies will be found in von Martens’ account of Kast African forms (116) and Smith’s review of the Mollusca of Tanganyika (170). There have been but few additions since the dates of these ;apers, * Genera described.as thalassoid, 544 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE : Tangan- Victoria : Albert Edward Meme onienecc:) yika. Nyanza. hese, Nyanza. Nyanza. — eee TIARIDA. Tiara || admirabilis E oy ATGUACUIA wees crcl = ses E - iTICINCTA) So. .nmiselee 343 E a MOGICINCHA | sx = eee -o- Pp > nyassana ( * PereTAciis| o..-.ce-- es ER a polymorpha ........-++. 3 E br pupiformis q nf simonsi . ee oe iE Re tanganyicensis A K , tuberculata iP Ik ip P p P turritispira ia i ¥Giraudia foai . hee Gen. E - erandidieriana steed K a horei EK 5 lavigeriana ......... E i. AO INOL, Ane eae reece E ‘, preclara E ss quintana E tanganyicensis ...... EK *Lechaptoisia ponsonbyl ...... Gen. E *Burtonilla terebriformis ...... Gen. E *Baizea giraudi sak setonis ee T Ey a leucoraphe 3. .-cenece EK *Anceya admirabilis Gen. E 0 APPA coe hy ace ae K , Tufocincta E *Bythoceras iridescens ......... Gen. E minor. E *Paramelania bridouxi ......... Gen. E ‘3 crassigranulata .. EK s damoni ¢:..-:... i *Joubertia baizeana Gen. E — Spimlosa jcedace eee KE st Stamleyana icscea.. 266 0) *Lavigeria callista ............... Gen. E i combsag tench EK uf Coronata aee.n ee E a diademata ......... E grandis nee 1D a joubertis.::)05 eee E Ke pereximia ............ E as ruellaniana -......... EK *Randabelia catoxia ............ Gen. E x hamyana ee. EK *EKdgaria bourguignati ......... Gen. E 3 Crassilabrisi.. ssa E » lechaptoisi E nassa ; EK 55 paucicostata ......... E is reymondi E a singularis E . tiarella E variabilis .. E *Hirthia globosa.. Gen. EK ¥ littorina EK Family TrPHoBitpm, *Tiphobia horei Gen. E * Bathanalia howesi Gen. E Other parts of the world. Angoni Land. India, Malay Pen. * Genera described as thalassoid, | Olim Melania, FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. HAD Tangan- Victoria Name of Species. yika. Nyanza. Nyasa. Nyanza. Nyanza. the world. Family LiIMNHIDZ. Limnea natalensis iP P Pp Natal. 35 ny ansee si ae K 3) MGdussuMme ......... aS P Me .. EE, Africa. Tsidora coulboisi cae e EK . Jor ee P of Kgypt, Natal, 5 nyassana a ee E [Angola. Pe TAMOMOOM — i... es 5c. EK CCE ne ee E ae K. Africa, 1 SUECINEOIGES ........... he EK py uetraMSVErSAlIS «..,.<....05 K PPR M5) sp cede ses ts ves K Physopsis africana wf P K, Africa, Natal, oe ovoidea Tae: ee P K. Africa. a8 fangamyicez ......... E Family PLANORBID&. Planorbis adowensis ............ de ee x Abyssinia. a, alexandrina ......... Ve a RP uae Egypt. OR Ba K fe bridouxiana ......... iE » choanomphalus P Ec Is? is crawfordi .. i aus a ... Cape Colony. a gibbonsi a P P eee acY (Be Afries, - 1S EK ‘5 lavigerianus ......... { * monceti ..... .. q eo ee oo y e sudanmicus ......... Be 1 i P .. RK. Nile. zs WICHOTIGD is. vce. .vos ves q Family ANCYLID&. Ancylus stuhlmanni_......... os E » tanganyicensis ...... EK Seamus tenet. aatex tc) LE TP: dP: 6 P. ay 6 P. DN ey BBEMCTE, Scie dcacdcsisianes 2M LLP, IP: vP, 6 P. 6 P. QE (35) TORE PECIES .0...45.2; ees he, E Burtonia bourguignati ...... Gen. E . tanganyicensis ... i Brazzea anceyl:.:............ Gen. E Family MureLip2. Miutela alata onrse.. na oh eee ais » E » bourguignati .. ... oe P sp ce a EK. Africa. ae WOXOLICA 27,4 anes iP it Pe re a N. Africa. ee milogiea<: os. nso ae a LA i P Egypt. se) A SOLENTIOVIMIS) 222-6 i 3 subdiaphana 2 .2.-a. ne E Pleiodomspekel: ..os.+..0-0e: y Spatha anceyd cet eee a fe E o3 DIOV ORI Koos. eacenacn Memeo. Pp a: en a K. Africa. a kirks eer bat Be E 5 » Myassaensis ....-.... ae E Fie URAD OZ laser scenes es E Moncetia anceyi_ ............ Gen. E Family ATHERIIDA. Aitheria elliptica ............ iP P hee ee Ae Tropical Africa. Satamiliesipn. ate ee 4, 5 3 4 4 di wenera “noc. 6e sence oH, 6.P: Male 4P. Aisles 4P, (8) 53 species ............... I4H,3P. 12E,6P. 7E,6P- 2EH,6P.. 2 oP: (17) (18) (13) (8) (5) The table of distribution in this case displays no outstanding features such as are to be seen in other groups. The not incon- siderable total of 53 species is reached, but the details of distribution have, in most cases, little significance. Firstly, it may be noted that the vast majority of the forms (there are only 4 exceptions) are on record merely from a single lake ; secondly, it is interesting to find that no species in the whole list occurs outside the African continent. . Victovia Nyanza, as already stated, exhibits the largest number of types, viz. 18, but is closely followed by Tanganyika with 17 and by Nyassa with 13. Lakes Albert and Edward follow in the usual order with 8 and 5 species respectively. A fact which emerges from an examination of these figures, is that the two lakes with the highest totals only contain about one-third of the number of species enumerated (Lake Victoria 33°9 per cent., Tanganyika 32 per cent.). Contrasted with this, the Gasteropoda of Tanganyika constitute over 63 per cent. of the total number of Gasteropods enumerated, while in other groups the corres- ponding figures for Tanganyika reach 80 per cent. and even 90 per cent. (Branchiura). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES, 553 Tanganyika with 14 endemics out of 17 leads the way as far as endemic Lamellibranclis are concerned (82 per cent.), Lake Victoria coming near with 12 out of 18 (66 per cent.), while Nyasa has 7 out of 13 (54 per cent.). Even the smaller lakes have each two endemic species. It will be observed that the proportion of peculiar forms is very high in this group also ; indeed, in some instances it is higher than in the case of the Gasteropods. Hndemic genera are known only from Tanganyika, three being retained in the lst out of a larger number distin- guished by Bourguignat. The genus Moncetia of Bourguignat, inserted in the table as endemic, though not definitely rejected, is nevertheless considered by Smith as ‘only doubtfully separable from Spatha (170, p. 101). A brief survey of the list of species will suffice. Corbicula radiata, a representative of the Cyrenide, is the only form which is on record from all the lakes concerned. It is a widely distii- buted African type, being known from other parts of Hast Africa and from the valley of the Nile-—The family Spheriide is represented by the genera Spherium and Hupera. It is some- what strange that the four species enumerated are all found in Lake Victoria, but not in Tanganyika or Nyasa. Spheervune NYANZE 1S ipa n from Victoria, Albert and Edward Nyanzas, as well as from other parts of the continent, but it is associated in Victoria with two additional species which are peculiar to that lake. Hupera parasitica, which is a Nilotic and N. African form, is at present only recorded from Victoria Nyanza.—In the family Unionide there are associated with the extensive genus Unio itself only the two closely related genera Burtonia and Lrazzca, which are confined to Tanganyika. No fewer than 29 different species of Unio are enumerated, not one of which is on record from more than a single lake. ‘Tanganyika exhibits 8 and Lake Victoria 7 endemic species. Of 7 types in Nyasa 3 are endemic ; of 5in Lake Albert 2 are endemic. Lake Edward, lastly, contains 2 forms, both of which are endemic.—In addition to three genera of wider distribution, the Mutelide contains the doubtful genus MZoncetia, to which reference has already been made—a genus described as peculiar to Tanganyika. J/utela nilotica 1s the only species in the family recorded from more than one lake, it being found in both Albert and Edward Nyanza as well as in EKegypt. Each of the bigger lakes exhibits a single endemic form of Jutela. The genus Pleiodon is only represented by P. spekei, confined to Tanganyika—it is one of the species named by Woodward from Speke’s original collection. Spatha is unrepresented in Tanganyika and the ‘smaller lakes, but a series of three endemic forms is known in Nyasa. —lastly, Mtheria elluptica, sole representative of the A‘theriide, occurs in ‘Tangan- yika and Victoria Nyanza, but has not been recorded from the other lakes, although it 1s widely distributed in Tropical Africa. While a considerably smaller number of forms is involved here than was the case with the Gasteropods, there is yet an indication Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1920, No. XXX VII. Beer 504 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE that fewer species occur in the smaller than in the larger lakes. With the exception of Tanganyika, the lakes are arranged in order of size, and the figures for the species are as follows :— Tanganyika 17, Victoria 18, Nyasa 13, Albert 8, and Edward 5. Regarding ‘Tang ganyika as a lake apart, the remaining figures fit ip satisfactorily with this suggestion. The features which are characteristic of the different lakes may be summed up in a few words. ‘Tanganyika alone contains endemic Lamellibranch genera. Spheriwm, Hupera, and Spatha are unrepresented, but a number of endemic species of Unio are known.— Victoria Nyanza, with the largest total of species, displays, notwithstanding, little of interest. Most of the genera are represented, except those peculiar to Tanganyika, and a series of forms belonging to Spherium and Unio are to be observed.— Of Nyasa there is likewise little to record. The lake only contains species from the four well-known genera Corbicula, Unio, Mutela, and Spatha, 3 endemic types of the last-mentioned being an outstanding feature.—Both Albert and Edward Nyanza are similar in type to Nyasa, but contain a representative of Spherium and not Spatha. From this survey of the Lamellibranchs, the following points emerge :—No thalassoid types occur in Tanganyika, but that lake contains a number of endemic species, as well as three endemic genera. All the lakes show a high percentage of endemic forms, but in most cases these are merely species belonging to widely distributed genera. While Tanganyika does not exhibit in this instance so remarkable a series of unique genera and species as in the case of the Gasteropods and other groups, it retains never- theless a distinctness from the remaining lakes quite in keeping with its general character. MACRURA. The only Macrurous Crustacea which appear to occur in the big African lakes are the prawns, these being quite common types in the fresh-waters of the tropies. An examination of the forms now known to exist in the lakes of Africa reveals, how- ever, many points of interest. In the first place, no fewer than twelve species have been discovered in Tanganyika, of which ten were obtained for the first time by the Third Tanganyika Expedition. ‘This is in itself a large number of different species to be found within the limits of a single lake, but the interest is greatly increased when it is realised that all these forms occur in Tanganyika alone. ‘This 1s the only well represented group in which such is the case. Again, with the exception of a single species of the well-known fresh-water genus Palemon, all the genera are equally to be regarded as endemic. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 555 Table of Distribution of Macrura ‘. Tangan- Victoria Albert Edward Other parts ot Beit: da aw eee peries.: yika. Nyanza. vases Nyanza. Nyanza. the world. Family PALHMONIDS. Paleemion moorel ............... E Family ATyIp. Caridina nilotica WANCORMCMIPES ....5.....0.- 20% - | es P pes pA Asia, Australia. Limnocaridina retiarius ...... Gen. E - paryula .....-. i _ tanganyikee ... K ie similis) te e.e y Mt latipes (2044.. EK i BOCIIIG tcc ese ves E ve spinipes ...... EK Limnocaridella alberti ......... A rs fe Gen. EK Caridella cunningtoni ......... Gen. E sf POMTAUUGR, . iiaiee Sinwiate aces E Atyella brevirostris ............. Gen. E : 7 LOWMETEOSINIS” .... 6.2... E 6 genera BH, Ee ie slg 1 Da ee eP PAVSCCIES 0 atc... ss... L2H, IE; PP. VE Ve. IP; The adjoining table shows at a glance the iost striking feature of distribution, namely that while Caridina nilotica var. gracilipes ~ occurs in nearly all the big lakes of Africa, it is not found in Tanganyika, but is replaced there by 12 endemic species belonging for the most part to endemic genera. Lake Albert also contains an interesting endemic form (obtained by the German Central Africa Expedition and deseribed by Lenz (109, p. 132) and Bouvier (52, p. 575)) in addition to the above- mentioned widely distributed Caridina, while Kivu is the only lake of those at present under review in which prawns have not hitherto been observed. The first species of prawn ever taken in the African lakes was + A detailed account of the Macrura of the Third Tanganyika Expedition is given by Calman (61), and forms the principal source of information on this group. * The species of prawn collected by Schubotz at Kassenje on Lake Albert was described by Lenz (1O9, p. 130) as Caridina longirostris Milne-Edwards. It is, however, commonly agreed that longirostris is identical with the earlier nilotica, so that, apart from the varietal name, this is the same form that occurs so widely distributed in Africa. Since the type described as Caridina nilotica var. gracilipes is certainly rather variable, it seems probable that the Lake Albert specimens are not sufficiently distinct to be recorded under a different name, and this is the view which I have taken in compiling the table of distribution above. For a discussion of these questions of synonymy consult the paper of Calman (61, p. 189 et seg.) and the subsequent paper of de Man (110), which arrives at somewhat different conclusions. ~ I adopt the varietal identifications of Hilgendorf (100), Calman (61). and Lenz (109), bat it is only right to point out that de Man (110) takes a different view. He appears to consider that the form occurring in Lake Victoria is to be referred to the typical Caridina nilotica itself, and the form from Nyasa to his newly estab- lished variety natalensis, The type Caridina nilotica var. gracilipes he records only trom the islands of Celebes and Salayer in the Malay Archipelago. 556 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE obtained in Victoria Nyanza by Stuhlmann in 1890 (100, p. 36). It was re-taken in the lake by Neumann, and more recently by Alluaud, by myself, and by Degen. From Nyasa a species of prawn was brought for the first time by my expedition. These species prove to be one and the same form—the Caridina nilotica var. gracilipes, to which reference has just been made. During the German Central Africa Expedition of 1907-08 this prawn was collected by Schubotz in both Lakes Albert * and Edward (109, p. 180). It is thus the only common species in the African lakes, while it has in fact a yet wider distribution, ranging in Africa from Natal to the Nile and extending into Asia and Australia. The eastward range of this type has indeed an additional interest on account of the well-marked resemblance noticeable in other groups between the East African and Indian faunas. Only the first of the twelve species enumerated from Tangan- yika can be compared at all closely with forms which are known from other parts of the world, and it has no very pronounced affinities. The remaining eleven species belong to the group of the Atyide, and are not so nearly connected with types hitherto known. Moreover, in common with Limnocaridella alberti, they differ from all the other species of the family in having a smaller number of branchie +, which is a feature undoubtedly due to specialisation. To sum up then, there occurs in most of the great lakes of Africa only a single species of prawn having a very wide distribution. In Lake Albert this is associated with an endemic form, and in Tanganyika it 1s replaced by twelve other endemic forms, the majority of which are among the most highly special- ised members of the family to which they belong. Under the circumstances, it is impossible to resist the suggestion that there is exhibited here something very similar to what was seen in the case of the fishes, and particularly the Cichlide. If the extra- ordinary variety of form, and high degree of specialisation, which is characteristic of the Cichlids of Tanganyika, may have been due to prolonged isolation and comparative freedom from com- petition, it at least seems not improbable that the remarkable Macruran fauna of the lake owes its origin to the same cause f. BRACHYURA. There are five different species of crabs now known: from Tanganyika, of which one has been left unnamed for the present. In a manner closely corresponding with the case of the prawns, * See footnote above. + A yveduced branchial formula is also characteristic of the remarkable West Indian form for which Bouvier has established the genus Micratya (51, p. 181), formerly Calmania (50, p. 334). Bouvier regards this as allied to the Tanganyikan genera, but this view is not accepted by Calman (62, p. 796). ¢ An important paper dealing with the origin of the peculiar prawn fauna of Tanganyika was communicated by Bouvier to the International Zoological Congress at Monaco (52). Consult also Bouvier’s paper on the classification of the Atyidee (51). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 557 while two species belong to a widely distributed and common | fresh-water genus (Potamonautes), the remaining three, though members of the typical fresh-water group (Potamonide), con- stitute a remarkable genus, which occurs only in Tanganyika. All the forms from the other lakes under review belong to well- known genera of the same family. No Brachyurans have as yet been reported from Albert Nyanza. Table of Distribution of Brachyura*. Tangan- Victoria Nitsa: Edward ene Other parts of ame of Species. . é vu. Name of Sp yika. Nvyaunza. Nyanza. the world. Family PoTaMONID#. Potamon (Potamonautes) inflatus .. orbitospinus ” platynotus.. i Natal. cola) Potamon ecomielplnica) berardi ... Bk vee me nie P Egypt, Abyssinia. emini ...... ap P a i PE. Africa, Abyssinia. Potamon (Acanthothelphusa) GS MUNDAS! F-51205 nw ee de A P ae > ... Egypt, Abyssinia. Platythelphusa ar mata......... Gen. E maculata... E conculeata ... ) 4 genera and subgenera... 1K, 1P. Deke. ies TP. PP, 39° GWepecies +... .2..<0-23--.... 4K, 1 P. 2P. Oe ae ia ey 2 Pi as The table of distribution makes it clear that while each of the lakes in the list exhibits one or more representatives of the very well-known genus Polamon with its sub-genera, these types are associated in Tanganyika with three species of an interesting endemic genus. Both Nyasa and Tanganyika possess species of Potamonautes which are peculiar to A Nemec ives but it is in ‘Tanganyika alone among the big lakes that an endemic genus is found, All the species enumerated appear to be confined to the continent of Africa. Apart from the case of ‘Tanganyika, it will be noted that (with the exception of Potamon (Potamonautes) orbitospinus from Nyasa), the forms from the different lakes are by no means con- fined to them, and indeed are often of wide distribution. This whole series of types—types such as are known from all the tropical fresh-waters of the Old World—may be considered as the normal African group, and calls for little further remark. In the paper already cited (70, p. 263) the present writer expressed a conviction that the number of African species has been unduly multiplied, and the unnamed forms included in the + For further details concerning most of these forms, consult the Report on the Brachyurous Crustacea of the Third Tanganyika Expedition (70). 558 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE table are to be regarded as specimens which, in the existing state of our knowledge, it is impossible to identify. It is nevertheless clear that the precise distribution in the lakes of these repre- sentatives of the subgenera of Pofamon is of little, if any, significance. In this connection it should perhaps be explained that the evounds of identification of the river-crabs are unsatisfactory on the whole, external characters of a comparatively trivial and fluctuating nature forming the basis of distinction. Systematists are thus on less sure ground than in the case, for instance, of the prawns, where a matter like the branchial formula affords more satisfactory evidence of affinity. Tanganyika, with no less than three species of the endemic genus Platythelphusa, is evidently a case sui generis. There are certain features in the anatomy of this unique genus which suggest that it is of a somewhat primitive and unmodified character, but at the same time nothing to indicate that it is more definitely marine than the other members of the family to which it belongs. Further, it is only to be regarded as unspecial- ised in comparison with allied forms which have adopted a semi- terrestrial mode of life, so that it affords in reality no support for Moore’s view that Tanganyika is the altered remains of an ancient sea. The genus with its three distinct species is rather to be looked upon as one more example of variation and divergence, brought about, in all probability, by prolonged isolation. Finally, it may be noted that this lake, with five species, contains a larger number of different crabs than any of the others under consideration. Those groups of smaller Crustacea which are often associated under the heading Entomostraca, are (with the exception of the marine Cirripedia) well represented in the African lakes. In- formation concerning them is, however, for the most part, of fairly recent date, since such organisms would be overlooked by any but trained biologists, and the use of the tow-net in Central Africa has even yet yielded results which are but fragmentary and incomplete. All the earher records are due to the zeal and energy of Stuhlmann, and concern in particular Lakes Victoria and Edward. In 1898-1900, extensive collections were made in Nyasa and its neighbourhood by Filleborn, and this material, together with a supply from Victoria Nyanza collected by Borgert, forms the basis of a comprehensive treatise by Daday (76), in which the whole of the microfauna is dealt with. The collections made by the writer during the Third Tanganyika Expedition have afforded information for the first time concerning the Entomostraca of Tanganyika, as well as providing additional records for Nyasa and Lake Victoria. Finally, the work of Schubotz during the German Central Africa Expedition has furnished further particulars relating to Lakes Kivu, Edward, and Albert. It may here be pointed out that these lower Crustacea, with FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 559 the exceptional opportunities they are known to possess for obtaiming world-wide distribution, cannot afford evidence of the same value as the higher forms. When—as is particularly the case among the Cladocera—even specific forms of cosmo- politan range reappear in the great lakes, it becomes clear that the precise geographical distribution of such species 1s a matter of no great significance. At the same time, the possibility is not excluded that the lakes may differ in their suitability to harbour certain types, while it is highly probable that new types can and will develope in some cases, constituting species or even genera of an endemic nature. ‘Thus a study of the distribution of these forms in the lakes of Central Africa is nevertheless not devoid of interest, and may indeed furnish testimony of some importance. EUCOPEPODA. The Eucopepeda so far observed in the lakes with which this paper is concerned reach the not inconsiderable total of 54 species. Of these, more than half (31) have been found in Tanganyika, to which lake a large proportion exclusively belong. There is every reason to believe that further investigation will bring to light additional forms, particularly from Victoria Nyanza and the smaller lakes, which, in this respect, have received less attention than Tanganyika and Nyasa. Table us Distribution ae ECP ENON ES Te Other parts of Name lof Species, Tangan- Victoria Nyasa Albert Edward reat yika. Nyanza. Nyanza. Nyanza. the world. Family CENTROPAGID®. Diaptomus galeboidest ... ee P is: Ie me MMXGUS 0s... Ar < ) i africanus ..,.... ie ba PR Bt vy ... E, Africa. fr stuhlmann1 ... a E =; Stmuplexs vy... KE - cunningtoni ... eee oe E - kreepelini ...... a ~ jeg - sae ww +H, Africa, Family HARPACTICID®. Canthocamptus schréder1 ae E Attheyella decorata ......... = ie Bs ae ahs ... Asia, S. America. 33 erandidieri ...... Aer ae Neate Bae: ise ... S. America, New Guinea. Dactylopus jugurtha ...... ae ~ P a — ... Asia, New Guinea. Schizopera inopinata...... EK * WaliGiOr> o..cs. 635 i a consimilis ...... le E a unenlata......... EK minuticornis ... E + Detailed information concerning a large proportion of these species is given by Sars (151). The other sources of most importance are Daday (76, p. 106) and Meek (189). For the Lernaid consult Cunnington (73). t I follow Sars (151, p. 34) in assuming that this form, which is one of the commonest and most characteristic species of Lake Victoria, is not identical with the Egyptian D. galebi Barrois, as supposed by Mraézek and Daday. § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area, 560 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE Albert Edward Tangan- Victoria Other parts of SITE (OU JETS yika. Nyanza. SS ERE Nyanza. Nyanza. a the world. Schizopera spinulosa ...... E Ms fimbriata ..... ey ee E a SCAVATIS secu sae E Ilyophilus perplexus......... q Family CrcLopip2. Cyclops aspericornis ......... Ore av Ps a ie ... Kast Indies. 3) lenckanti 200 22. P P P Pp. P P Cosmopolitan. Dive PVE MLD GA eee Ree ae Rie iE? Eg iP i ee a.) SH. Abkeres, a 6 6omeslectus* |... P ie P Pp ie P Senegal, Sumatra. mr EteNellUS' | eae eee E oe) albidus eat eet ay 8 P re Be ... Cosmopolitan. eo eat teMmuatus 1.0.53. E Pe WA VALICHING: @ 720.0. e ee: Pp ~ Ve iP oa .... Europe, New Zealand. Pee PDICOLORNNT ec ee e) my, P§ ie: lis ... E. Africa, Europe. “ exiguus Riese, E , cunningtont, ...... E 6 spachycomusis. 4. E so. Seraulatusiy tee aa P§ PS 4 P .... Cosmopolitan. » Ssemiserratus «.... E Sy lee VINA ZO" 2a. eee E Sy maerars eae ee uy. Pes Be ss 44 .... Cosmopolitan. 5) warnomshuis) 10,62: 7eyece P ue P P » ‘stublmanni,.1.2... ag E 3) eo Tais pins © eee ee E by) 2 AS MOIMES eee sree oe IP iP iP » euacanthus ... E§ » ciliatus Scie E ery ONTOS DIS) eae mens ne es)! sei ne KE jg - - PLASINUS 452405 0008s: sk P iP ae - ... EH. Africa, Europe. we | Dhaleratisiese. 3. as P§ P§ a xs .... Cosmopolitan. COMmMpactus (2) peace P§ i an: Lisp i) ... Central Africa. Ms oligarthrus ......... E Family ERGASILIDz. Ereasilus kandtr 2-40.05 se: nt Wa: EK a3 SDseacceten a Oe = le or Ergasiloides megacheir ... E macrodactylus E - brevimaunus .., J2 P Family LERN#ID&. Lerneeocera diceracephala .. E os haplocephala ... P A Ae ne act ... Nile, Congo. LO genetar tere Gk. BP; GP, 3 P. iI ine 5A Species ...-1,.-uss08. a. 22H9P. BE IOP, (4ROR: WKcGR: 3P:; 2uP; (31) (13) (23) (7) § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. * As explained by Sars (151, p. 51 & 74, p. 82), this species has been wrongly identified with C. oithonoides G. O. Sars or with C. hyalinus Rehberg by other writers en African Copepoda. I adopt the new name introduced by Sars. + A number of the forms which succeed this in the list belong to the group for which C. serrulatus Fischer is the type. While the species C. serrulatus is recorded by Mrdzek (139, p. 3) for Victoria Nyanza, by Daday (76, p. 108) for Nyasa, and by van Douwe (80. p. 492) for Edward Nyanza, it is not unlikely that the specimens in question might rather belong to one of the species in the “‘ serrulatus” group as described from the lakes by Sars, than to C. serrulatus, s. str. At present it is impossible to settle this point, so I take the course least open to objection and insert the records of Mrazek, Daday, and yan Douwe as they stand, FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 561 An examination of this long list of forms reveals in the first place the large proportion of the recorded species which has been observed in Tanganyika. The latter lake contains 31 out of a total of 54 different forms, Nyasa contains 23, Victoria Nyanza 13, and the remaining lakes still smaller numbers. The contrast between the lakes is greater than is disclosed by these figures, for out of 31 species known from Tanganyika, 22 are peculiar to that lake, and in comparison only 4 out of 23 for Nyasa and 3 out of 13, for Lake Victoria. In the three smaller lakes there is only a single recorded species which is endemic, and that occurs in Albert Nyanza. Expressed in percentage form, th's means that nearly 71 per cent. of the Copepods of Tanganyika are found in that lake alone, while of the species found in Nyasa only some 17 per cent. are peculiar to the lake, in Victoria 23 per cent., and in Albert 14 per cent. Excluding Tanganyika, it will be observed that only 8 of the forms recorded are endemic, so that with 22 endemic species, Tanganyika has nearly three times as many endemic EKucopepoda as the other lakes can muster between them. Turning now to the distribution of families and genera in the lakes, the genus Diaptomus, sole representative of the Centro- pagidze, calls for little comment. A single species of this genus occurs in Tanganyika, to which it is peculiar: it appears to be a most characteristic plankton form in that lake. Lakes Victoria and Nyasa each contain endemic species as well as types of wider distribution, so that the three big lakes may each be said to have their own particular forms. None of the species of Diaptomus in this list have been observed outside the continent of Africa. The representatives of the Harpacticide are of far greater interest. An endemic species of Canthocamptus has been re- corded from Victoria Nyanza, and widely distributed species of Attheyella and Dactylopus from Nyasa. It is on the genera Schizopera and Llyophilus, at one time regarded by Sars as strictly marine, that interest really centres. The genus Schizopera is represented in the collections made by the writer by no less than 8 species, of which 6 are peculiar to Tanganyika and one to Nyasa, while one occurs in both Lakes Tanganyika and Victoria. The genus was established hy Sars for the reception of a species found in a brackish-water ]Jagoon on the Chatham Islands, while subsequently species have been obtained from the Caspian and from Egypt. It is obvious that such a genus can hardly be regarded as strictly marine. Three questions suggest themselves in “this connection. How does the genus come to be represented in the heart of Africa; how is it that brackish-water types are living there in perfectly fresh-water ; and how is it that so many different species are recognisable in Tanganyika ¢ Sars points out (151, p. 69) that the most obvious explanation would be to regard these as genuine ‘‘ relict” forms, in which case the Tangany ikan species would be important members of Moore’s so-called ‘ halo- limnic” series. He rejects on general grounds the view advanced by Moore, and indicates transport by the aid of migratory aquatic birds as suflicient explanation for this remarkable 562 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE discontinuous distribution. He asserts the probability that forms transported from brackish water would not be unable to survive in fresh water, and finally maintains that the several species occurring in Tanganyika have been produced by diver- gence during a period of isolation—a view entirely in accord with that already expressed in the case of other animal groups.—The genus [lyophilus is represented in Tanganyika by a single species which is endemic. ‘The type species of this genus was described from the Baltic and has also been obtained near Christiania, so that the remarks concerning transport and establishment in fresh water are as applicable here as in the case of Schizopera. No fewer than 27 species, all belonging to the genus Cyclops, are enumerated under the family Cyclopide. It will be noted that Tanganyika again leads the way with 17 species, while Nyasa contains 13 and Lake Victoria 8: moreover, 11 of the Tangan- yikan species are peculiar to that lake, while the other two lakes each contain only a single endemic form. ‘The three smaller lakes possess fewer representatives, viz. :—Lake Albert 5, Lake Edward 3, and Lake Kivu only 2. All the latter are of fairly wide—some of cosmopolitan—distribution. The family Ergasilide, which may be regarded as intermediate between the free-living and the highly degenerate parasitic Copepods, is represented by 5 species belonging to two genera. An endemic form of the genus Hrgasilus has been recorded from Albert Nyanza, and the genus has also been recognised both in Nyasa and Victoria. In Tanganyika it would seem to be replaced by the genus Argasiloides, described from material obtained by my expedition. Two endemic species are on record from Tanganyika, while a third is found in that lake and also in Nyasa. The Lerneide with two forms of Lernaocera concludes the list. The two species were obtained by the Third Tanganyika Expedition from fishes in that lake, and while one proves to be endemic, the second was found to be identical with specimens in the British Museum collection taken on Nile fish. Reference may again be made here to the statement that the number of different animal forms existing in the lakes varies in proportion to the size of the latter (cf. pp. 5385, 548). It is only when many forms are enumerated that such a comparison is justified, but in this case it may fairly be undertaken. Apart from Tanganyika, the lakes are arranged in the table in descend- ing order as regards size, and the total figures are as follows :— Tanganyika 31 (species), Victoria 13, Nyasa 23, Albert 7, Edward 3, and Kivu 2. It is very clear that Tanganyika is quite unique, but apart from that lake, beginning with Victoria Nyanza, the Copepods exhibit a regularly decreasing total with the exception of Nyasa, where the higher figure is probably due to the more thorough exploration of its waters. The distribution of Copepoda in the individual lakes may be summarised as follows:—Tanganyika, with 31 species, 22 of which are endemic, is clearly in a category by itself. Containing a FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. N63 single species of Diaptomus which 1s peculiar to it, the lake is chiefly characterised by a number of remarkable forins belong- ing to the genera Schizopera and Llyophilus, nearly the whole of which are not known elsewhere. Even of the cosmopolitan genus Cyclops, Tanganyika exhibits 11 endemic types, as well as others of wider distribution, while of the three species of Argasiloides, two are found here alone. Two forms of the parasitic Lerncocera occur in the lake, one of which is likewise endemic. The Copepoda cr Lake Victoria are referred not only to fewer types, but form a much less interesting assembly. ‘They comprise a single endemic species in each of the genera Diaptomus, Can- thocamptus, and Cyclops, but otherwise are forms of wider, often of world-wide distribution. A larger number of species 1s known from Nyasa, but out of 23, only 4 are endemic. Of the latter, two are species of Diaptomus, while there is a single endemic form of the striking genus Schazopera and one of Cyclops. Most of the remaining species are widely distributed, a considerable proportion being well-known forms of Cyclops. Nyasa contains a species of Krgasilus as well as Lrgasiloides brevimanus which is otherwise confined to Tanganyika. ‘There is no reason to suppose that Nyasa will be found to contain so many more Copepoda than Victcria Nyanza when the latter lake has been equally well investigated. Seven species have been observed in Lake Albert, of which merely a single form (Hrgasilus kandti) is endemic. Apart from this and from a species of Diaptomus found also in Lake Victoria, the lake contains only representatives of the genus Cyclops, which are of fairly extended, and in some cases of the widest possible range. Lake Edward with 3 species, and Kivu with 2, come last in the series, and it. should be noted that not only do they contain very few types of Copepoda, but that these types have little significance, being in each case widely distributed species of Cyclops. It is thus apparent that with increase in size the Jakes exhibit an increase in the number of forms which they contain; that only in the larger lakes do endemic species appear; and, finally, that Tanganyika possesses a large number of unique types which may well have been produced during a period of prolonged isolation. BRANCHIURA. This small group of animals, which are parasitic for the most part on fish, was for long but poorly represented in the collections from the grent lakes ae Africa. The collections made by Stubl- mann im Ryarseria Nyanza (184, p. 154) and Edward Nyanza (187, p. 47 & 188, p. 37) and by Filleborn in Nyasa (18%, p. 47 & 188, pp. 37 & 44), resulted in a total of three species belonging to as many genera. ‘To these may now be added no fewer chai seven new species of Argulws which were obtained for the first time by the Third Tanganyika Expendition (72), while there are [97 | 564 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE further records of distribution now available which make our knowledge more complete. It is safe to predict that future investigation will add to the localities in Africa from which these parasitic forms are known, even though it may not materially increase the number of recognised species. Table of Distribution of Branchiura tT. Tangan- Victoria Albert Edward Other parts of Name of Species. yika. Nyanza. Nyasa. Nyanza. Nyanza. the world. Dolops ranarum ............ iP Jef P beh A Nile. ATCULUS INGISUS, <..;5 02.006 EK » Yubropunctatus ... qj 5} spersonatus <..7..0) q yy ORIOUUS: Bcc. nese { » angusticeps......... q) pa MEESLTIOUU San ere eee E 9». XUDESCENS: , s.2...02 y 5) weatriegnius oC. ae P iP iP iP P Nile. Chonopeltis inermis ......... M; *, Gen. E LO USPeCleSs freee. et ee 23 PH21. 1: 1 Ps The outstanding feature revealed in the above list is that while two species occur widely distributed in Africa, these are asso- ciated in Nyasa with a single endemic form, but in Tanganyika with no less than seven. Thus out of ten known African species, nine are found in Tanganyika, which is therefore seen to possess not only a larger number of characteristic species, but a much richer Branchiuran fauna than the other great lakes with which it may reasonably be compared. All the species enumerated are confined to the African continent so far as is at present known. Dolops ranarum is the only African representative of a genus which is otherwise exclusively American. The genus Chonopeltis was established from a single female specimen from Lake Nyasa, while Argulus alone has a distribution which is world-wide. OsTRACODA. It seems probable that the Ostracod-fauna of the great lakes is less well represented in the collections hitherto obtained than is the case with any of the other groups of Entomostraca. This is due to the fact that nearly all fresh-water Ostracods are bottom-living rather than planktonic forms, and require other methods than surface tow-netting for their capture, while the bulk of the material at present examined was collected by the tow-net. This implies, of course, that many additional types will probably be found when the lakes are more adequately explored. Nevertheless, 22 species are on record for Tanganyika (of which 20 ave peculiar to that lake), and 17 and 7 respectively for Nyasa and Victoria Nyanza. No Ostracoda have so far been recorded from Lakes Edward and Kivu. + For further particulars, bibliography, etc., consult Cunnington (72). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 565 Table of Distribution of Ostracoda *. Nemec of Species. Tangan- Victoria Nyasa Albert Other parts of yika. Nyanza. * Nyanza. the world. Family Cypripm. Mima CAStanea... 6. ise. es 7 a P na Natal. eer denticularis — sc;..:- he a P§ ae Madagascar. Paracypria declivis ......... Y 5 complanata ... Y mA conoidea ........ E re OQUGUGE. ces ices cos P. ne 4, P - defiexas is)... E 5 subangulata ... E is reniformis ...... E a bunnies ox .s:e. E K Opacar cee. e. iE - claviformis _... q 7” MEXMOSAr 46. oss oes E re curta cs 1 Iliocypris propinqua......... a E Fs 1) eRe Oe ire ara 1D) Heterocypris dubia ......... ve KE Kucypris flabella ............ we E ed ee bit AS P§ Natal. s laticauda ....... =: ae =A E§ Stenocypris sinuata ......... i: im P§ Ae Madagascar. 5 malcolmsoni ... at ie a a Asia, Australia. 5 marginata... ... a bee i § _ perarmata... ... Pp ea i Ss Natal. 53 fiilleborni ...... a a 1 § a fasciculata... we ee E§ an stagnalis”. ....... fe ee: q Cypridella fossulata ......... és P§ sine Kilimandjaro. Cypridopsis obliquata ...... K sintiatde.:....... y 5 cunningtoni ... ee be K x pusillay 4)... .:. y - monodonta ... y * serrata: .. 2.2... y is bidentata ...... K we tumidula ...... y “5 congenera ...... K ee PAIN s es. ana: a E Potamocypris fiilleborni ... ae 2 E ap) viduella ...... a ye P§ I Cape Colony. Zonocypris costata ......... P P8§ bg E. Africa, Madagascar. ts desis che... K Family CYTHERID2. Limnicythere obtusata...... a 10) . michaelseni.. ds ‘ P§ HF Lake Rukwa. MUI PCIEU Aas se. « cso satis nites Ae. OL: OrP. IP. AMepeeiese 26.2). fa... 2OH)2P.) 5H, 2Ps. SE; 9 P. 1P. (22) (7) (17) + This account is based in the main on the report published by Sars on the Ostracoda collected by the Third Tanganyika Expedition (152). § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. 566 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE The existence of a large number of Ostracods which are peculiar to Tanganyika is the principal feature displayed by the list of species. Of the total number of forms on record, it will be noted that Nyasa with 17 species does not fall far short of Tan- ganyika with 22, while Victoria Nyanza is a long way behind with only 7. This is probably due—at all events in part-—-to the fact that Nyasa and its drainage area have been more thoroughly investigated in this direction than Lake Victoria. It may further be remarked that less than half the records from Nyasa are from the actual waters of the lake itself, the remainder coming from ponds and swamps etc. in the vicinity. Corresponding collec- tions from the surrounding ponds, swamps, and rivers are wanting in the case of both Victoria and Tanganyika; indeed, the whole of the material collected in the three biggest lakes by the author’s expedition came only from the lakes themselves. Additional records are therefore to be expected, particularly from Lakes Victoria and Tanganyika whenever a more complete investigation of the Entomostraca becomes possible. While Nyasa is shown to contain nearly as many different forms as Tanganyika, it will be seen that in the nature of these forms the lakes differ profoundly. More than half the species from Nyasa have also been obtained elsewhere, but of the 22 species from Tanganyika only two have so far been observed out- side the confines of that lake, or to put it in another manner, 47 per cent. of the Nyasa forms are endemic in the lake, while nearly 91 per cent, are endemic in the case of ‘Tanganyika. Another feature of distribution which this table brings into prominence is the association of certain groups of forms with certain lakes. Only in three cases have species been recorded from more than one lake—/Stenocypris perarmata trom Tanganyika and Nyasa, Zonocypris costata from Victoria and Nyasa, and Paracypria obtusa from Tanganyika and Albert. In every other instance the species from the lakes differ from one another, and appear to be either peculiar to or at least characteristic of the lakes in which they are found. Without referring to the species seriatim, it may be pointed out that the genera Stenocypris, Potamocypris, aud Cypria seem to be associated in particular with | Nyasa, and Cypripodsis with Tanganyika, while Paracypria, with the exception of a single species, occurs only in Tanganyika among the lakes. Apart from the forms peculiar to Tanganyika (which number 20 out of a total of 44in the list of Ostracoda), it is to be observed ee 8 species are peculiar to Nyasa and 5 to Victoria Nyanaza, - 13 in all. It will thus be seen that when Tanganyika is leaed more endemic forms are known from the remaining lakes than is the case among the Copepoda, It is also singular to note how restricted is the distribution of even the non- endemic forms recorded, for only in a single case (that of Steno- cypris malcolmsoni which is known from Asia and Australia) has a species been obtained outside the continent of Afriea with Madagascar. To the g genera Paracypria and Cypridopsis, which are so largely FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 567 represented in Tanganyika, it is necessary to call special attention on account of their remarkable nature. Of the former genus, no fewer than twelve different species have been described frem that lake, eleven of which are peculiar to it, and they all, as Sars points out (152, p. 756), exhibit striking features of specialisation. It is also a remarkable coincidence—if it is only that—that the type species of Paracypria was obtained from the same brackish lagoon on the Chatham Islands as was the type of the Copepod genus Schizopera, which is likewise very characteristic of Tan- ganyika among the lakes. The case of Cypridopsis is perhaps more significant still, since of the ten species obtained by the Third Tanganyika Expedition two only display all the features characteristic of the genus, and these are the two forms taken respectively in Lakes Nyasa and Victoria. ‘The other eight types, which are confined to Tanganyika, exhibit certain divergences which suggest that they might more suitably be removed to a new genus which would then be endemic in the lake (152, p. 757). It is quite clear that in the case of this group also, Tanganyika contains an unusually large number of forms, an exceptional proportion of which are peculiar to the lake, and that of these peculiar forms many show undoubted signs of specialisation. CLADOCERA. The outstanding fact concerning the Cladocera is the absence of any representatives from the plankton of Tanganyika, and also apparently of Kivu, which is in direct communication with it. Thus the survey of this group of organisms resolves itself into a comparison of the records from the remaining lakes, and this, it is not surprising to find, lacks the interest which the inclusion of species from Tanganyika usually affords. Table of Distribution of Cladocera *. Waine of Species Victoria Nogan Albert Edward Other parts of c a . a Code Nyanza. Nyanza. Nyanza. the world. Family Srpipz. Parasida szalayl ii... 600 1. a ie a4 - Asia. Diaphanosoma excisum ... rE Jed + Me K. Africa, Australia. Family DAPHNID2. Daphnia kirimensis ......... Ae - ae E és Jongispina ......... P oh se Cosmopolitan. Pi hyalina ss ee le Ae a ee Cosmopolitan. 33 ee eet ek P iP ss eds Palestine, Australia, ss monacha ......... lite sis y Hyalodaphnia barbata ...... P ay K. Africa. Ceriodaphnia bicuspidata... E vas ‘ E, e. cout Rage, : P§ 7. a ae Australia, S. America. 55 LOU ODE Chg asanae ne ao a Sumatra. si Weaudd, 7... P P§ ‘a ae Almost cosmopolitan, oe 2 + For further particulars consult especially Daday (76, p. 120). Additional records for Lake Victoria are given by Delachaux (77) and for the smaller lakes by Brehm (54). § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. 568 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE Name of Species. Simocephalus vetulus ...... Moinodaphnia macleayi Momandiualbiat es, eeeee cee Ag 0 SRDS EW aa ene Nee » SD). Family BosMIniIpH. Bosmina longirostris Bosminopsis deitersi Bosminella anisitsi Family MacroTHRIcID2s. Macrothrix laticornis - hirsuticornis ... 53 chevreux1 Ilyocryptus longiremis Family CHyDORID®. Camptocercus australis Alonopsis singaiensis Euryalona orientalis ......... Pseudalona longirostris ... (Alona ats i200 ccss sgeceeees » costata De UU CAUAN Is es eincerneg + epulchellag.s.cte-eness: quadrangularis 3, mhecban@ulay 222.8 tan te: Rhynchotalona rostrata ... ‘Alonella, excisa a. ssa ..cee- as elobulosa He 4 ATU (Ate cee ee = pumctatal 2c. sar. is diaphana, 22.09.05 Pleuroxus similis ............ Fe SiRlatuSt see ace s assimilis) ... 2... Chy dorus)baivoist ce eee - spheericus As ventricosus ...... as leomardi tse... a DIGere ete ees > zlobosus Dadaya macrops Monospilus dispar DA SONETA gts changes eer a HI SPeCies hee ae oe § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. Albert Edward Nyanza. Nyanza. Other parts of the world. Victoria ies Nyanza. i. iP iP ne PS E P id Pe P Pp P iP ee EU bade P Pes 12 a Pp P ” P§ Pp “i deg les ae ee p B) Pp rs PS§ ae B) oe 3g P iP ei P alia P§ hae ie le i P§ Ps ie pe oe P P IGP. 20 P. 31 P. 50 P iP. ole, J LE. 5 P. Cosmopolitan. Almost cosmopolitan. K. Africa, Egypt. Zanzibar. Cosmopolitan. Central Africa, S. America. S. America. Cosmopolitan. Algiers, Europe. Africa, 8. America. Cosmopolitan. Australia. Ceylon, S. America. Cevlon, S. America. S. America, New Guinea. Cosmopolitan. Europe. E. Africa, Europe. Australia, 8. America. Europe. Cosmopolitan. Europe. Kurope. Ceylon, S. America. Australia, S. America. E. Africa, S. America. Australia, S. America. S. America. Europe, N. America. Natal. Asia, S. America. Cosmopolitan. Ceylon, S. America. Australia. Kurope. Kurope. Asia, S. America. Europe, N. America. ' ee The list of Cladocera from the big lakes of Africa differs from all the corresponding lists in the absence of a column for Tan- ganvika. While the group is entirely unrepresented in Lake Tanganyika itself, various Cladocera occur in the surface tow- nettings which | made in the broad mouth of the Lofu River, which enters the south-western corner of the lake. I had intended myself to report on the Cladocera collected by the Third Tan- ganyika Expedition, but I have not yet been able to do so, and the specimens from the Lofu remain unexamined. During his FAUNA OF 'THE AFRICAN LAKES. 569 investigations on the Copepoda and Ostracoda of the expedition, G. O. Sars, however, kindly isolated and identified certain Cladocera from Victoria Nyanza and Nyasa, and these forms are included in my list of species without further comment, although they constitute In some cases new records of distribution. The reason for the absence of Cladocera from Tanganyika remains a matter for speculation, but the most likely explanation would seem to be that the water of the lake either contains certain salts which are fatal to such organisms, or is perhaps of too saline a nature to permit them to survive. Colour is lent to this view by the already-mentioned occurrence of Cladocera in the river Lofu and also by the marked difference in nature of the Rotatorian fauna of the lake proper and the river mouth. Rousselet (150, p. 794) reports that in a small quantity of material from the river he distinguished 23 different species of Rotifera, while in a large series of tow-nettings from different parts of Tanganyika he was only able to find 10 species, of which but one was common to Jake and river. It thus seems highly probable that though the salinity of the lake water has not made it impossible for certain Rotifers to live in Tanganyika, it is at least the factor which has determined the striking difference between lake and river in this respect. Further, it may be pointed out that a somewhat similar state of affairs has been observed in the case of the phytoplankton. G.S. West in his report on the fresh-water Alge of my expedition states (200, p- 96):—‘‘ Of the thirty species observed in this river-plankton, only one occurred in the plankton of the lake itself.” This evidence 1s very suggestive, and appears to confirm the view put forward, as it is well ‘known that the distribution of these delicate plant organisms is profoundly influenced by the nature of the water. This is not perhaps the place to discuss at all fully what is known of the nature of the lake water, but the principal features may be indicated as follows. The total amount of dissolved saline matter is rather higher than in the case of Thames water, but is not excessive. The amount of calcium salts is, however, low, while salts of magnesium are present in much larger quantities than is characteristic of fresh waters. It is an obvious suggestion that the presence of this excess of magnesium salts— which are characteristically bitter to the taste-—-while not ren- dering the water unfit to drink, might be sufficient to affect these organisms and prevent them from obtaining a footing in the lake. Tt becomes necessary in this connection to refer to the nature of the water of Lake Kivu, which is in direct communication with Tanganyika. Here the quantity of saline matter is excessive, and indeed most remarkable for a relatively large lake, From an analysis by Hundeshagen (103) it appears that while the water is almost entirely free of mite salts, it contains a very unusual amount of salts of sodium and magnesium—particularly salts of magnesium, of which there are more than twice the amount present in Tanganyika. ; 7 The plankton of Kivu, among other lakes, was collected by the Proc. Zoo. Soc.-—1920, No. XXX VIII. a8 570 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE German Central Africa Expedition of 1907-08, and Brehm, reporting on the Cladocera obtained by the expedition (54, p. 168), refers to the complete absence of these forms from Kivu, and expresses the opinion that the nature of the water may explain the fact. It seems, nevertheless, that a very occasional specimen may be found—pr esumably i in the littoral zone,—for in the collec- tion examined by Brehm was a tube labelled ‘‘ Surface, Lake Kivu—one specimen Alona.” ‘This specimen he failed to find, but there is little doubt that such individuals must be carried into the lake by streams entering it. Indeed, the conditions are probably paralleled in ‘Tanganyika, for not only does the existence of Cladocera in the Lofu River suggest this, but Sars (151, p. 67) actually observed an isolated specimen of J/oima during his examination of plankton from the lake. Both these records J have purposely omitted from my list. It only remains to suggest that since the river Rusisi, which is the outlet of Kivu, brings a considerable volume of water into Tanganyika, it 1s likely that Kivu is the principal source of the magnesium salts which appear to have an influence on the fauna of both the lakes in question. It would be interesting, and should not prove difficult, to determine by experiment whether Cladocera are susceptible to the presence of small quantities of magnesium salts in the water, and, if so, whether they are affected by amounts too small to have any adverse influence on other Entomostraca*. Indeed, a whole field of experimental research is indicated, which might go some way towards determining whether the very special nature . of the fauna of Tanganyika may not in some degree be related to the unusual nature and quantity of the salts dissolved in the water. Turning from these matters to a survey of the list of Cladocera, it will be noted that 51 species in all have been enumerated. Of these, 31 species are recorded from Lake Victoria, 30 from Nyasa, 6 from Edward Nyanza, and only one from Albert Nyanza. It is interesting, though perhaps not surprising, to observe that an overwhelming majority of the forms were already known from other parts of the world, only 2 species out of 51 being described as endemic, to wit Daphnia monacha from Lake Albert and D. kirimensis from Lake Edward. A number of the forms are truly cosmopolitan and many more are known from two or three continents, while only four are restricted to other parts of Africa in addition to the lakes. On comparison with the particulars given for the Copepoda and Ostracoda, it becomes clear that while the former group holds an intermediate position, the Ostracoda are the most limited in range and the Cladocera the most extended. Of 44 species of Ostracoda enumerated, 33 are described as endemic in one or other of the lakes: cut of 54 species of Copepoda, 30 are endemic: while out of 51 species of Cladocera only 2 are endemic. It can hardly be doubted that this is due to * A brief reference is made by Gurney to his observations of the injurious effect of magnesium salts on the growth of fresh-water Daphnia (97, p. 469). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. ay a the exceptional facilities for distribution afforded by the thick- shelled ‘‘ resting” eggs of the Cladocera. A detailed survey of the distribution of the genera in the lakes does not seem called for, but certain features may be pointed out. All the well represented and more important genera appear to occur in two or more of the lakes, while it is the less outstanding forms which are only known at present from one of the lakes in question. Chydorus ana Alona are the best represented genera, each with 6 species, Daphnia and Alonella following closely with ) species each. From Albert Nyanza, as alr eady mentioned, there is only the record by Brelm (54, p. 169) of a single species of Daphnia. I have, however, in my possession a small quantity of Sa au from the lake collected i in July 1907 by my friend R. 'T. Leiper (cf. 74), and though I have not yet found an oppor- tunity of properly studying the Cladocera which it contains, I can at least indicate the occurrence of the genera Diaphanosoma, Moina, Camptocercus, Alona, and Chydorus. Having made no specific determinations, these new records are not included in my list of forms, but attention is merely called to them in this place. The addition of these genera to its ‘fauna brings Lake Albert far more into Jine with Lake Edward and the lar ger lakes. To sum up—Lakes Tanganyika and Kivu quite unexpectedly contain no Cladocera. This is very probably due to the salinity of the water, and perhaps in particular to the excess of magne- sium salts in those lakes. Apart from this, the distribution of species in the Jakes affords little of interest, many of the forms being cosmopolitan and only an insignificant number endemic. BRANCHIOPODA. Although representatives of this group have been found in various parts of the African continent, there is, as far as I am aware, only a single record which concerns the lakes under review. A species belonging to the family Estheride, viz. Cyclestheria hislopi, was collected by Fulleborn in the neighbour- hood of Nyasa, though not actualiy in the lake itself (76, p. 159). This form, originally described as Kstheria, but subsequently separated from that genus, is of wide distribution in the tropics, and its occurrence in the fauna of Lake Nyasa has no particular significance. PENTASTOMIDA. These parasitic Arachnids have not, I believe, been hitherto recorded from any African fishes. 1 obtained a number of speci- mens of Porocephalus from Tanganyika fish, encysted forms from the body-cavity and others from the intestine. ‘Che materiai nas been submitted for expert examination, but no detailed report is yet available. Since the specimens came from very distinct hosts—a Siluroid in the one case and a large Lates (Serranid) in the other,—it may be they will prove to belong to different species. It is open to question whether such Ponte should be included in a description of lake faunas. 38* 572 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE HYDRACHNIDA. It is probable that the Hydvachnida of the great African lakes are but imperfectly known to science, although 31 species in all have been enumerated. Comparatively small and inconspicuous forms as these mites are, there seems little doubt that a good many more species will come to light in the future. Following on the earliest collections made by Stuhlmann, come those of Fulleborn in and around Nyasa and of Borgert in Victoria Nyanza. Specimens from both those lakes and also from Tan- ganyika were obtained by the expedition which I conducted in 1904-05. It seems likely that Lake Nyasa, from which the largest number of types (14) is on record, has been better explored in this direction than the remaining lakes. No Hydrachnids have hitherto been collected in either Albert Nyanza or Kivu. Table of Distribution of Hydrachnida *. AO hs ternal ee Tangan- Victoria s Edward Other parts of Naine of Species. yika. Nyanza. Nyasa. Nyanza. the world. Family HypDROPHANTID®. Georgella incerta ....,........-4: a ee P§ ok Quilimane, Nossi-Bé. Diplodontus despiciens ...... iP te A igs Cosmopolitan. Family Hy@rospatipm. Limnesiaarmata 2... 40.6.0. As K os campanulatay y e-tes oe 1) Anisitsiella africana ............ Ay ha) E§ Hygrobates edentipalpis ...... KE Oxus stuhlimannt %.0.......2 +. ce E Unionicula borgerti ............ _ E ‘5 ClaSsIpes eee We iP i ne Europe. 5 digitatus ......... an nee P Ra, Nossi-Bé. ES falenier’ See ae ia E ¥ fgUTalis feta. stk P P n as Europe. a Ny NGCUS Maan ann a8 a es E aa cunningtoni ...... ae Aa E Encentridophorus borgerti ... fs E 99 koenikei ... oa et 1 § _ spinifer ... Ai P als td Zanzibar. Neumania paucipora......... i a os 1 Kast Africa. % simulans (255 Sen bs ie Bs if Soudan, Quilimane. 5 SpIMIpes) | Soysinss.0: ae P a =A Kurope. i papillosa oo... ss: aD) Koenikea tessellata ............ ae ae E§ Pionacalizitera yes oe ke ise ie Piss hie Madagascar. soc) SOU UICLUIS! ay eek ee a P Ls, ee Europe. Forelia liliacea US arya P Europe. Mideopsis minuta ............... aD) Arrhenurus plenipalpis....... bei oe P. fe Madagascar, Quilimane. SArGiMatuUs «chs. ab. i P§ ae Madagascar. ” feeMVA pS” eo adae ba a E§ RS Vigorans: Oss sh! eh; ne P§ hee Nossi-Bé. 3 voeltzkowi...... p a bis P§ A Madagascar, EK. Africa. 14 penera’ 5:1. teen Oe 6 P. our iP. SL Species Aeaicis io. deenteenes Lube 6E,6P. 5H, 9P. 1E. (6) (12) (14) + For additional information refer to Daday (76, p. 237) and Soar (172). § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES, 573 The distribution in the lakes of the forms at present recorded is made clear by the adjoining list of species, and it will at once be observed that the exceptional position held by Tanganyika in the case of other animal groups is not in evidence here. While the possibility is not excluded that further investigation may bring to light an unusual number of remarkable species in the lake, it is not in this group of animals that such a discovery is very probable. Nyasa with 14 different forms is closely followed by Lake Victoria with 12. Only 6 species are recorded from Tanganyika and one from Lake Edward. 'The number of species which are endemic affords no striking contrasts, 5 out of 14 being peculiar to Nyasa, and half the total number in each ease being peculiar to Victoria and Tanganyika. The only species known from Edward Nyanza is endemic. ‘There are no endemic genera on record. A point of more interest is the fact that of 31 species men- tioned in the table, only two have been observed in more than one lake, viz. Unionicula figuralis in Tanganyika and Victoria and Hneentridophorus spinifer in Victoria and Nyasa. In every other case the species from the lakes differ from one another, and have been recorded only from a single lake, where, in some instances, they are endemic. Although this is so, there is not much evidence of that association of certain groups of forms with certain lakes, which is elsewhere a noticeable feature. It may, however, be pointed out that both species of Limnesia are re- corded only from Lake Victoria, while all the species of Arrhenurus come only from Nyasa. Other genera well represented are Unionicula and Newmania, but they both have an extended range and have representatives in each of the three bigger lakes. While 15 species in all are described as endemic, 10 of the remainder are known from other parts of Africa (including Madagascar) and 6 possess an even wider distribution. Under these circumstances there seems every probability that future exploration will prove many of the types to occur more generally in the lakes, though on the whole it may be predicted that in any case their precise distribution is little likely to afford evidence of a striking character. TARDIGRADA. It is not surprising that inconspicuous organisms belonging to this group have been seldom observed in the fresh-waters of Africa, Apart from a record of the existence of these forms in the Azores, there is, I believe, only the account given by Daday (76, p. 236) of specimens which Fiilleborn collected in and around Lake Nyasa. The specimens in this collection all belong to the species Macrobiotus tetronyx, which Daday established to receive them. While this form must be regarded as endemic in Nyasa, the genus Macrobiotus is known to have a cosmopolitan distri- bution, so that the existence of this particular species in the lake is doubtless a matter of little import. OLIGOCH ATA. ft is necessary, in compiling an account of the Oligochete worms from the lakes, to distinguish as far as possible between DT 4 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE the purely aquatic and the purely terrestrial forms. Yet this is nota simple task, for not only are there a number of types which lie on the border-line, but even the true earthworms in the tropics are semiaquatic in habit, living in very wet places not far from water. For the purposes of this paper, the border-lne species as well as the true aquatics have been retained, those forms being excluded which are generally recognised as earth- worms. It follows from what has been said, that even worms with specific names such as tanganyike have been omitted fiom the list when the name has been applied to a terrestrial species. Aquatic Gligocheta ave recorded from five out of the six lakes under review, but there is reason to suppose that a good many more records will be for theoming. The list which follows ‘gives the impression of being incomplete, yet it incorporates, I ations. all the available information. Since a number of these forms are small and inconspicuous, it is not unlikely that they have hitherto escaped notice. No species have been reported from Edward Nyanza. In a few eases, records have been inserted without specific determination. While these are unsatisfactory. they still bave a certain value, as proving the occurrence of a particular genus. Table of Distribution of Oligocheta *. a Tangan- Victoria : Albert 7a Other parts of Name of Species, yika. Nyanza. yeaa Nyanza. a the world. Family NarpOMORPHA. Naidium sp. r Nais sp. 2 Dero sp. ire ite P Anlophorn us stuhlmanni ...... K Pristina tengiseta ..;...........- EF Kurope, America. Family ALLUROIDID®. Alluroides tanganyike ...... le Rhodesia. Family MEGASCOLECID&. P Sub-family Ocnerodriline. Ocnerodrilus ee cunningtonl pees taco EK Pygmeodr lus affinis ......... E % bipunctatus ... i P Pr K. Africa. 5 bukobensis i K KS prawerti ...... E . kiwuensis ...... E - Family GLOSSOSCOLECIDZ. Subfamily Oriodriline. Alma emini. Rech camaatcree i . stuhlmanni .......c. ig big | Re Atpadar 9 genera ...... Bee 4P. ook. Py 12s eS 14 species .. 2H, 1P. 4B, 2 BP, 2P. LE £P. (2) (3) (6) + The records of these forms from the African lakes are somewhat scattered in the literature of the subject. (120: 121), who gives a bibliography. Refer especially to Beddard (12: 13) and to Michaelsen FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 57D An examination of the table of distribution suggests in the first instance that there are certain gaps in the list etch future investigation will surely fill. It is strange, for example, that no representatiy es of the Naidomorpha have been found in Tangan- yika or in the smaller lakes, for it does not seem likely that they are entirely wanting. Secondly, it is clear that very few of the forms enumerated have been observed in more than one lake, half of them being classed as endemic. Out of a total of 14 species, the highest ‘number recorded from a single lake is 6 (Victoria Nyanza). There is no indication in this case of a marked pre-eminence for Tanganyika either in the number or peculiarity of its forms. Lake Victoria leads the way with 6 species, 4 of which are endemic, Tanganyika coming second, with exactly half that number (3 in all, 2 endemic). Lake Kivu also contains an endemic form. The species are distributed among a large number of genera (nine), only two of which—Pygmecodrilus and Alma—are represented by more than a single type. Lake Victoria again heads the list with representatives of four genera, Tanganyika and Nyasa coming next, each with three. No endemic genera occur. It would serve no good purpose to review in detail the distri- bution of the different genera and species, but reference may be briefly made to the nature of the Oligochete fauna of each lake. Tanganyika alone contains a member of the Alluroidide. This worm—Alluroides tanganyike—was first described from Tanganyika, but has since been obtained from Rhodesia in the neighbourhood of the Victoria Falls. Two endemic species of Ocnerodrilinee complete the list: there are no Naids or Criodrilines known.-——-In Victoria Nyanza the types are more uniformly distributed among the families concerned. Of four endemic species, two belong to the genus Pygmeodrilus and one each to 4Aulophorus and Alma.—From Nyasa only three Naid genera of wide range are on record. Pristina longiseta, which I collected in that lake, is the only worm in the list which occurs outside the continent of Africa, being known both from Europe and America. It is strange that ether aquatic Oligo- cheetes have not been forthcoming from this lake as a result “of its careful exploration by Fiilleborn.—Lakes Albert and Kivu each contain but two species. Two forms of Pygmcodrilus (one endemic) come from Kivu, with one Pygmaodrilus and an Alma from Albert. Ne Naids have so far been observed. These lakes, together with Lake Edward, have recently been visited by the German Central Africa Expedition, and it is, therefore, the more surprising that no Oligochete worms have been found in Lake Edward. HIRUDINEA. There is but little known of the leeches which inhabit the great lakes of Central Africa: indeed, there appears to be only a single published record concerning them, which is that of 576 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE Blanchard (15) deseribing forms collected by Stuhlmann. It is in a measure surprising that these creatures should have escaped attention, since they are neither minute nor inconspicuous. During my expedition to the great lakes I was able to collect a considerable number of specimens, the majority of which were obtained in Tanganyika. Some examples, however, were found in Victoria Nyanza (from which a representative had already been recorded by Blanchard), and also in Nyasa, where they constitute a new record. With this opportunity for gaining a fuller knowledge of these forms, it 1s the more to be regretted that no report has yet been received from the expert to whom the collection was submitted for examination. The leech which is already known from Lake Victoria was termed [Hirudo hildebrandti by Blanchard (15, p. 5). It is not confined to the lake, specimens having been collected also in Mombasa. In the same paper a new genus and species belonging to the family Herpobdellide is described under the name of Salifa persprcax. This form was collected by Stuhlmann in Kiriwia, which is described as north-west of Edward Nyanza. I have not been able to identify this locality, but it appears doubtful whether this species should be included in the fauna of this or any of the lakes. It is hardly safe to foreshadow the results of a proper exa- mination of the specimens collected by the Third Tanganyika Expedition. It may nevertheless be stated that they will in all probability prove to belong to some five or six different species, of which the greater number come from Tanganyika. This is only in accordance with what has already been observed in so many animal groups. ‘The leeches were found for the most part in shallow water, under stones or on shells, but some were dredged in about 10 fathoms. NEMATODA. There is hardly any information available concerning the Nematodes of the great lakes. In the extensive plankton material collected by Filleborn in and around Nyasa, Daday detected certain free-living forms, which he identified and de- scribed. Reporting on Stuhlmann’s collections, Collin records a single specimen of a free-living Nematode (which he leaves undetermined) from Victoria Nyanza, and also examples of a well-known parasitic type—Ascaris spiculigera—obtained from a pelican on Lake Edward (64, p. 10). During -my expedition to the three big lakes, I was able to procure a considerable number of parasitic Nematodes from the fish which passed through my hands. Whether such forms can be legitimately regarded as part of the lake fauna may be ques- tioned, but as they are associated in this case with genuine inhabitants of the lakes, I am disposed to include them. Un- fortunately these specimens have not been reported upon, so that little can be added to this bare record of their existence. The majority of them are from the body-cavity or gut of Tanganyik FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES, 577 fishes, but some were obtained from a large Siluroid taken in Victoria Nyanza. In all, these parasites were collected from 8 different species of fish, belonging to 8 genera and 5 families. Since these fishes are, with a single exception, endemic forms, it is likely that their parasitic Nematodes will prove interesting and perhaps new to science. 1t does not seem logical to regard the Ascaris from the Edward Nyanza pelican as belonging to the fauna of that lake, and as the specimens I collected have not been identified or described, the only records available for the purposes of this paper are those of the free-living types from Nyasa. The species *, which all belong to the family Anguillulide, may be enumerated as follows :— 1. Monhystera filleborni. Described as new from a single specimen in the surface plankton. 2. Monhystera vulgaris. A species known previously only from Europe. Obtained near the mouth of a river which enters the lake. 3. Monhystera similis. Likewise recorded from Europe and found in the neighbour- hood of Nyasa. 4, Trilobus graciloides. This species has been described as new by Daday. It comes from the vicinity of Nyasa, but has also been taken on the swampy shores of Lake Rukwa. 5. Mononchus tenwis. Under this name Daday described a single male specimen which he found in a sample of mud brought from the bottom of Nyasa at a depth of 200 metres. 6. Monochus macrostoma. Collected in a pool near the lake. Also known from Europe. 7. Dorylaimus macrolaimus. A European species which appears to be common in the waters around Nyasa, but has not been observed in the lake itself. Out of a total of 7 species, 2 may be regarded as peculiar to the lake fauna, while one of the remaining forms is confined to Kast Africa. The others are known also in Europe. Thus there is no indication that the free-living Nematoda of Nyasa are in any way remarkable or specialised, and information is not available concerning either free-living or parasitic types from any of the other lakes. * Particulars of these will be found in Daday’s monograph (76, p. 44). 578 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE RoOriIrERA. The Rotifera of the African lakes are still very imperfectly known, and the table of distribution which follows probably gives quite an inadequate idea of the fauna. No information is available for Lakes Edward and Kivu, and very little for Lake Albert. Tanganyika, Victoria Nyanza, and Nyasa have been better, though very unequally investigated. The latter has been fairly well explored in this direction by the efforts of Fiilleborn, who obtained numerous examples of the lake plankton and, in addition, suitable material from neighbouring ponds, swamps, and rivers. ‘Tow-nettings from all three lakes were procured by my expedition, the largest series coming from Tanganyika, but with the single exception of samples taken in the broad mouth of the Lofu River, which enters Tanganyika, I did not collect outside the confines of the lakes themselves. Thus, while the truly lacustrine types from Nyasa and ‘Tanganyika may be fitly compared, the Nyasa total is enormously swollen by species from the adjoiming neighbourhood, whereas the region around Tan- ganyika remains almost entirely unexplored. In addition to my small collections from Victoria Nyanza, there have been those of Stuhlmann, Borgert, and Alluaud, but the Rotifera of the rivers etc., within its drainage area are likewise practically unknown. Table of Distribution of Rotiferat. : Tangan- Victoria F Albert Other parts of Name of Species. yika. Nyanza. Nyasa. Nyanza. the Sou Order PLoIMA. ; Notommata copeus ............ Pet P§ ; .... Europe, Asia, N. America. ts pachwurd’./-...... P§ Europe, N. America. f tripus Hos ieee ae P§ Cosmopolitan. Pleurotrocha daphnicola ...... PS oe Europe, N. America. Cephalodella forficula ......... P§ Cosmopolitan. Diaschiza forficata P§ Europe, America. . gibba ae P8§ Cosmopolitan. i EosiGhi sleeper eee PS Europe. Monommata orbis eee P§ Kurope, N. America. Dicranophorus auritus—...... P§ Europe, Asia, N. America. Pe forcipatus P§ Europe, Asia, N. America. Encentrum caudatum ......... P§ Europe, N. America. Epiphanes oblonga ee ‘3 i K§ if clavulatus ......... Bt P ae Europe. is lotos P§ Asia. x brachionus SpiNOSUS .0.4....5 bi a. P§ ... Europe, S. America. Pmacrourus ....... ee P iP :.. .. Asia Minor: + The principal sources from which this table has been compiled are Rousselet (150), Collin (64), and Daday (76, p. 59), where further particulars will be found. It is well to explain that the names under which the species are enumerated are mostly those adopted by Harring in his “Synopsis of the Rotatoria”, Washington, 1913. § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES, 579 Name of Species. Tangan- Racers Nyasa. pee te ben es yika. Nyanza. Nyanza. tlie world. Brachionus angularis ......... oe Ie P§ ... Cosmopolitan. 39 39 caudatus ... .... ae 1a PS ... Rhodesia, N. America. e calyciflorus ...... P Be P .... Cosmopolitan. bP) be) GONCAS'..s een, - ae P ... Europe, N. America. sy sapsuliflorus ...... ee es Ps .. Cosmopolitan, bys) 99 bidentatus ...... i a ae P Asia, Europe. 55 AUC AL US! 2.5, soe tectve P Te ... Cosmopolitan. k forticmlan: i e..s... P Ag ... Kurope. i mirabilis [........ an a sess ... New Guinea, S. America. ¥) CEA UU ae RR PS§ E Ez .... Cosmopolitan. ., quadridentatus ... P P tis ; ~-urceus see ie. ip PS fe f Platy ias Quadricornis ......... PS BE Ps rE " 99 brevispinus Ieee P§ nee - ... Asia, S. America. Schizocerca diversicornis MOMOCETOS, 6.04. ho ks eee eee oe g ba ... Europe. Keratella cochlearis ............ 2 leg P§ ... Cosmopolitan. uae @uadrata ...az..... PB P Pp eae Ps valga ...... PS ike 1 P Notholea striata GIDIS) ys siege aes 7 Le leg - is AMuTeOpsis fissa” |... ..s i oS: PS * Mytilina compressa ............ oe ca P&S Kurope, N. America. a mucronata . nee Re - PS Cosmopolitan. . s spinigera ae Sal P§ Europe, Asia. is MEMGEALISS 25a: -vaewc. 3 ES Rs Ps ... Cosmopolitan. Si brevispina. P ee P Es 4 Euchlanis dilatata ............ i ba iS A, s re ro 10) 0): hr P§ te ei ...° Kurope, N. America, Aastralia. ao triqwetra sl... i002... re ae PS Cosmopolitan. - hy alina .. P§ Be ee ... Europe. Dipleuchlanis pro opatula ...... P§ P§ me .... Europe, N. America, Asia. Lecane gissensis. ............... a ie le ... Europe, N. America. 59 Tipara De ee eye e ae Ps. Europe. 3 Chena Pe P§ Cosmopolitan. 5 leontina aed es BS Asia, America. ipo LALO CL ee ee ee a Es ungulata es oe as .... Kurope, N. America, Asia. Monosty la bulla P iE Nee P = Cosmopolitan. - lunaris P§ RP P§ ‘5 3... hamata PS Europe, America. Lepadella ovalis + eee be Cosmopolitan. es ACUMIRAUA’ © seco acka: P§ :, ae Clisbabasnitet Es Europe, N. America. e patella 4 PS§ Sosmopolitan, Colurella colui'a: ....6c..<.02 00: P§ Europe, N. America, Australia. - adriatica eo PS Europe, Asia. 9 Hicuspidata ...2.... Bs Cosmopolitan. deflexa P§ ... Europe, America. 5 uncinata det P§ +s.) Hurope: Trichotria pocillum ............ P§ Cosmopolitan. Scaridium longicaudum ...... Sa ses ES ” Pedaliatmaia hsnks fw wck\ 2. a Me P wre » Milinvagoneiseta. ..ovs ot dso. ae P. P§ : 5 Tetramastix opoliensis ......... a Je P .... Europe, Rhodesia. Trichocerca bicristata ......... P§ Ae a ... Europe, Asia, N. America. 5 etastatay asi oc. At a BS .... Cosmopolitan. § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area, 580 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE Neead Mele ee tes Tangan- Victoria oy yes Albert Other parts of aa yika. Nyanza. yas.“ Nyauza. the world. Trichocerca elongata ......... a at PSs .... Cosmopolitan. fe MOVMIS) co esteee cic P§ mS ie ... Europe, N. America. a longiseta ......... Ps re ane .... Cosmopolitan. s MMAGETA (open bis P§ i ee ... Europe, N. America. Ms rattus iB Cosmopolitan. ss SCIPIO’ Lacceeseeeee ash P§ is i SLY lata eset P P Europe, S. America. Diurella stylata P Europe, N. America. 55 benuior P§ Cosmopolitan. i Heris Re SNe ae PS§ e Syncheta oblonga............... P§ P§ Europe, N. America, Australia. F pecuimatads cc. aan P Cosmopolitan. Oo Ne EYGMUME Meet nce tee eee ee P§ e Rolyarthra trigla ees nee P # i kok RA Sphiyrias loiuana; -.. 20.4 see P§ a. a .. o N, Amentigas Asplanchna brightwellii ...... see P iP ... Europe, N. America, Australia. i intermedia ...... P a4 cs .. Europe, N. America. Asplanchnopus multiceps P§ Cosmopolitan. Testudinella patina ............ J. ef PS ae sf ee trilobata: su: -.. P§ Australia. Order RHIzZOTA. Floscularia ringens ............ P Cosmopolitan. Limnias melicerta............ ae P z Ptyoura mucicola <5... P§ ye ae .. IN. America, Sinantherina spinosa ......... e aH Ps .... Cosmopolitan. Conochilus hippocrepis....... P§ is Collotheca ornatay...<..0..02.-2 iP Europe, N. America, Australia. Order BDELLOIDA. Philodioascitrinas 7s oscee A P§ Cosmopolitan. r GMAT Uy gare ees t ase E§ i TOSCONA Yevctcatsntees P§ Cosmopolitan. Rotifer macroceros ............ Pe ee P§ re SI Sih) MMACTOTUSS secu aaaen em La PS es 53 oh. WLI PATS. ihn cee a P§ P§ a ‘5 Sactinurus oes P§ * ee ——- ——_—— —_—— AD ONCTA alton ot eos. «el Ogee ile es 37 P. 4P, ee Se —__— —_—_ 105 species and subspecies... 1E,28P. 1KH.24P. 1E,84P. 4P. (29) (25) (85) § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. Attention has already been called to the fact that the Rotifera of Nyasa are in all probability better known than those of the other lakes. Of 105 forms enumerated, 85 are reported from that lake, while only 29 are given for Tanganyika, 25 for Victoria Nyanza, and 4 for Albert Nyanza. Examination of the Nyasa records shows that a much smaller total has been observed in the lake proper, and indeed it is the latter figure, compared with cor- responding figures.from the other lakes, which affords a truer basis of comparison than those given above, since the forms collected from the surrounding neighbourhood are almost unknown except for Nyasa. Disregarding Albert Nyanza—from which informa- tion is very meagre,-—the totals of those Rotifers taken within the limits of the lakes themselves are found to be:—Nyasa 22, FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 58] Victoria Nyanza 21, and Tanganyika only 8. Clearly there is little disproportion between Lakes Victoria and Nyasa, but Tan- ganyika shows a marked reduction in number. It is probable that the low figure for Tanganyika proper has some relation to the nature of the lake water, which appears to be somewhat. un- suited to these organisms. Lousselet points out in his report on my collections (150, p. 794) that there is a striking difference between the scanty Rotiferan fauna of the lake and the far richer fauna which he observed in a small quantity of material from the Lofu River. ‘Tanganyika water contains an unusual amount of magnesium salts, and though very little is really known concerning the influence of such salts on fresh-water organisms, this seems likely to be the cause of the dissimilarity between lake and river in this respect. The matter has already been discussed in some detail in connection with the complete absence of Cladocera from the lake (cf. p. 569). On examining the list of Rotifera more closely, it will be observed that with three exceptions, the forms are all known from other parts of the world, many of them, in fact, being cosmopolitan in their distribution. A single endemic species is enumerated from each of the three bigger lakes, but apart from Lecane lofwana described from the Lofu River, these are of only doubtful value. The facilities for dispersal which the Rotifers possess are well known, and quite account for this wide distri- bution. In the case of these organisms, therefore, no deductions of any value can be made from the presence or absence of a species in a particular lake, and the interest attaching to a com- parative table of distribution is, in consequence, small. Nor does a study of the actual genera and species occurring disclose features of much significance, although one or two com- ments may be offered. In all, 42 genera are enumerated, of which again the largest number is found in Nyasa. ‘Those best represented are Brachionus with 12 species, or well-marked varieties, Z'richocerca with 9 and Lecane with 6, while nearly all the more important genera are known from at least two of the lakes. Certain cosmopolitan species have been identified from all the four lakes under consideration. There is little to note in the way of unexpected forms or of types unaccountably absent. A subspecies of Lrachionus—B. capsuliflorus bidentatus,-—-which was isolated from the Albert Nyanza material, is apparently very rare, having been observed only in Calcutta and more recently in Bulgaria. Furthermore, Rousselet has pointed out that the genus tsplanchna is recorded from the lakes, but has not been obtained in South Africa.—In conclusion, it will be observed that asin the case of the Cladocera — which are also of extended distri- bution,—there is no indication of an exceptional fauna peculiar to Tanganyika, or indeed to any of the lakes. GASTROTRICHA. Representatives of this group may eventually prove to be widely distributed in the African lakes, but at present there is 58Y DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE little information at hand concerning them. An account of certain forms collected by Stuhlmann at Bukoba, Lake Victoria, is given by Collin (64), while other species which Fiilleborn otis in the neighbourhood of Nyasa have been identified by Daday (76, p. 56). No Gastrotricha were observed by me during my expedition to the great lakes. The species * may be enume- rated as follows :—- 1. Lepidoderma squamatum. A species well known in Kurope and occurring also in North America. A single specimen was collected in a pool near the shores of Nyasa. 2. Lepidoderma hystria. Under this name Daday described a form obtained from the sauine locality as the above. It has not been observed elsewhere. 3. Lehthydium macrurum. This type was described as new by Collin, but the species rests upon a diagrammatic figure and a very incomplete description. It was found at Buleoba, a station on the shores of Victoria Nyanza, and has not been re-discovered, so that it may be looked upon as a species of rather doubtful value. Chetonotus formosus. This form, like the two species of Lepidoderma, has been identified from the vicinity of Lake Nyasa. Previous to this discovery it was only known from North America. 5. Chetonotus pusillus. A single specimen of this type, hitherto only recorded from Paraguay, was isolated by Daday from material collected in the Mbasi River close to its entrance into Nyasa. Two species of Chetonotus are, according to Collin, among the Gastrotricha which Stuhlmann recorded from Lake Were 1a, but in neither case has it been possible to identify them further. Brief notes made on the spot, accompanied in one case by a sketch, form all the information available. It is doubtful whether either of these types was observed in water from the lake itself. 6. Gossea pauciseta. Another species previously known only from Paraguay. Several specimens of this were obtained from a pond in the Nyasa district. On a survey of this list the following facts appear. Five species are on record from Nyasa, one of which 4 is peculiar to that * For further particulars of these forms, consult Collin (64, p. 9) and Daday (76, p. 56). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 583 lake. From Victoria Nyanza three different forms have been reported, of which one was described as new and has not been found elsewhere. ‘The two remaining types were not specifically identified, and indeed all three species from this lake rest on a somewhat insecure basis. None of the recorded species occur in both Victoria and Nyasa, and it appears probable that none were actually observed in the waters of the lakes themselves. No Gastrotricha are known at present from any of the other African lakes. TURBELLARIA. There can be little doubt that Turbellavians are relatively uncommon in the lakes as well as in other parts of Central Africa. Stuhlmann, a careful observer, who had opportunities for collecting in many parts of the country, remarks on the scarcity of these organisms, and in particular on the scarcity of the fresh-water Dendroceels, which are usually common in ponds and streams (181, pp. 1262 & 1268: 182, p. 652: 185, p. 349). During my expedition to the great lakes, 1 only obser ved Aurbel- larians in Tanganyika. They were found on the under side of stones in shallow water, and all proved to belong to a single species of the well-known genus Planaria. Prior to the description of this Tanganyikan form by Laidlaw (107), the only work dealing with species from the lakes was that of Bohmig (17), who reported on the collections made by Stuhlmann. Unfortu- nately, the accounts in this paper are based almost entirely on sketches and notes made on the spot, which often lack details of importance for systematic determination. Although the records must thus be regarded as of doubtful value, I insert them here without further comment. The following species * come within the scope of this survey :— 1. Planariatanganyike. This is the type from ‘Tanganyika to which reference has been made. It is the only species known from that lake and has not been obtained elsewhere. 2. Stenostoma leucops. A form known in Europe and also in North America. On the evidence of drawings, recorded from the neighbourhood of Bukoba, on Victoria Nyanza. 3. Stenostoma stuhlmanni. Described as new by Bohmig from Stuhlmann’s notes and sketches. Observed at Bukoba, Lake Victoria aud unknown elsewhere. 4. Stenostoma gilvun. Another species based only on a drawing and a few notes and * For details, consult the above-mentioned papers: Bohmig (17) and Laidlaw (107). 584 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE recorded from the same locality as 8S. stuhlmanni. Nothing further is known of this form Kxamples of two species of Stenostoma from Bukoba were among the material examined by Bohmig, but their unfavourable state of preservation did not permit of nearer identification. 5. Gyrator hermaphroditus. A pelagic Turbellarian collected in Victoria Nyanza is identified with this species by Bohmig. It is well known in Europe. 6. Vortex quadridens. This type is established merely on the evidence of sketches and notes by Stuhlmann. It is admitted that certain important features of the genital apparatus are unknown. Obtained from stagnant water at Bukoba. From the above it will be observed that 'Turbellaria are only recorded at present from Lakes Victoria and Tanganyika. From Victoria Nyanza and its neighbourhood five forms have been specifically identified, three of them being peculiar to the lake. There are, in addition, two types which are unnamed. ‘These records of Bohmig, however, need confirmation, as they are based on very meagre evidence. From Tanganyika a single endemic species is known, which belongs to the widely distributed genus Planaria *, No doubt further representatives of this group will eventually be found in the great lakes, but they appear to be less common than might have been expected. There is no suggestion of a striking Tur bellarian fauna in Tanganyika and little indica- tion that such will be discovered in the future. TREMATODA. Practically nothing is known of the distribution of these exclusively parasitic animals in the lakes of Africa. Following the argument advanced in the section dealing with the Nematoda, it seems only logical to include such forms in a lake fauna. In the case of these organisms they may be obtained in the free- swimming larval stage, or infesting an intermediate Molluscan host or in their final vertebrate host. As far as I am aware, the description given by Daday (76, p. 39) of two Cercaria larvee from the neighbourhood of Nyasa is the only account which concerns any of the lakes. Both were found in material from ponds near Nyasa and were described as new larvee, though it seems doubtful whether such determinations have much systematic value. They have received the names of “ Cercaria” schizocerca and “ Cercaria” hoplophora %6, p. 288). * It seems clear that Stuhlmann’s statement that Planarians cannot survive temperatures of over 25° C. (185, p. 349) is not universally true. The specimens I collected in Tanganyika were taken in quite shallow water, where the temperature tends to be highest, yet my thermometer readings for the surface of the lake showed a higher average than 28°. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES, 585 In the course of my expedition I collected in Tanganyika a few Trematodes which are parasitic on fish. They constitute a new record for this lake, but have not yet been examined and described. The specimens were taken from large Siluroids, one case from the gill-arches, in another from the gut. CESTODA. As far as I have been able to ascertain, no records have been published of tape-worms from the lakes included in this survey, although Daday described two new larvee which he observed in Kast’ African Copepods. Different forms of tape-worm proved common in the gut of fishes examined for parasites by my expedition, and I succeeded in getting a considerable number of specimens. These all came from Tanganyika, where I had better opportunity than elsewhere to seek such organisms, but it is clear that systematic examination would not only bring to hght enteric parasites from the fishes of other lakes, but would result in a far richer series from Tanganyika. My material has only received a preliminary examination, so that little information can yet be given as to the nature of the Tanganyika forms. » aureus Ps Kurope. » globator Ps Europe, Asia, America. Order DINOFLAGELLATA. Ceratium brachyceros ......... ee K * hirundinella ......... Be: Pp es Cosmopolitan. = macroceros eh Aye Pp. Kurope, Asia. Peridinium africanum ......... IP. Ie a berolinense......... P Me Kurope. ‘> imconspicuum ... re P Cosmopolitan. ie palatinum ......... Ps Europe. - quadridens......... 2 Europe, Asia, S. America. 5 tabulatum ..0.. 4 x iP Cosmopolitan. Peridiniopsis cunningtonil ... A) Glenodinium pulvisculus ... P le P Europe, Australia. Class CILIATA. Order CILIATA VERA. Enchelyodon farctus P Europe, N. America. Coleps hirtus®.) ..:..0..:5..02 P§ Cosmopolitan. Loxophyllum meleagris ...... P Europe, N. America. Trachelius ovum Pp Cosmopolitan. Dileptus anser Rett Ahad gamer ole ad P Europe, America, Australia. Nassua Spy. sheik OP ee at Ne Colpidiam:sp, 74423 45N ae OP Paramecium aurelia ......... be ae Bis Cosmopolitan. Spirostomum ambiguum ...... sr iP ie Cosmopolitan. Condylostoma isp. i% 20905," PR Stentor roeselii 94.0.0 .-2.02.6002; vet iP Se Europe, America. Tintinnopsis ovalis ............ iP. Kurope. Uronychia paupera Hd eee KH § Trichodimasp.'G0....22°2 eS —P Morticellanliunarneee st). o tar oe P§ Kurope, N.America, Australia. be microstoma ......... ag Pp P Cosmopolitan. “f nebulifera ......... ae P Bes Kurope, America, Australia. — Zoothamnium arbuscula ...... Ps Europe, America. o patasitas 2% ec ie Ps Europe. Epistylis anastatica ............ 00... Pr P§ Cosmopolitan. eae y Ps Buren tee > umbellaria, ...)01 R 2 P§ Europe. | Operculariasnutans <: 02. ee P. hd Europe, America, Australia. Cothurnia crystallina ......... “ ike P§ Cosmopolitan. Be UT CISEL:. | n hteceaMeeeeee ay aaa K * lobatas .8tulpalae GN as i Order SucTORIA. Podophytais. a.cee scree ene 8 Tokophyra cyclopum Ps Europe, N. America, Acineta symbiotica le K. Africa. » tuberosa Ps Europe, Asia. AS SENNA ci sucicsclhacqemseneten, WOME 25 Ps it ae 4 P. Me O7 SPECIES .2.u.24.07. 1 eee Olea noe tee 21K,58P. 4 P, Bhs ee (7) (37) (60) § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 59] The most obvious comment on the table of distribution is the great inequality in the totals recorded from the biggest lakes—an Inequality which is obviously due in this instance to unequal investigation. Of the 87 species enumerated, 60 occur in Nyasa, 37 in Victoria Nyanza, and only 7 in Tanganyika. While it is impossible to predict what figures will be forthcoming when the Protozoa of the lakes are better known, the figures at present available are mevely an index of this disproportionate investiga- tion. The records from Nyasa are the result of the extensive col- lections made by Fiilleborn, which were reported on by Daday (76). It will be noticed that more than half the species identified were not obtained in the lake itself, but came from river mouths, pools, and swamps in the vicinity. Victoria Nyanza has been less adequately explored in this direction, smaller collections being made by Stuhlmann and more recently by Borgert and others. In his book on the Tanganyika Problem, Moore devotes a few paragraphs to the Protozoa of the lake (137, p. 323). The two forms which he mentions by name—a Condylostoma and a large Infusorian which he refers with some hesitation to the genus Colpidium— have been inserted in the table of distribution. He describes the latter organism as the cause of the yellow clouds which occur on the surface at times and make the water appear “as if tinged with a fine golden dust.” This effect was also observed by Livingstone, who thought the yellow scum to be of vegetable origin. [I have repeatedly observed the phenomenon myself, not only on Tanganyika, but on Nyasa, and without denying other possibilities, I can confidently assert that it is usually due to hmnetic Algee. In conclusion, Moore remarks that he found some twenty types of Protozoa belonging to groups common in tropical fresh-waters. A consideration of the lst of species shows that in the great majority of cases the forms are widely distributed if not cosmopolitan in range. There are very few endemic species enumerated—four in Lake Victoria, two in Nyasa, and one in Tanganyika—and most of these are ‘of little interest. Peridind- opsis cunningtonii from Tanganyika, and Uronychia paupera from Nyasa, are perhaps of more interest, since in each case they are only the second described species of the genus. Forty-eight genera are mentioned in the table of distribution, of which the greatest number occur in Nyasa. This is a large proportion e genera to species, but is accounted for by the aannver of gener represented by only a single species. None of the genera are endemic, No good purpose would be served by commenting in detail on the genera and species in the list, but one or two further remarks on their distribution may be offered. As far as the Rhbizopoda are concerned, the lists from Victoria Nyanza aad Nyasa may be reasonably compared, and they exhibit a close degree of similarity. The well-known genera Arcella and Dijfflugia are each represented by a number of species. It is in the remaining groups that there 592 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE has been inequality of investigation, so that the Euflagellata, for example, are only represented in Lake Victoria by a couple of forms as contrasted with a large number from Nyasa. Volvow africanus is an interesting species which was established to receive specimens brought by Leiper from Albert Nyanza. It can no longer be regarded as endemic, since it has been observed in another part of Hast Africa. The Dinoflagellates are recorded from four lakes, and a comparison may thus be instituted. Lake Victoria contains representatives of the genera Ceratium and Glenodimum*. The former genus is wanting in Tanganyika, where, however, Peridiniwm and Peridiniopsis replace it. In Nyasa, Ceratium and Peridiniwm occur; in Lake Albert, Peri- dinium and Glenodinium. It is particularly among the ciliated forms that a number of genera occur represented only by a single species. The Z’richodina mentioned, which has not been specific- ally identified, is parasitic upon the Tanganyika jelly-fish. Since the latter, or a variety of it, 1s known from Victoria Nyanza, it may well be that a U'richodina accompanies the medusa there also, but I have no information on the subject. In conclusion, it only remains to point out that the Protozoa, as at present known, give no indication of an exceptional fauna peculiar to any lake. At the same time it is precisely in Tanganyika, if anywhere, that such might be expected, and that lake remains virtually unexplored in this direction. 4, GENERAL DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS. Having completed the systematic review of the animals at present known to oecur in the lakes, the points of interest ’ concerning their distribution may now be fittingly discussed. Far the most noticeable feature is that which has so repeatedly shown itself, namely the unique nature of the fauna of ‘Tan- ganyika. With a recorded total of over 400 different animal types, the lake is clearly exceptional ; moreover, no details of certain groups which are known to occur are yet available for incorporation. As this treatise is concerned so largely with Tanganyika, it may not be out of place to illustrate here in a graphic manner, the growth of knowledge concerning its fauna. The curve which follows may be regarded as approximately correct. It is clear that the labour of ‘ascertaining the date of discovery or description of every type—even if possible—would be out of proportion to the value of such a record. The largest addition to the total (159 species in all) was made by the writer’s expedition, which obtained, moreover, practically all the infor- mation on the flora of the lake. * Virieux states that in the plankton which he examined he observed a specimen of Peridinium, but was unable to identify the species (197, p. 6). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 593 Text-figure 1. Curve showing growth of knowledge of Tanganyika fauna. 400 300 STAPOERS 192-13 % se! 1904-0 200 | OORE 1839450, 100 BIOORE 1898 1850 1860 i870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 The relative peculiarity of each lake fauna, as far as totals only are concerned, can be best illustrated by giving the figures in parallel columns with the marks E or P against them. Tangan- Victoria yika. Nyanza. Albert | Edward Nyasa. y Nyanza. Nyanza. Kavu. Geneta:) 6/011 P) 2, 1387 P.| 6H. 172 PP.) 1. 47 P- | 1K, 34P. sj] a | (68) (139) (vs) | (48): |. 1@s) | | ———_. Species 2931, 109 P.| 110K, 179P.| 86K, 275P. 9H, 58P. 11E, 43P. 48, 19 P. | t (402) (289) (B61) = | © (67) (54) (23) An examination of these totals at once reveals the chief points in which the fauna of Tanganyika is distinct. In the first place, the lake contains a more extensive series of forms (402) than any other. In the second place, those types greatly predominate which are unknown elsewhere (293 out of 402). Both these points, viz. total number of species and corresponding number of endemics, are shown graphically for each lake in the following table :— 594 DR. W. A. GUNNINGTON ON THE Text-figure 2. Table to illustrate richness of fauna and proportion of endemic species to the whole. 450 —— fi en 400 350 300 250 100 VICTORIA. ALBERT EDWARD KIVU Te RCNA aa NYANZA NYANZA NYANZA The height of each column represents the total number of species, and the shaded portion the number of endemic forms. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 59D It will be observed that the total figure for Nyasa, though some way behind that of Tanganyika, is still very large. Since in many cases—e. g. fishes, molluscs | prawns—Tanganyika has a much richer fauna, such a result is perhaps a little surprising. It is worth while to recount the facts which explain this. Firstly, the group of the Cladocera is entirely absent from Tanganyika, but well represented in Nyasa and elsewhere. This is probably due to the nature of the salts dissolved in the water, which appears also to have a restrictive influence on the Rotifera of the lake. Secondly, there are one or two groups of animals-—notably the Protozoa and free-living Nematoda—almost uninvestigated as far as Tanganyika is concerned, although tolerably well known for Nyasa. Lastly, the collections made by Fulleborn extended to the waters surrounding Nyasa, while the rivers, ponds, and swamps in the neighbourhood of Tanganyika remain unexplored. This has greatly increased the records for Nyasa, particularly in the groups Rotifera, Protozoa, and Enutomostraca. In the matter of endemic types, however, Tanganyika leaves Nyasa (and the other lakes) far behind, exhibiting an astonishing series of forms for which it is difficult to find a parallel. Expressing in percentages the figures already furnished, nearly 73 per cent. of the species in Tanganyika are peculiar to the lake, whilst Victoria Nyanza comes a poor second with 38 per cent., and Nyasa still further behind with some 24 per cent. The smaller lakes have not only smaller totals, but have a reduced proportion of endemic forms, namely 20 per cent. for Lake Edward, 17 per cent. for Kivu, and only 13 per cent. for Lake Albert. Nor is this all, for the number of endemic genera which Tanganyika contains places it in a category by itself. No fewer than 57 out of 168 are regarded as peculiar to the lake, or rather more than one-third of the total. As against this, Nyasa has 6 endemic genera out of 178, and Victoria Nyanza 2 out of 139, while Lakes Albert and Edw ard each possess but a single endemic genus. Tanganyika alone among these lakes has a family which can be regarded as endemic—that of the Tiphobiidee (Gasteropoda). It is thus clear that Tanganyika exhibits by far the most striking series of endemic animals of any of the Jakes under con- sideration—indeed, it must be recognised as one of the most remarkable lakes in the world. ‘There are only two lakes, as far as I know, which merit comparison with Tanganyika in this direction, viz. the Caspian Sea and Lake Baikal. Unfortunately I have been quite unable to obtain trustworthy figures of recent date with which to compare the particulars now available for the African lake. It seems probable, however, that Baikal even surpasses Tanganyika in the number of animal forms peculiar ; It appears that while relatively few groups are to its waters*. * Consult the series of monographs dealing with the results of the most recent scientific expedition—Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse einer Zoologischen Expedition nach dem Baikal-See unter Leitung des Professors Alexis Korotneff in den Jahren 1900-1902. Lieferungen 1-5. Kiew und Berlin 1905-1912. It is to be regretted that this work remains uncompleted, doubtless on account of the European war. 596 DR. W. A. CUNNING'TON ON THE represented, there is often a great richness of species within the groups. ‘The fishes are far fewer than those of Tanganyika and only half of them are endemic, while the Mollusca agree pretty closely in the number of endemic types. On the other hand, there are most extensive series of Oligochetes and Turbellarians, and an extraordinary wealth of Gammarids, the species being in each case nearly all endemic. In the case of the Caspian, T am able to quote figures, according to which some 64 per cent. of the animal forms are found nowhere else in the world (155, p. 34). If this statement can be relied upon, the Caspian Sea, while sufficiently remarkable, is less so than Tanganyika, which has nearly 73 per cent. of endemic types. Returning to a consideration of the fauna of Tanganyika, other features revealed in the Systematic Account may be summarised in a few sentences. Those groups which are most conspicuous in possessing endemic genera and species are the Pisces, Mollusca (especially Gasteropoda), and Macrura, with the Brachyura following closely. The Copepoda and Ostracoda are well represented by endemic species (but not genera), with the Porifera and Polyzoa showing smaller numbers. While other groups with few endemic species, appear, by contrast, devoid of significance, there are only five of ali those represented in the alee Mammen Crocodilia, Chelonia, Batrachia, and Ccelen- terata—which do not contain endemic types. It may be added that certain endemic forms are held to exhibit a marine aspect and have been termed thalassoid (halolimnic according to Moore). Such are many of the Gasteropod molluscs and perhaps a Polyzoon. In the same category comes the medusa, which, of course, 1s not confined to Tanganyika. The exceptional character of the Tanganyika fauna having been sufficiently emphasised, an explanation of this marked peculiarity must be sought. In other words, a general con- sideration of what Moore called the Tanganyika ‘ problem” must be undertaken. In order to appreciate the actual value of the purely biological evidence, it is necessary clearly tc understand the relations which exist between marine and _ fresh-water organisms. ‘lhe essential points may therefore be stated as briefly as possible * In the first place, while certain organisms are characteristic of the sea and others of fresh water, the distinctions which exist between marine and fresh-water forms are neither very great nor very definite. Secondly, it may be emphasised that the barriers which tend to prevent a change of medium are not wholly insur- mountable. At the same time fresh-water types are usually recognised in consequence of certain structural peculiarities directly due to their mode of life. Such features should be excluded as far as possible when deciding the systematic position of an organism, for it is only thus that a true idea of its inter- * These matters are discussed at greater length in several recent papers. Consult Solas (1'73), Cunnington (71), Gurney (97). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 597 relationships—which are quite independent of habitat—can be obtained. The undoubted affinities existing between marine and fresh- water organisms are the direct result of a community of descent, for there is no escape from the conclusion that life had its origin in the ocean. ‘Thus the forms now found in fresh-waters must have attained their present distribution in one of three ways :— (1) by a direct, active or passive migration from the sea; (2) by becoming terrestrial or swamp-loving in nature, and a tered adapting themselves to life in fresh water; (3) as a result of the isolation and subsequent freshening of some portion of the sea, due to movements of the earth's crust. Without speculating as to which of these methods has played the most important part, it may be pointed out that the salinity of the ocean has not been constant throughout the ages, but is doubtless greater now than in past geological times. Since certain types are known to have recently migrated from the sea, it is not hard to believe that many forms may have achieved the change during former epochs when the obstacles to be surmounted were somewhat less. It is hardly necessary to repeat that the view advocated by Moore assumes that the remarkable organisms found in Tanganyika have attained their present distribution by the third means, and have been modified from marine types in a basin cut off from the sea. Since the flora of a lake perforce exists under the same con- ditions as the fauna, it will be well, before proceeding, to make further reference to the plants of Tanganyika. The higher plants show no outstanding peculiarities. There are certainly 8 species of true aquatics which have been collected in Tanganyika alone among the lakes, but all these are well-known African—-or even cosmopolitan— -forms (¢f Rendle, 147). On the other hand, the Alge of Tanganyika differ markedly from those found in the aie big alae. a number being endemic, while a few are usually marine or brackish in habit. In all, some 21 species and 5 varieties are described as peculiar to Tanganyika. It is, however, the phytoplankton of the Jakes which affords the most interesting comparisons. The plankton of Tanganyika is much richer in species than that of either Nyasa or Victoria Nyanza. Out of a total of 85 species, more than 70 per cent. do not occur in the other two lakes, so that 1n this instance once more the features characteristic of ‘Tanganyika are exhibited. The presence in the lake of brackish-water and quasi-marine Algee may perhaps be accounted for by a period of growing salinity prior to the estab- lishment of an outlet. (For further particulars consult the detailed Report on the Fresh-water Alge of the Third Tanganyika Expedition, 2C0). It is natural that a good deal of attention has been attracted ‘to Tanganyika by the singular nature of its fauna, and it is not surprising that various suggestions have been offered in explanation of the facts. While it will be necessary to recount the several views which have been advanced, it is appropriate to 598 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE deal in the first instance with Moore’s hypothesis that Tang: anyika represents an old Jurassic sea. ‘This view, first put fomene dina paper published in 1898 (131), was subsequently developed and the evidence detaiied at considerable length in “ The Tanganyika Problem,’ 1903, (137). Being thus a widely known theory, it is only necessary to inquire how it accords with the facts which have since come to hight. From the botanical and geological, as well as from the zoological side, more information is available than when this hypothesis was propounded, and it may at once be said that recent discoveries do not favour the theory. As the zoological evidence has been examined and discussed in the body of this paper, it is only needful to summarise the conclusions. Moore’s view rests in the main on his comparison of certain marine fossil shells of the Jurassic period, with those of Gastero- pods living in the lake at the present day—coupled with his deductions as to the anatomy and relationships of the latter forms. It has already been explained (p. 549) that, in the opinion of leading experts, neither of these claims can be substantiated. If the comparison with Jurassic fossils is held to be inadmissible, the period of the supposed connection with the ocean remains in doubt, but while Moore subsequently declared that he attached no great weight to this comparison (138, p. 602). he still adhered to his view that the so-called halolimnic animals were truly marine or relict forms. As faras the molluscs are concerned, the opinion of Pelseneer is in direct conflict with this view, for he regards the halolimnic Gasteropods as emphatically fresh-water types. In this connection it may well be asked—-why are there no thalassoid Lamellibranchs in Tanganyika? There seems no obvious explanation of the fact, yet surely some members of this group would also exhibit a thalassoid appearance had they been relict forms from the ocean. ‘This itself is evidence which tells against the view of a reliet origin for the fauna. Nor do the other members of Moore’s group of halolimnic animals definitely support his contention. The medusa, once so important, and admittedly a marine type, has lost most of its significance. Not only are fresh-water meduse known to occur more widely than was formerly supposed, but the Tanganyika species has been found in the Niger and in Victoria Nyanza The Decapod Crustacea—prawns and crabs—regarded in ‘ The Tanganyika Problem” as constituents of the halolimnic group, have been shown to belong to typically fresh-water families. Much stress was formerly la id upon the incrusting gymnolematous Polyzoon Arachnoidea, but recent discoveries lave modified its importance. Since the genus is now actually living in Asiatic seas, it can hardly be regarded as an ancient marine type persisting only in Tanganyika, but must rather be looked upon as a recent importation (cf. the analogous case of Victorella, p. 540). Finally the sponges belong to the family Spongillide, a charac- teristically fresh-water assemblage. Thus, of the succession of FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 599 animals from different groups which constituted Moore’s halo- limnic series, none are accepted as pecularly marine save the Polyzoon Arachnoidea and the medusa. But more than this. The endemic animal forms have been described almost without exception as specialised and not primi- tive types. It is true that Moore regarded the remarkable Gasteropods as essentially primitive in nature, but this view is not shared by other writers (p. 550). If the halolimnic animals ave inaeed relict forms, they must have been cut off at some remote era—though it need not have been the Jurassic period — and ought in consequence to exhibit primitive rather than specialised characteristics. This review of the zoological evidence makes it clear that on such grounds it is impossible to justify the contention that Tanganyika was connected with the sea in Jurassic times, or indeed that a connection with the sea ever existed. It is there- fore necessary to inquire what light may be thrown on the subject by the evidence of geology. In his book, Moore maintained that resting on the Archean granites, gneisses, and schists which appear to constitute the basement rocks of the continent, three types of sedimentary rock are to be recognised. The lowest of these consists of beds of sandstone and shale, which are not only well developed in the neighbourhood of the great lakes, but appear to extend over vast aveas of the African interior, including a large part of the Congo basin. Then follow the beds discovered by Drummond _north- west of Nyasa, and covering these in turn, white shelly deposits (Pleistocene) laid down by the lakes themselves. Drummond’s beds being regarded as Triassic in age and probably estuarine, Moore considered the great beds of sandstone and conglomerate as evidence of an extensive ocean which at some still earlier period covered a great part of the lake regions of Central Africa (137, p. 65 et seq.). It is particularly to this last point that exception is taken by other writers on the geology of these regions. Some regard Drum- mond’s beds and the great sandstone series as of like age, and on the evidence of the fossils occurring in the former, regard the whole as beds of the lower Karoo (Trias)—or at least as a forma- tion of corresponding age, deposited under similar conditions. A very recent writer on the stratigraphy of this part of the continent (Behrend) speaks of the unfossiliferous conglomerates, quartzites, and sandstones which are particularly well displayed in the neighbourhood of the great lakes, as the Tanganyika System ” (14, p. 52). These beds he distinguishes as of different age from similar rocks occurring near Nyasa and in parts of the Congo basin, assigning them to an earlier period—Devonian or even prior to that (14, p. 73 and Taf. iii.). While it may be that the relative age of these different strata is by no means conclusively fixed, these recent investigations show that Moore’s lowest series—the ‘Old African sandstones” as he calls them—really 600 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE comprises two or more formations. In any case all the evidence goes to prove that these sandstones and conglomerates, whatever their age, were laid down under continental, z.e. fresh-water and terrestrial conditions, and thus afford no support for the view that the ocean formerly extended over these large tracts in the heart of Africa. There is yet another geological objection to the view that Tanganyika contains relict forms from an ancient sea, and that is, that the depression itself would not appear to date back to the remote times required by Moores hypothesis. There is every reason to believe that the extensive faulting which produced the Great Rift Valley took place in Middle- Tertiary times, and if this be accepted, the basin of Tanganyika was actually not in existence at the time when the Tiurassic theory supposes it to have received its marine fauna *, Clearly the geological evidence does not favour a marine “relict” origin for the peculiar fauna of Tanganyika, and it has been shown that the testimony of zoology is against it. In order to be convineing, a theory must not run counter to the findings of either branch of science. Since it does not seem possible to accept the Reine: put forward by Moore, alternative suggestions have now to be con- sidered. In the first place, it is important to point out that shells of the thalassoid 'T angapyika genus Paramelania had been compared by White (202: 203) and Tausch (186) with those of the fresh-water Cretaceous genus Pyrgulifera some time before Moore drew his comparisons with marine Jurassic shells. It has been held by conchologists that the resemblance in this case is every whit as close as between any of the forms compared by Moore. This may constitute slender evidence on which to theorise, but it is significant that the beds from which the fossil type comes are not only more recent, but are fresh-water in character and not marine. Thus, if any value attaches to the evidence, it would suggest that the unusual molluscan genera should be regarded as the little modified representatives ota a late secondary fresh-water assemblage rather than those of a much earlier marine one. This view, which implies that the thalassoid Gasteropods are relics of an ancient lake fauna preserved in this basin, obviously did not find acceptance by Moore. He urged against it the pertinent fact that im such a case, similar types, living or fossil, ought to be found in other areas, and yet they are conspicuously absent (137, p. 335), While agreeing that this constitutes a serious objection, the same objection, to my mind, may be raised with equal force against the marine Jurassic hypothesis. Reference has already been made to the fact that certain fossil Gasteropods from the ‘Balkan Peninsula exhibit a considerable resemblance to some of the thalassoid types from Tanganyika * Certain geological exper ts, indeed, regard the Tanganyika basin as more recently produced than other parts of the Rift Valley system. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES, 601 (p. 550). The forms in question, described and figured by Brusina (58:59), come from fresh-water Pliocene beds in Dal- matia, Croatia, and Slavonia. From this it might be argued that the lakes of the Mediterranean region which existed in Tertiary times were the source from which the Tanganyika Gasteropods have been derived. It is not unreasonable to suggest that com- munication was possible between these lakes and the region of Tanganyika by way of the valley of the Nile and the Great Rift Valley. While less objection can be taken to this view than to Moore’s, or even to the suggestion of a Cretaceous origin for the molluses, there are difficulties in accepting it as a complete solution of the problem. To confirm this theory, either fossil forms of like nature should be forthcoming in some intermediate region, or (as a communication to the north of Tanganyika is assumed) living types should be found in Lakes Kivu, Edward, or Albert. Since neither are known to occur, the case for this source of origin is unsupported. Since the shells of the thalassoid molluses have been held to resemble (1) marine Jurassic types of the Anglo-Norman basin, (2) in one instance a widely distributed fresh- or brackish-water genus from the Upper Cretaceous of Hungary and North America, (3) a series of fresh-water fossils from beds of Newer Tertiary age in Jugo-Slavia, the evidence afforded is so contra- dictory as to offer little guidance in determining the origin of the fauna of Tanganyika. It is a very natural suggestion that the thalassoid appearance of the Tanganyika Gasteropods is directly due to the size, depth, and quasi-oceanic conditions prevailing in such a lake *. ‘That is to say, that a marine aspect has been produced in certain members of the ordinary African fresh-water series as the result of convergence. To those who have visited these lakes and realised their vastness this seems plausible, but the difficulty has then to be faced, that similar forms are not forthcoming in Nyasa and Victoria Nyanza. An hypothesis in which this view is introduced, but which has other novel features, was brought before the International Congress of Zoology in 1913 by Germain (87). He holds that previous writers have been wrong in considering Tanganyika by itself, and urges that a clearer understanding of the facts becomes possible on taking into account the organisms which inhabit neighbouring lakes and rivers. Dealing with the Prosobranch Gasteropods, which exhibit par excellence a thalassoid facies, Germain asserts that while Tanganyika contains a much larger series of such forms than any other lake, it is not the sole locality in which they may be found. He considers that Lakes Mwero and Nyasa, as well as the Upper and Middle Congo, contain a number of Prosobranchs (chiefly Melaniide) the marine aspect of which it is impossible to deny. Proceeding to discuss the * A corresponding suggestion has been made to explain the marine appearance of certain Crustacea and other organisms in Lake Baikal. Proc, Zoou. Soc.—1920, No. XL. 40 602 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE geological aspect of the problem, he states that very extensive lacustrine deposits are actually known in Central Africa, reaching from the Congo basin to ‘Tanganyika and from that lake nf Victoria Nyanza on the one hand and Nyasa on the other. From such considerations he supposes that there formerly existed in east-central Africa a vast lake basin which united the Middle and Upper Congo with Nyasa and Tanganyika and_ probably Victoria Nyanza. Living in this region was a uniform fresh- water fauna specially rich in Prosobranchs. After the formation of the Great Rift Valley the lakes were isolated in their present basins, where modifications of the original fauna resulted from the new environment. Lake Tanganyika, possessing most nearly the characteristics of the ocean, became inhabited. by molluscs which have assumed (by a phenomenom of convergence) a marine aspect in the highest degree*. With this conception I do not find myself wholly in accord. Without expressing an opinion on the nature of the Gasteropods of Nyasa and the Upper Congo region, there are two serious objections to its acceptance. In the first place, there is in- sufficient geological evidence for a lake basin so large in extent— the deposits in this area being probably terrestrial and fluviatile. In the second place, there is no reason why the conditions in Nyasa and Victoria Nyanza, which closely resemble those of Tanganyika, should not have produced an equally striking series of thalassoid Gasteropods in those lakes, and yet this is not the case. At the same time I am quite prepared to agree that the marine aspect of the molluscs is probably due to convergence. Another obvious suggestion is that the salinity of the water has been a determining factor in producing marine-like forms. Here it is much less easy to come to a decision, for the question of increased salinity is of course directly associated with that of a period of isolation. But prolonged isolation itself, with the opportunity it affords of development free from competition with the outside world, is obviously a cause predisposing to the pro- duction of new characters. Where isolation and a gradual increase in salinity have coexisted, it is difficult to recognise which factor is responsible for a particular result. Experimental evidence is not wanting to: show that certain salts, even im minute quantities, exert a profound influence on aquatic organ- isms, but it does not follow that a marine aspect would be produced as a result. West, indeed, goes so far as to assert that the Algz of Tanganyika which exhibit marine affinities may well have been produced by a gradual increase in the salinity of the lake during an extended period of time (200, p. 191). Here, it is true, the Eco factors are inextricably associated, but if the suggestion is not unreasonable for the Alge, the surmise may be * Since this account has been in the press, a still more recent. paper by Germain has reached my hands—* Histoire Océanographique des Lacs de |’ Afrique Orientale.” Bull. Inst. Océanogr. Monaco, No. 369, 1920. In it, he adds little which is new, merely re-affirming the opinions expressed in his earlier article, FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 603 hazarded that the thalassoid Gasteropod shells owe their nature to the same cause. Be this as it may, there are additiona] com- plications affecting the salinity of Tanganyika. It has been shown that Tanganyika had probably no outlet until a portion of the Nile basin became cut off and Kivu drained south into the lake (p. 515). It has also been pointed out that since Kivu water contains an excessive amount of magnesium salts, that lake is probably the source from which the high per- centage in Tanganyika has been derived (p. 570). If these probabilities be accepted, certain conclusions as to salinity follow. During the first period the salinity may well have been consider- able, though there is no evidence as to its nature. The lake subsequently freshened, but eventually its waters became rich in salts of magnesium. ‘Thus any effect which the saline nature of the water may have exerted on the organisms of the lake may have been due to either of these conditions, or to a combination of both. As already suggested, there may even exist an irregu- larity in the outflow of the lake, due to the forming and breaking of dams in the bed of the Lukuga River (p. 515). If this be the case, the salinity of Tanganyika has not only changed consider- ably in the past, but may still be changing materially from time to time. The view that Tanganyika owes its remarkable organisms—not merely the thalassoid forms—to a long-protracted period of isolation, has been advocated by several writers, and remains, on the whole, the most likely suggestion put forward. The possible effect of an increased salinity, which isolation would involve, must of necessity be coupled with this, but it is not regarded as the prime factor. This view has the _ positive advantage that it does not run counter to geological conceptions, but fits in with what is believed to be the past history of the lake. ‘Testimony in favour of it is afforded by the very remarkable nature of the Cichlid fishes which Tanganyika contains. This group has long been known to show a ‘peculiar facility for colonising isolated and often saline waters, though the agency by which this is effected is not understood. What then more likely than that the Cichlids were among the earliest inhabitants of the lake, where, without having to compete with other types of fish, they multiplied unchecked and became differentiated into new genera and species (cf. 26, p. 423). It is hardly necessary to point out that this isolation hypothesis does not assume that Tanganyika was stocked from any exceptional source. That is to say, the lake did not receive its fauna from an ancient sea, but in the same manner as the neighbouring fresh-waters, the original similarity of its fauna to — those of the other lakes being secondarily lost by marked divergences of form consequent upon prolonged isolation. The marine aspect of certain Gasteropods would thus be regarded merely due to convergence. Viewed in this light, the case of Tanganyika is closely analogous to that of oceanic islands, 40* 604 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE which, as isolated areas of land, are well known to possess faunas and floras largely peculiar to themselves. The last-mentioned hypothesis, even if satisfactory in the main, makes no attempt to account for the presence of the medusa in Tanganyika, and accordingly a few sentences are needed on this aspect of the question. In dealing with the distribution of African fresh-water fishes, Boulenger has discussed the problem of Tanganyika, and states that he cannot admit Moore’s contentions (26, p. 422). He refers to the inconclusive evidence afforded by the so-called halolimnic Gasteropods, and clearly regards the medusa (now known from other parts of the continent) as the only organism in the lake for which it is necessary to aecount in any special manner. He points out that paleontological evidence exists of a Middle Kocene (Lutetian) sea which extended over a large area in Northern Africa (vide also Hudleston 102, p. 352), and suggests that this would afford a rational explanation of the present distribution of the medusa in Africa. With this view Gravier is not in agreement (90, p. 221). He gives it as his opinion that the medusa may well have migrated from the sea at a recent epoch, especially should it possess a hydroid stage, as is held likely by Browne (cf. 56, p. 306). Its present distribution in Africa he explains by reference to the possibilities of intercommunication between the river systems. Having dealt at considerable length—as becomes its 1mport- ance --with the fauna of Tanganyika and the views put forward to account for its very unusual character, 14 is now possible to proceed to a brief study of the remaining lake faunas. While there are smaller totals and fewer peculiar types, the bigger lakes at least are not devoid of interest. Victoria Nyanza, with 38 per cent. of endemic species, clearly has characteristics of its own, these being more prominent in some groups than in others. By far the most conspicuous group is the Pisces, containing, as in the case of Tanganyika, the largest series of forms. It comprises also over half the total number of endemic species and the only two endemic genera. ‘The Mollusca again are noteworthy, but in this case the Lamellibranchs are more striking than the Gasteropods, exhibiting a larger pro- portion of endemic types. Of the few Ostracods recorded from the lake, 5 out of 7 are described as peculiar, and the Oligochete worms are represented by 6 species, 4 of which are endemic. Victoria is the only lake besides Tanganyika which contains the medusa, though this should perhaps be regarded as subspecifically distinct. It is only in this lake that the common Hydra is known to occur. Many groups are wholly without endemic representatives. Generally speaking, Lake Nyasa exhibits very similar features, but with rather fewer peculiar forms. Fishes constitute half the total number of endemics, and 5 endemic genera out of 6, A considerable number of molluscs are known, nearly half being FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 605 peculiar to the lake. Nyasa contains an endemic genus belong- ing to the Argulide, and the Ostracoda are well represented, 8 species being endemic out of 17. It is strange that no aquatic snakes and no Polyzoa have yet been recorded ; on the other hand, Nyasa alone of the lakes under review contains aquatic tortoises referred to the Trionychide. The three smaller lakes contain representatives of fewer animal groups, but it is possible that this is merely due to less syste- matic investigation.— Albert Nyanza displays only i3 per cent. of endemic forms, which are mostly Mollusca, while it has no endemic fish. The genus Limnocaridella (prawn) is the only genus peculiar to the lake.—Edward Nyanza contains a more interesting series of fish, with one genus and six species endemic. Only 3 molluscs are peculiar out of a total of 15, and there is little else which calls for comment.—In Kivu, representatives of only 6 groups of animals are at present known to occur. While future exploration may bring other forms to light, the poverty of its fauna is probably connected with the exceptional salinity of the water. Out of a total of 23 species, there are 13 fishes, 3 being endemic, while the only other endemic type is an Oligochete worm. The apparent absence of the hippo- potamus and the crocodile is a point of some interest. Similarly no Lamellibranchs appear to occur, although two forms of Gasteropod are known. It is obvious that none of these lakes exhibit such striking forms as Tanganyika, and that while endemie types are not wanting, these are fewer in number and for the most part only specific in character. Apart from the presence of the medusa in Lake Victoria, there is nothing to suggest a special connection with the sea. In broad terms it may be said that the lakes contain the ordinary fresh-water fauna of Africa modified in varying degree in each case. Where such modification is con- siderable, as in Victoria Nyanza and less markedly Nyasa, it may well have been caused by a period of isolation proportional to the relative peculiarity of the fauna. It is more especially the fish - fauna of these lakes which is rich in endemic species and shows certain endemic genera, and from this evidence 1t would seem that Lake Victoria remained isolated for a longer period than Nyasa (cf. p. 536). If isolation be accepted as accounting for the remarkable fauna of Tanganyika, it is clear that a still longer period must have been necessary in that case to produce such notable results. 3 There are certain other matters concerning the distribution of animals in the African lakes which are brought out by this com- parative survey. While representatives occur of most of those groups which may be expected in tropical fresh-waters, there are some interesting exceptions. It comes as a surprise to a Euro- pean naturalist to find no fresh-water Isopods such as Asellus, or Amphipods such as Gammarus, yet these familiar forms appear to be conspicuously absent from the tropical parts of Africa, 606 DR. W. A. CUNNINGLON ON THE though the genus Gammarus is recorded from. the north and south of the continent. Why such types are wanting it would be idle to speculate, but the fact is also emphasised by Stuhlmann in more than one place (181, p. 1268: 182, p. 652). It is strange too, that among the intestinal parasites of the fresh-water fish there appear to be no species of Hcehinorhynchus, although they are common in the fish of European rivers. Daday, it is true, has described a larval form from a species of Ostracod taken in a small East African lake (76, p. 55). Thus, while Asellws and Gammarus are commonly the intermediate hosts, it is evident that the absence of these genera does not form a complete barrier to the distribution of Mchinorhynchus, and Daday con- siders that it will yet prove common. in Africa. At present, however, the adult form is entirely unknown. Concerning the numerical distribution of species in the lakes, there is one point which calls for further notice. From a study of the lists of forms found in each lake, Moore believed that a definite relation existed between numbers and size. After reviewing the facts then at his disposal, he writes :—‘“ It is thus obvious that from some cause or other the number of specific forms in an African lake is roughly proportional to the size of the lake itself” (137, p. 146). This does not mean that the smaller lakes are less well stocked with animals, but simply that the number of species they contain is less. The matter has already been referred to in the systematic section, and it has moreover been shown that the principle appears capable of extension to the number of genera and even families (pp. 535, 548). With the total figures for the six lakes now available, it is possible to test the correctness of this conception on a more extended basis. The totals for species and genera are therefore given in tabular form, with the lakes (apart from Tanganyika) arranged in order of size. Tangan- Victoria Albert Edward yika. Nyanza. lyels Nyanza. Nyanza. — Number of Species ......... 402 289 361 67 54 23 OO & Goneean eee 168 139 178 48 35 13 ‘Tanganyika, which heads the list, is in every sense to be regarded as a case apart, but the figures for the remaining lakes should accord with this law-—if such it be. A descending series is seen to exist: Nyasa it is true constitutes an exception, but, as already explained, its totals have been artificially swollen in certain directions “p. 595). Nyasa conforms to the rule in the case of the Pisces and Mollusca—it is the addition of many types of Rotifera and Protozoa which chiefly accounts for the large total figure for the lake. pl FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 607 A very similar result is arrived at on comparing the number of groups represented in the different lakes. From Victoria Nyanza downwards the decrease in size is accompanied by a decrease in the number of groups present. The figures (including Tangan- yika for comparison) are found to be as follows :—Tanganyika 26 (groups), Victoria 25, Nyasa 24, Albert 15, Edward 14, and Kivu 6. It is possible, however, that the low totals for the smaller lakes are, in part, a result of less complete investigation. Enough has been said to show that Moore’s contention is substantially correct as far as these African lakes are concerned. It would be interesting to discover whether a similar relation between size and number of specific forms can be made out for other groups of lakes or even if it is a principle of general appli- cation. Moore makes a comparison, which would seem to be justified, between this phenomenon and that exhibited by the flora of oceanic islands, where the smaller the island,—although it may be as thickly covered with vegetation as any other area, the fewer the species of plants which inhabit it. The last matter to be considered is the undoubted affinity which exists between certain African and Indian fresh-water types—an affinity which has been noticed already, when re- viewing the groups In which it is most pronounced, This inter- relationship i is exhibited in many groups of animals, and extends not merely to forms from the Indian Peninsula itself, but from the whole of that part of Asia, including the Malay Archipelago. An interesting account of these affinities is given by Annandale in a paper entitled “The African Klement in the Freshwater Fauna of British India” (10). So far as the present treatise is concerned, consideration is limited to those animals which are known to occur in one or other of the big African lakes. Briefly enumerating the cases, the Cyprinide and Mastacembelidee among the fishes indicate this affinity in a marked degree. The Polyzoa afford striking evidence, since the genus Arachnoidea is known from Tanganyika and East indian’ seas, while in the case of Plumatella (Afrindella) tanganyike the actual species has been found in an Indian lake as well as in Tanganyika. Caridina nilotica with its varietal forms occurs in several of the African lakes, while it 1s widely distributed in Indian and Malay regions and extends still further east into Australia. Among the Coelenterata a medusa has now been found in India which is generically identical with that from Tanganyika and Victoria Nyanza, while finally among the sponges Spongilla carteri from Lake Victoria is known in India and Java. This is not the place to discuss the geological evidence for a former land-connection between these areas, but the views commonly held can be stated in a few words. During the Carboniferous period, and persisting subsequently through the Permian and Triassic, there appears to have existed a vast tropical continent which extended from Brazil to Australia, embracing of course Africa and India. This continent is known 608 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE as Gondwanaland. In the ensuing period—the Jurassic—Gond- wanaland began to break up, but there is some evidence that in late Cretaceous or even early Tertiary times a land-bridge still existed between Hast Africa and the Indo-Malayan region, by way of the Seychelles and Maldives. The geological record is thus quite in keeping with the facts of distribution to which reference has been made. In bringing this study to a conclusion, it must be admitted that in many directions information is very limited. There is no doubt that the discovery of additional species is to be expected whenever a re-examination of any of the lakes occurs, but there are other points of considerable interest on which knowledge is much to be desired. Despite the investigations of Moore in Nyasa and Tanganyika, very little is really known concerning the deeper regions of any of the lakes, and the existence of a distinct abyssal fauna is uncertain. In a paper dealing with the distribution of the molluses, Moore speaks of obtaining certain thalassoid forms in Tanganyika at a depth of 800-1200 feet (244-366 metres) (129, p. 171). He vegarded these particular Gasteropods as a deep-water assemblage, but a more thorough examination may well reveal other animals which permanently inhabit the bottom muds. There is little doubt from an analogy with other deep lakes that the deeper waters of these African Jakes are almost, if not quite, devoid of life. At the same time, further investigation may indicate a definite association of abyssal forms not only in Tanganyika, but in the other lakes under review.— Associated likewise with the distribution of organisms within the limits of the lakes are questions such as the vertical distribution of plankton forms, as ascertained by tow-nettings. During the Third Tanganyika Expedition my operations were practically confined to surface tow-nettinys, but special tow-nets worked from suitable craft would afford the necessary information.—- Again, the seasonal variations of plankton organisms are almost unknown, although [ was able to detect a marked decrease in the quantity of material during the rainy season. Detailed know- ledge of this kind can only be gained by the aid of large collections extending over many months.—The distribution of local forms or varieties within the limits of a single lake was discussed by Moore in his book. He considered that certain well-marked varieties or even species were confined to particular areas in the greater African lakes (137, p. 149). My own observations lead to a different conclusion, and the matter undoubtedly merits further investigation. Lastly, there are some outstanding physical matters which are of importance on account of their relation to biological pheno- mena. Very little is known concerning the chemical impurities of the water in these lakes, and even the depth and general nature of the basin is imperfectly known save for Tanganyika, Victoria and Nyasa. Further knowledge is likewise desirable as FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 609 to water temperatures, seiches, and the possible occurrence ot temperature seiches. It is clear, nevertheless, that from the facts already established, a reasonably tsue conception may be formed both as to the nature of the lakes themselves and that of the organisms which they contain. It has been the aim of this work to supply a connected account of these facts, based on the most recent particulars. Considering the difficulties which beset the investigator in a tropical climate far from civilisation, the amount of information available is not disereditable to those concerned. 5. SUMMARY. The special interest attaching to this comparative study of African lakes is due to the remarkable nature of the fauna of Tanganyika. That lake was discovered in 1858 by Burton and Speke, the latter bringing back with him shells considered to have a distinctly marine appearance. Subsequent collections emphasised this point, and interest was further increased by the discovery of a medusa by Bohm. A scientific expedition to investigate the fauna was despatched in 1895 in charge of J. E.S. Moore. ‘The rich and unusual nature of the fauna then collected led him to formulate the hypothesis that Tanganyika represents an old Jurassic sea. In order to test the validity of this: hypothesis, a second expedition, on which Moore was accompanied by Fer- gusson, left England in 1899. The result was held by Moore to justify the theory, and he embodied his conelusions in a work entitled ‘* The Tanganyika Problem,” published in 1903. As the aquatic flora had not been taken into account, a third expedition was despatched to rectify that omission and make a further collection of animals. This left in 1904 in charge of the writer, returning in 1905. More recently still, in 1912-13, the Belgian expedition of Louis Stappers visited the lake and obtained additional information. The scope of this paper includes, besides Tanganyika, the five adjacent lakes of most interest, viz.:— Victoria Nyanza, Nyasa, Albert Nyanza, Edward Nyanza, and Kivu. All these, with the exception of Lake Victoria, occupy portions of the Great Rift Valley, which has probably been formed by trough-faulting on a stupendous scale. They he in long narrow depressions bounded by escarpments rising to a height of two or three thousand feet above the level of the water. Nyasa and Tanganyika are very deep, the former reaching to over 780 metres and the latter to no less than 1435 metres. Victoria Nyanza has the largest area, but occupies only a shallow basin bounded by low hills. In all the lakes, but especially the largest, conditions are almost oceanic. Climatic differences are negligible, but water tempera- tures are uniformly high, showing an average of about 26° C. Analyses of the water have been made in very few instances. The water of Tanganyika, while fresh, is unusually rich in salts 610 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE of magnesium, and that of Kivu contains excessive quantities of the latter as well as sedium salts. It is likely that the salinity of Tanganyika was greater formerly, and may still be subject to variation. Hvidence exists of a considerable rise and fall in the level of the lake, yet it seems probable that rainfall and evapora- tion are very nearly balanced. ‘There is reason to believe that Tanganyika had no outlet until it received an additional water supply from the Kivu basin, which was cut off from the Nile, and added to the drainage area of the big lake by the formation of a volcanic dam in recent geological times. ‘Tanganyika would thus have been completely isolated and its waters more saline until an outflow was established. The present efHuent appears to have been formed as an afiuent, its bed being finally captured by a tributary of the Congo. MOVEMENTS OF NECTURUS AND CRYPTOBRANGHUS. 65] by him in Vecturus does not include the gross flapping of the ex- ternal gills. ‘There is, therefore, an apparent textual discrepancy between his account and mine, which will doubtless be cleared by further independent observations. Bruner fortifies his statements concerning the ‘“ bucco-pharyngeal mechanism” by a careful description of the choanal valve of WVectwrws; and he seems to assign a preponderating role to the gill-clefts in the branchial respiration of this genus. It is not altogether inconceivable that in different parts of its climatic range, as well as under diverse laboratory conditions, the several components of the respiratory tract may vary in the relative frequency of their turns. The behaviour of Cryptobranchus informs us that not every yawn is an act of breathing. No contrast could be more realistic than that between the restless, air-craving Cryptobranchus and the listless, gill-waving Vecturus when viewed at the right biological moment in the splendidly appointed tanks of the New York Aquarium. McGill University, Montreal, October 10, 1920. Ags PLR Tea ee ee ily. op f $ ve 4 on pas r it t . oy Co | eye , inf Ps ee Salas axl ; - 4 n pte 74 ry 4 rk F 3 ( : 4 y _ = ok as ws 4 he oe q ' uy = i i : ; a “4 & : 3 Tt ; i! " ; * m “ y Beet i i at had + é. f ; 7 ; “ = : : a 4 oe Rl ; ; ch ; a > r : : ‘ \ f i. . } ; ola al 7 rt ~ Tt 0 . F . Ag oul ' 1 i : J ‘ i 1 ‘ : : ’ —— n AY ii i Xs : rm ; ' wy } \ 2. ic cibg ees. ae eine